Canon 3030 All in One Printer User Manual

Lar g e F o r m a t P r i n t e r
User Manual
ENG
Contents
Contents
Introduction
1
How to use this manual.....................................................................................1
About This User Manual...............................................................................................................1
Searching Topics..........................................................................................................................3
HTML Version of the Manual for Printing......................................................................................5
Printer Parts
13
Printer parts.....................................................................................................13
Front...........................................................................................................................................13
Back...........................................................................................................................................14
Top Cover (Inside)......................................................................................................................15
Tray Feed Area...........................................................................................................................16
Roll Feed Unit Cover (Inside).....................................................................................................17
Carriage......................................................................................................................................18
Ink Tank Cover (Inside)...............................................................................................................19
Vents..........................................................................................................................................20
Control Panel..............................................................................................................................21
Control Panel...................................................................................................24
Control Panel..............................................................................................................................24
Turning the Printer On and Off...................................................................................................27
Printer Modes.............................................................................................................................29
Switching Modes........................................................................................................................34
Printer Menu Operations............................................................................................................37
Main Menu Operations...............................................................................................................39
Menu Structure...........................................................................................................................44
Main Menu Settings....................................................................................................................59
Main Menu Settings (During Printing)........................................................................................70
Submenu Display.......................................................................................................................73
Status Print.................................................................................................................................74
Optional accessories.......................................................................................81
Stand..........................................................................................................................................81
Roll Holder Set...........................................................................................................................82
Printer Specifications.......................................................................................83
Specifications.............................................................................................................................83
Basic Environmental Performance.............................................................................................88
Print Area....................................................................................................................................89
Basic Printing Workflow
91
Printing procedure...........................................................................................91
Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets...................................................................................91
Loading and Printing on Rolls....................................................................................................93
Contents �
Contents
Loading and Printing on Sheets in the Paper Feed Slot............................................................98
Printing from Windows.............................................................................................................100
Printing from Mac OS X............................................................................................................101
Canceling print jobs.......................................................................................103
Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel...........................................................................103
Canceling Print Jobs from Windows.........................................................................................105
Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X.......................................................................................106
Handling Paper
108
Paper.............................................................................................................108
Types of Paper.........................................................................................................................108
Paper Sizes.............................................................................................................................. 113
Handling rolls................................................................................................. 116
Selecting the Paper Source...................................................................................................... 116
Selecting the Paper Type (Roll)................................................................................................ 117
Specifying the Paper Length (Roll)........................................................................................... 118
Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder.............................................................................................. 119
Loading Rolls in the Roll Feed Unit..........................................................................................121
Loading the Roll in the Printer..................................................................................................122
Removing the Roll from the Printer..........................................................................................124
Removing Rolls from the Roll Feed Unit..................................................................................125
Removing Rolls From the Roll Holder......................................................................................126
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper...................................................................................................127
Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot).............................................................................130
Feeding Roll Paper Manually...................................................................................................131
Detection of the Remaining Roll Paper....................................................................................132
Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls...................................................................................133
Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls...................................................................................135
Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically.............................................................140
Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls............................................................................................141
Roll Holder Set.........................................................................................................................142
Attaching Accessories to the Roll Holder.................................................................................143
Feeding Paper from the Roll Feed Unit....................................................................................145
Removing the Roll Feed Unit...................................................................................................146
Installing the Roll Feed Unit.....................................................................................................147
Handling sheets.............................................................................................148
Selecting the Paper Source......................................................................................................148
Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet)............................................................................................149
Selecting the Paper Size (Sheet).............................................................................................150
Loading Sheets Manually.........................................................................................................151
Removing Sheets from the Top Paper Feed Slot.....................................................................157
Removing Heavyweight Paper from the Front Paper Feed Slot..............................................158
Clearing Jammed Paper from the Tray....................................................................................159
Output Stacker...............................................................................................162
Output Stacker Precautions.....................................................................................................162
Using the Output Stacker.........................................................................................................163
ii Contents
Contents
Working With Various Print Jobs
165
Printing Photos and Images...........................................................................165
Printing Photos and Images.....................................................................................................165
Printing Photos and Images (Windows)...................................................................................167
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X).................................................................................169
Printing Photos in Monochrome...............................................................................................172
Printing Photos in Monochrome (Windows).............................................................................173
Printing Photos in Monochrome (Mac OS X)...........................................................................175
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Photos (Windows).....................................178
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Photos (Mac OS X)...................................180
Printing from Photoshop...........................................................................................................183
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Windows)..................................................................................184
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X).................................................................................187
Printing CAD Drawings..................................................................................190
Printing CAD Drawings.............................................................................................................190
Printing Line Drawings and Text...............................................................................................190
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows).............................................................................191
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X)...........................................................................193
Printing Office Documents.............................................................................196
Printing Office Documents........................................................................................................196
Printing Office Documents (Windows)......................................................................................197
Printing Office Documents (Mac OS X)....................................................................................199
Using the Printer With a Color imageRUNNER.............................................201
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER.............................201
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Windows)...........201
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X).........204
Enhanced Printing Options
206
Adjusting Images...........................................................................................206
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver...................................................................................206
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows).............................................................210
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X)...........................................................213
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing....................................216
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows)..........................................220
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS X)........................................222
Choosing Paper for Printing...........................................................................225
Choosing a Paper for Printing..................................................................................................225
Selecting the Paper Type (Roll)................................................................................................226
Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet)............................................................................................227
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver......................................................................................228
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows)....................................................................229
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X)..................................................................231
Printing enlargements or reductions..............................................................233
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size.............................................................................233
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)...........................................................234
Contents iii
Contents
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X).........................................................236
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width....................................................................................239
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)..................................................................240
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X)................................................................242
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value.......................................................................245
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows).....................................................246
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS X)....................................................248
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER.............................251
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Windows)...........252
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X).........254
Printing at full size..........................................................................................256
Printing on Oversized Paper....................................................................................................256
Printing at Full Size (Windows)................................................................................................258
Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X)...............................................................................................260
Borderless Printing at Actual Size............................................................................................263
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)..........................................................................265
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)........................................................................267
Borderless Printing........................................................................................270
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size......................................................................270
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows).......................272
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X).....................274
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width................................................277
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)..............................279
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X)............................281
Borderless Printing at Actual Size............................................................................................284
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)..........................................................................286
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)........................................................................288
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes............................................291
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing)..............................................291
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows)..............................292
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X)............................296
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes....................................................................................300
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)..................................................................301
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X).................................................................305
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet...............................................................307
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other.........................................................................307
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows).......................................................309
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X)..................................................... 311
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously.......................................................................................313
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows).....................................................................314
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X)...................................................................315
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet............................................................................................317
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows)..........................................................................318
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X)........................................................................320
Printing Posters in Sections.....................................................................................................323
Printing Large Posters (Windows)............................................................................................324
iv Contents
Contents
Centering originals.........................................................................................326
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls........................................................................................326
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows)......................................................................327
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X)....................................................................329
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets.....................................................................................332
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows)...................................................................333
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X).................................................................335
Conserving roll paper.....................................................................................337
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees.......................................................337
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows).....................................338
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS X)....................................340
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins.......................343
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows).....344
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X)...346
Checking Images Before Printing..................................................................349
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing...................................................................349
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Windows).................................................351
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Mac OS X)...............................................353
Other useful settings......................................................................................354
Printing With Watermarks.........................................................................................................354
Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows)......................................355
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation..................................................357
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows)................................358
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS X)..............................360
Using Favorites........................................................................................................................363
Using Favorites (Windows)......................................................................................................364
Using Favorites (Mac OS X).....................................................................................................366
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing...............................................................................................367
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows).............................................................................368
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X)...........................................................................369
Printing in Ideal Colors for Light in the Viewing Environment...................................................371
Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing (Windows)...................................................372
Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing (Mac OS X).................................................376
Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light (Windows).......................................380
Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light (Mac OS X).....................................383
Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors.................................................................................386
Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors (Windows)...............................................................388
Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors (Mac OS X).............................................................391
Windows Software
394
Printer Driver..................................................................................................394
Printer Driver Settings (Windows)............................................................................................394
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows)....................................................................396
Confirming Print Settings (Windows)........................................................................................398
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Windows).................................................400
Using Favorites (Windows)......................................................................................................402
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows)....................................404
Contents Contents
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows)..........406
Main Sheet (Windows).............................................................................................................408
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Windows)................................................................ 411
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows).......................................................................412
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Windows)............................................413
Color Adjustment Sheet: Color (Windows)...............................................................................414
Matching Sheet (Windows)......................................................................................................416
Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome (Windows)...................................................................420
Gray Adjustment Sheet (Windows)..........................................................................................422
Page Setup Sheet (Windows)..................................................................................................423
Paper Size Options Dialog Box (Windows)..............................................................................425
Layout Sheet (Windows)..........................................................................................................426
Page Options Dialog Box (Windows).......................................................................................428
Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows)...................................................................................429
Favorites Sheet (Windows)......................................................................................................430
Utility Sheet (Windows)............................................................................................................432
Support Sheet (Windows)........................................................................................................433
Device Settings Sheet (Windows)............................................................................................434
Settings Summaries Dialog Box (Windows).............................................................................435
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Windows)..................................................................................436
Status Monitor................................................................................................439
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)............................................................................439
Digital Photo Front-Access............................................................................440
Digital Photo Front-Access.......................................................................................................440
PosterArtist....................................................................................................441
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals.................................................................................441
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals (Windows)...............................................................442
Device Setup Utility........................................................................................444
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility......................................................................................444
Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility......................................................................445
Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility................................446
Mac OS X Software
447
Printer Driver..................................................................................................447
Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)..........................................................................................447
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X)..................................................................448
Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X)......................................................................................450
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Mac OS X)...............................................452
Using Favorites (Mac OS X).....................................................................................................453
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Mac OS X)..................................454
Main Pane (Mac OS X)............................................................................................................455
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Mac OS X)..............................................................458
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X).....................................................................459
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Mac OS X)...........................................460
Color Settings Pane: Color.......................................................................................................461
Matching Pane.........................................................................................................................463
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X).......................................................................468
vi Contents
Contents
Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS X)..........................................................................................469
Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X).................................................................................................470
Utility Pane (Mac OS X)...........................................................................................................472
Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X)......................................................................................473
Support Pane (Mac OS X)........................................................................................................474
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X).................................................................................475
Printmonitor...................................................................................................478
imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)..............................................................................478
Network Setting
479
Network Setting.............................................................................................479
Network Environment...............................................................................................................479
Configuring the IP Address on the Printer................................................................................481
Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility................................482
Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel....................................................483
Configuring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands................................................484
Using RemoteUI.......................................................................................................................486
Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings..................................................................487
Configuring the Printer's AppleTalk Network Settings..............................................................489
Configuring the Printer's NetWare Network Settings................................................................490
Specifying Printer-Related Information.....................................................................................492
Email Notification When Printing is Finished or Errors Occur..................................................493
Initializing the Network Settings...............................................................................................494
Network Setting (Windows)...........................................................................495
Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows)..............................................................495
Sharing the Printer in Windows................................................................................................496
Configuring the Printer's NetWare Network Settings................................................................498
Specifying the Printer's Frame Type.........................................................................................500
Specifying NetWare Print Services...........................................................................................502
Specifying NetWare Protocols..................................................................................................505
Configuring NetWare Network Settings....................................................................................507
Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility......................................................................508
Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility................................509
Network Setting (Mac OS X)..........................................................................510
Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh)............................................................510
Configuring the Printer's AppleTalk Network Settings.............................................................. 511
Configuring the Destination for AppleTalk Network (Macintosh)..............................................512
Configuring the Destination for TCP/IP Network (Macintosh)..................................................515
Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network (Macintosh).................................................517
Hard Disk
518
Hard Disk.......................................................................................................518
Printer Hard Disk Operations...................................................................................................518
Saved Print Jobs......................................................................................................................520
Saving Print Jobs Sent from Sources Other than the Printer Driver........................................523
Saving Print Jobs.....................................................................................................................525
Do Not Save Print Jobs in the Common Box...........................................................................528
Contents vii
Contents
Managing Queued Jobs (Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs)................................................529
Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes....................................................................................532
Naming Personal Boxes...........................................................................................................536
Displaying a List of Saved Jobs...............................................................................................540
Printing a List of Saved Jobs....................................................................................................544
Printing Saved Jobs.................................................................................................................545
Moving Saved Jobs..................................................................................................................551
Displaying Details of Saved Jobs.............................................................................................556
Renaming Saved Jobs.............................................................................................................560
Deleting Saved Jobs................................................................................................................565
Checking the Free Hard Disk Space........................................................................................569
Erasing Data on the Printer's Hard Disk...................................................................................571
Adjustments for Better Print Quality
572
Adjusting the Printhead..................................................................................572
Correcting Print Misalignment..................................................................................................572
Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Automatically.....................................................................572
Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Manually............................................................................574
Adjusting the Printhead Height.................................................................................................576
Adjusting the feed amount.............................................................................577
Adjusting the Feed Amount Automatically................................................................................577
Adjusting the Feed Amount Manually.......................................................................................580
Adjusting the Measurement Scale for Better Accuracy............................................................583
Adjusting Color on the Trailing Edge of Sheets........................................................................585
Adjusting the Vacuum Strength................................................................................................587
Color adjustment............................................................................................588
Using Color Calibration to Adjust Colors..................................................................................588
Printing in Ideal Colors for Light in the Viewing Environment...................................................591
Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing (Windows)...................................................592
Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing (Mac OS X).................................................596
Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light (Windows).......................................600
Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light (Mac OS X).....................................603
Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors.................................................................................606
Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors (Windows)...............................................................608
Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors (Mac OS X)............................................................. 611
Maintenance
614
Ink Tanks........................................................................................................614
Ink Tanks..................................................................................................................................614
Replacing Ink Tanks.................................................................................................................615
Checking Ink Tank Levels.........................................................................................................621
When to Replace Ink Tanks......................................................................................................622
Printheads......................................................................................................623
Printhead..................................................................................................................................623
Checking the Print Quality........................................................................................................623
Improving the Print Quality.......................................................................................................623
Checking for Nozzle Clogging..................................................................................................624
viii Contents
Contents
Cleaning the Printhead.............................................................................................................625
Replacing the Printhead...........................................................................................................626
Maintenance Cartridge..................................................................................633
Maintenance Cartridge.............................................................................................................633
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge......................................................................................633
Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge Capacity......................................................638
When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge..........................................................................639
Cleaning the Printer.......................................................................................640
Cleaning the Printer Exterior....................................................................................................640
Cleaning Inside the Top Cover.................................................................................................641
Cleaning the Paper Retainer....................................................................................................644
Cleaning Spurs Used in Paper Feeding...................................................................................645
Cleaning the Printhead.............................................................................................................648
Other Maintenance........................................................................................649
Preparing to Transfer the Printer..............................................................................................649
Updating the Firmware.............................................................................................................653
Troubleshooting
654
Frequently Asked Questions..........................................................................654
Frequently Asked Questions....................................................................................................654
Problems Regarding Paper...........................................................................656
Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot).............................................................................656
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper...................................................................................................657
Clearing Jammed Paper from the Tray....................................................................................661
Roll paper cannot be inserted into the Paper Feed Slot...........................................................664
Cannot Load Sheets.................................................................................................................664
Paper is not cut straight............................................................................................................664
Paper cannot be cut.................................................................................................................664
Depression on the leading edge is left.....................................................................................664
Roller marks are left across the trailing edge of paper.............................................................664
Printing does not start....................................................................................665
The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not light up.............................................................665
The Printer Does Not Respond Even if Print Jobs are Sent.....................................................665
The Display Screen indicates the system is filling with ink.......................................................665
The printer stops during a print job................................................................666
An error message is shown on the Display Screen..................................................................666
The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper.................................................................................666
Problems with the printing quality..................................................................667
Printing is faint..........................................................................................................................667
Paper rubs against the Printhead.............................................................................................668
The edges of the paper are dirty..............................................................................................669
The surface of the paper is dirty...............................................................................................670
The back side of the paper is dirty...........................................................................................670
Roller marks are left across the trailing edge of paper.............................................................670
Contents ix
Contents
Immediately After Borderless Printing, the Trailing Edge Margin is Soiled During Regular
Printing.....................................................................................................................................670
Printed colors are inaccurate....................................................................................................671
Banding in different colors occurs............................................................................................672
Colors in printed images are uneven........................................................................................673
Image Edges are Blurred or White Banding Occurs................................................................674
The contrast becomes uneven during printing.........................................................................674
The length of printed images is inaccurate...............................................................................674
White dots about 1 mm (0.039 in) apart appear on printed documents, in the direction
paper is fed...............................................................................................................................674
Documents are printed crooked...............................................................................................675
Documents are printed in monochrome...................................................................................675
Line thickness is not uniform (Windows)..................................................................................675
Lines are misaligned................................................................................................................675
Problems with the printing quality caused by the type of paper...............................................675
Cannot print over a network...........................................................................676
Cannot connect the printer to the network...............................................................................676
Configuring the Communication Mode Manually......................................................................677
Cannot print over a TCP/IP network.........................................................................................678
Cannot print over a NetWare network......................................................................................678
Cannot print over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks....................................................................679
Installation problems......................................................................................680
Removing Installed Printer Drivers...........................................................................................680
Other problems..............................................................................................681
The printer does not go on.......................................................................................................681
If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound......................................................................................681
Messages advising to check the maintenance cartridge are not cleared.................................681
The printer consumes a lot of ink.............................................................................................681
Ink Level Detection...................................................................................................................682
Error Message
684
Responding to Messages..............................................................................684
Responding to Messages.........................................................................................................684
Error Messages........................................................................................................................686
Messages regarding paper............................................................................688
Paper Mismatch.......................................................................................................................688
Papr Type Mismatch.................................................................................................................688
RollWdthMismatch...................................................................................................................689
Paper size not detected............................................................................................................690
Insufficient paper for job...........................................................................................................690
This paper cannot be used.......................................................................................................691
Roll printing is selected............................................................................................................691
Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded........................................................................691
The roll is empty.......................................................................................................................692
Roll feed unit err.......................................................................................................................692
No Roll Feed Unit.....................................................................................................................692
Sheet printing is selected.........................................................................................................692
Contents
Contents
Manual printing is selected, but a roll is loaded........................................................................693
Wrong paper feed slot for this paper type................................................................................693
Paper jam.................................................................................................................................693
Paper loaded askew.................................................................................................................694
Cannot detect papr...................................................................................................................694
Cannot feed paper....................................................................................................................694
Cannot cut paper......................................................................................................................695
End of paper feed.....................................................................................................................695
Borderless printng not possible................................................................................................696
Messages regarding ink.................................................................................697
Ink insufficient...........................................................................................................................697
No ink left.................................................................................................................................697
Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected..........................................................698
Ink Level: Check.......................................................................................................................698
No ink tank loaded....................................................................................................................698
Ink tank error............................................................................................................................698
The Display Screen indicates the system is filling with ink.......................................................698
Messages regarding printing or adjusment....................................................699
Use another paper....................................................................................................................699
Cannot execute this command. Use other paper.....................................................................699
Cannot print as specified..........................................................................................................699
Cannot adjust band..................................................................................................................699
Cannot adjust printhead...........................................................................................................700
Cannot calibrate.......................................................................................................................700
Excessive temperature or humidity..........................................................................................700
Messages regarding printheads....................................................................701
Cannot adjust printhead...........................................................................................................701
Cannot adjust band..................................................................................................................701
x printhead needs cleaning. (x is Left or Right)........................................................................701
PHeads: wrong pos..................................................................................................................701
Problem with Printhead x (x is L, R, or LR)..............................................................................702
x printhead error (x is Left or Right)..........................................................................................702
Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge............................................703
No maintenance cartridge........................................................................................................703
Prepare for maint cart replacement..........................................................................................703
No Maintenance Cartridge capacity.........................................................................................703
Maintenance cartridge full........................................................................................................703
Maintenance cartridge problem................................................................................................703
Messages regarding the hard disk.................................................................704
Hard disk error..........................................................................................................................704
File read error...........................................................................................................................704
Mail box full..............................................................................................................................704
Mail box full. Now printing without saving data.........................................................................704
Mail box nearly full....................................................................................................................704
Mail box full. Delete unwanted data.........................................................................................705
Mail box full. Cannot save........................................................................................................705
Contents xi
Contents
Other Messages............................................................................................706
GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number)....................................................................................706
ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number)...............................................................706
Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number)............................................706
Prepare for parts replacement..................................................................................................706
Parts replacement time has passed.........................................................................................707
Unknown file.............................................................................................................................707
Calibration There is a problem with the multi-sensor...............................................................707
Multi-sensor error.....................................................................................................................707
Roll feed unit err.......................................................................................................................707
No Roll Feed Unit.....................................................................................................................707
xii Contents
How to use this manual
Introduction
How to use this manual
About This User Manual
• Symbols
The following symbols are used in this User Manual to indicate safety information and explanations
on restrictions or precautions in use.
Important
Indicates important information that must be followed when using the printer.
Be sure to read this information to prevent printer damage or operating errors.
Caution
Indicates caution items for which operating error poses a risk of injury or
damage to equipment or property. To ensure safe use, always follow these
precautions.
Note
Indicates helpful reference information and supplemental information on
particular topics.
• Button names and user interface elements
Key and button names on the control panel and user interface elements in software (such as menus and
buttons) are indicated as follows in this User Manual.
Control Panel Buttons
Example: Press the OK button.
Control Panel Interface Items and Messages
Example: Head Cleaning is displayed.
Software Interface Items
(Menus and Buttons)
Example: Click OK.
Keyboard Keys
Example: Press the Tab key.
• Part Names
Names of printer parts are indicated as follows in this User Manual.
Printer part names
Example: Open the Top Cover.
• Cross-reference
Other pages or manuals that provide related information are indicated as follows in this User Manual.
Cross-Reference in the Same User Manual
Example: see “Turning the Printer On and Off”.
(→P.27)
Cross-Reference in Related Manuals
Example: See the Paper Reference Guide.
Other Cross-Reference
Example: See the printer driver help.
Introduction 1
How to use this manual
• Figures and software screens
• Figures in this User Manual may be different from the actual appearance of the printer in some
cases.
• Screens depicted in this User Manual for the printer driver or other software may be different from
the actual screens because of subsequent updates.
• Windows XP screens are used in explanations of Windows operations in this User Manual.
• Trademarks
• Canon, the Canon logo, and imagePROGRAF are trademarks or registered trademarks of CANON
INC.
• Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and other countries.
• Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. in the United States and other countries.
• Adobe RGB, a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated, is color space proposed by Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
• Other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
owners.
• Copyright
© 2008 CANON INC.
• Unauthorized reproduction of this User Manual in whole or part is prohibited.
• May we request
Thank you for understanding the following points.
• The information in this User Manual is subject to change without notice.
• We strive to ensure accuracy of information in this User Manual, but if you notice errors or
omissions, please contact us.
2 Introduction
How to use this manual
Searching Topics
You can nd information in topics of this User Manual by searching for relevant terms.
1.
Enter a term and click the Search button.
Note
• To search for multiple terms at once, enter a space between each term.
Search results are listed at left.
Introduction 3
How to use this manual
2.
Click a topic you want to read.
The terms you searched for will be highlighted in the topic.
To review multiple topics at once, select the check box of desired topics and click the Apply
button.
4 Introduction
How to use this manual
HTML Version of the Manual for Printing
You can select a group of topics in the table of contents or individual topics in this manual for printing.
The following procedure describes how to do this, using the information in Basic Printing Workow as an
example.
Printing a group of topics in the manual
When you access printable HTML versions of the content from section titles in the table of contents, you
can specify a group of topics to print.
1.
Click a section title in the table of contents. Here, Basic Printing Workow is used as an
example.
Introduction 5
How to use this manual
2.
Click Access to the HTML for printing in the title area.
The topics in Basic Printing Workow are displayed together in HTML format, ready for printing.
6 Introduction
How to use this manual
3.
Clear the sections you will not print and click the Apply button.
Introduction 7
How to use this manual
Printing a group of individual topics in the manual
When you access printable HTML versions from subtitles in the table of contents, you can specify a group
of topics to print.
1.
Click a section title in the table of contents. Here, Basic Printing Workow is used as an
example.
2.
Under Basic Printing Workow, click Printing Procedure.
8 Introduction
How to use this manual
3.
Click Access to the HTML for printing in the title area.
The topics in Printing Procedure are displayed together in HTML format, ready for printing.
Introduction 9
How to use this manual
4.
Clear the topics you will not print and click the Apply button.
Printing selected topics
Print selected topics as follows.
1.
Access the printing dialog box as follows, depending on your computer’s operating system.
• Windows
In Windows, right-click anywhere in the explanation area except on a gure or a link.In the shortcut
menu, click Print to display the Print dialog box.
10 Introduction
How to use this manual
• Macintosh
On a Macintosh computer, click anywhere in the explanation area except on a gure or a link while
holding the Ctrl key. In the shortcut menu, click Print Frame to display the Print dialog box.
2.
Specify conditions as needed, and then click Print (Windows) or Print (Macintosh).
• Windows
Introduction 11
How to use this manual
• Macintosh
Note
• To print only individual topics that are displayed, use this method.
12 Introduction
Printer parts
Printer Parts
Printer parts
Front
Standard
When the Ejection Guide is removed
a. Top Cover
Open this cover to install the Printhead and remove any jammed paper from inside the printer, as
needed. (→P.15)
b. Paper Tray Cover
Open this cover to load sheets in the Top Paper Feed Slot. (→P.16)
c. Roll Feed Unit
Load rolls in this unit. You can also load sheets in this unit manually.
d. Roll Feed Unit Cover
Open this cover to load rolls. (→P.17)
e. Control Panel
Use this panel to operate the printer and check the printer status. (→P.21)
f. Ejection Guide
Supports paper as it is ejected to prevent it from rising.
g. Output Tray ( Front Paper Feed Slot)
All printed documents are ejected to the output tray. Also, use this slot when loading heavyweight
paper. (→P.16)
h. Cutter Unit
A round-bladed cutter for automatic cutting of roll paper. The cutter is retracted inside when not cutting.
i. Maintenance Cartridge
Absorbs excess ink.
j. Ink Tank Cover
Open this cover to replace Ink Tank. (→P.19)
Printer Parts 13
Printer parts
k. Stand
A stand on which the printer is installed. Equipped with casters so that the printer can be easily moved.
l. Output Stacker
Printed documents are ejected into the output tray. The Output Stacker can hold one sheet. (→P.162)
Back
a. USB Port
Connect a USB cable to this port. The printer is compatible with Hi-Speed USB connections.
b. Ethernet Port
Connect an Ethernet cable to this port.
c. Power Supply Connector
Connect the power cord to this connector.
d. Carrying Handles (at six positions)
When carrying the printer, hold it by these handles under both sides.
14 Printer Parts
Printer parts
Top Cover (Inside)
a. Carriage
Moves the Printhead. It serves a key role in printing. (→P.18)
b. Carriage Shaft
The Carriage slides along this shaft.
c. Paper Retainer
Important in supplying the paper. This retainer holds paper as it is fed.
d. Platen
The Printhead moves across the platen during printing. Vacuum holes on the platen hold paper in
place.
e. Borderless Printing Ink Grooves
For catching ink outside the edges of paper during borderless printing.
f. Cleaning Brush
When cleaning inside the printer under the Top Cover, use this brush to sweep away paper dust on
the Platen.
g. Linear Scale
The linear scale serves a key role in detecting the Carriage position. Be careful not to touch this
part when cleaning inside the Top Cover or clearing paper jams.
Printer Parts 15
Printer parts
Tray Feed Area
a. Tray Extension
When loading sheets on the tray, open the Paper Tray Cover before opening the tray.
b. Width Guide
When loading the sheets , move the guide to match the paper size.
c. Top Paper Feed Slot
When loading sheets, insert them here.
d. Front Paper Feed Slot ( Output Tray)
When loading heavyweight paper, insert it here. Also, all printed documents are ejected from
this slot.
e. Front Tray Guides
Lift all of the guides before printing on heavyweight paper. When feeding heavyweight paper,
rest the sheet on these guides, align it to the right, and insert the leading edge up to the Paper
Alignment Line.
f. Paper Alignment Line
When loading heavyweight paper, ensure the paper edge is parallel to this line.
16 Printer Parts
Printer parts
Roll Feed Unit Cover (Inside)
a. Roll Holder
Load rolls on this holder.
b. Holder Stopper
Secure rolls on the Roll Holder with this part.
c. Roll Holder Slot
Slide the Roll Holder into this guide slot.
Printer Parts 17
Printer parts
Carriage
a. Printhead Fixer Cover
Holds the Printhead in place. Do not open this part except during Printhead replacement.
b. Printhead
The printhead is equipped with ink nozzles. It serves a key role in printing.
c. Printhead Fixer Lever
Locks the Printhead Fixer Cover. Do not open this part except during Printhead replacement.
18 Printer Parts
Printer parts
Ink Tank Cover (Inside)
a. Ink Tank
Cartridges of ink in various colors.
b. Ink Tank Lock Lever
A lever that locks the Ink Tank in place and protects it. Open or close the lever when replacing an
Ink Tank.
c. Ink Lamp (Red)
Indicates the state of the Ink Tank as follows when the Ink Tank Cover is opened.
• On
On: The Ink Tank is installed correctly.
• Off
Off: No Ink Tank is installed, or the ink level detection function is disabled.
• Flashing Slowly
Not much ink is left.
• Flashing Rapidly
There is no ink left.
a. Ink Color Label
Load an Ink Tank corresponding to the color and name on these labels.
b. Ink Set
An Ink Tank that can be used in the printer is labeled with a white letter “H” in a black circle on the
side. When purchasing an Ink Tank, make sure an “H” is printed on the label. (→P.614)
Printer Parts 19
Printer parts
Vents
The vents are on top (1), on the right (2), and on the bottom on the right (3 and 4).
Caution
• Do not block these vents when the printer is on.
• Avoid setting paper or other light objects near the vents.
20 Printer Parts
Printer parts
Control Panel
a. Data lamp (Green)
• Flashing
During printing, the Data lamp ashes when the printer is receiving or processing print jobs.
Otherwise, this lamp ashes when the printer is paused or updating the rmware.
• Off
There are no active print jobs when the Data lamp is off.
b. Message lamp (Orange)
• On
A warning message is displayed.
• Flashing
An error message is displayed.
• Off
The printer is off or is operating normally.
c. Paper Source Section
After you press the Feeder Selection button, the lamp for your chosen paper source is lit.
1. Roll Media lamp (Green) (Rolls)
• On
Indicates that a roll is selected as the paper source.
• Off
Shows whether the Tray or Front Paper Feed Slot is selected as the paper source.
2. Cut Sheet lamp (Green)
• On
Shows whether the Tray or Front Paper Feed Slot is selected as the paper source.
• Off
Indicates that a roll is selected as the paper source.
d. Display Screen
Shows the printer menu, as well as the printer status and messages.
e. Color Label
These labels indicate the Ink Tank colors and names. The labels correspond to the ink levels on
the Display Screen.
Printer Parts 21
Printer parts
f. Online Button
Switches the printer online and ofine. (→P.34)
• On (Green)
The printer is online.
• Flashing
The printer is recovering from Sleep mode.
• Off
The printer is ofine.
g. Feeder Selection Button
Switches the paper source. Each time you press this button, the paper source switches between roll
feed (when the paper source is a roll) and sheet feed (when the paper source is the Tray or Front
Paper Feed Slot). The corresponding lamp in the paper source section is lit.
h. Menu Button
Displays the main menu of the printer. (→P.59)
i. Information Button
Displays printer submenus. Press this key to display information about ink, paper, and so on.
(→P.73)
You can also hold down this button for three seconds to clean the Printhead ( Head Cleaning A).
j. ◄ Button
Menu mode: Press this button to display the menu one level higher.
When you are entering numbers, the button moves the cursor to the next digit.
The instructions can be paused when [← Pause] is displayed.
When [← Back] is displayed, you can access the previous instruction screen.
k. ▲ Button
Ofine mode: Press this button to rewind rolls manually. (→P.131)
Menu mode: Press this button to display the previous menu item or setting value.
l. ► Button
Menu mode: Press this button to display the menu one level lower.
When [Fwd →] is displayed, you can access the next instruction screen.
m.▼ Button
Ofine mode: Press this button to feed roll paper manually. (→P.131)
Menu mode: Press this button to display the next menu item or setting value.
n. OK Button
In menu mode, press this button to conrm or execute the selected item or setting.
At other times, pressing this button enables you to access the next screen after following the
instructions on the Display Screen.
o. Power Button
Turns the printer on and off. (→P.27)
p. Load/Eject Button
You can check instructions on loading, replacing, and removing paper. Instructions for loading
or replacing paper are shown on the Display Screen if pressed when no paper is loaded, and
instructions for removing paper are shown if paper is loaded.
22 Printer Parts
Printer parts
q. Stop Button
Hold down for at least a second to cancel print jobs in progress or end the ink drying period.
During display of instructions on loading sheets, for example, you can hold down this button for one
second to pause the current screen.
Note
• When the printer is in Sleep mode, you can press any button to wake the printer and bring it online
or ofine again.
Printer Parts 23
Control Panel
Control Panel
Control Panel
a. Data lamp (Green)
• Flashing
During printing, the Data lamp ashes when the printer is receiving or processing print jobs.
Otherwise, this lamp ashes when the printer is paused or updating the rmware.
• Off
There are no active print jobs when the Data lamp is off.
b. Message lamp (Orange)
• On
A warning message is displayed.
• Flashing
An error message is displayed.
• Off
The printer is off or is operating normally.
c. Paper Source Section
After you press the Feeder Selection button, the lamp for your chosen paper source is lit.
1. Roll Media lamp (Green) (Rolls)
• On
Indicates that a roll is selected as the paper source.
• Off
Shows whether the Tray or Front Paper Feed Slot is selected as the paper source.
2. Cut Sheet lamp (Green)
• On
Shows whether the Tray or Front Paper Feed Slot is selected as the paper source.
• Off
Indicates that a roll is selected as the paper source.
d. Display Screen
Shows the printer menu, as well as the printer status and messages.
24 Printer Parts
Control Panel
e. Color Label
These labels indicate the Ink Tank colors and names. The labels correspond to the ink levels on
the Display Screen.
f. Online Button
Switches the printer online and ofine. (→P.34)
• On (Green)
The printer is online.
• Flashing
The printer is recovering from Sleep mode.
• Off
The printer is ofine.
g. Feeder Selection Button
Switches the paper source. Each time you press this button, the paper source switches between roll
feed (when the paper source is a roll) and sheet feed (when the paper source is the Tray or Front
Paper Feed Slot). The corresponding lamp in the paper source section is lit.
h. Menu Button
Displays the main menu of the printer. (→P.59)
i. Information Button
Displays printer submenus. Press this key to display information about ink, paper, and so on.
(→P.73)
You can also hold down this button for three seconds to clean the Printhead ( Head Cleaning A).
j. ◄ Button
Menu mode: Press this button to display the menu one level higher.
When you are entering numbers, the button moves the cursor to the next digit.
The instructions can be paused when [← Pause] is displayed.
When [← Back] is displayed, you can access the previous instruction screen.
k. ▲ Button
Ofine mode: Press this button to rewind rolls manually. (→P.131)
Menu mode: Press this button to display the previous menu item or setting value.
l. ► Button
Menu mode: Press this button to display the menu one level lower.
When [Fwd →] is displayed, you can access the next instruction screen.
m.▼ Button
Ofine mode: Press this button to feed roll paper manually. (→P.131)
Menu mode: Press this button to display the next menu item or setting value.
n. OK Button
In menu mode, press this button to conrm or execute the selected item or setting.
At other times, pressing this button enables you to access the next screen after following the
instructions on the Display Screen.
o. Power Button
Turns the printer on and off. (→P.27)
p. Load/Eject Button
You can check instructions on loading, replacing, and removing paper. Instructions for loading
or replacing paper are shown on the Display Screen if pressed when no paper is loaded, and
instructions for removing paper are shown if paper is loaded.
Printer Parts 25
Control Panel
q. Stop Button
Hold down for at least a second to cancel print jobs in progress or end the ink drying period.
During display of instructions on loading sheets, for example, you can hold down this button for one
second to pause the current screen.
Note
• When the printer is in Sleep mode, you can press any button to wake the printer and bring it online
or ofine again.
26 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Turning the Printer On and Off
Turning the printer on
1.
Press the Power button to turn on the printer.
The printer will now start up.
After the Display Screen shows the Canon logo, Starting up... Please wait. is displayed.
2.
The printer goes online in preparation for printing after startup, and the Online lamp and paper
source section lamp remain lit.
The printer will not go online in the following situations. Take action as needed.
• The Top Cover is open
Close the Top Cover.
• The Ink Tank Cover is open
Close the Ink Tank Cover.
• The Printhead is not installed
Please see “Replacing the Printhead”. (→P.626)
• Ink Tank is not installed
Please see “Replacing Ink Tanks”. (→P.615)
• “ERROR” is shown on the Display Screen
Turn off the printer and contact your Canon dealer.
• The Online lamp and Message lamp are not lit (even once), and nothing appears on the Display
Screen
Make sure the printer is plugged in correctly. Check the connection at the plug and electrical outlet.
• No paper is loaded
Load paper. (→P.93) (→P.98)
Printer Parts 27
Control Panel
Important
• Starting the printer when it is connected via the USB cable to a Macintosh computer that is off may
cause the computer to start up at the same time. To prevent this, disconnect the USB cable before
starting the printer. Connecting the printer to the computer via a USB hub may solve this issue.
Turning the printer off
Important
• Never turn the printer off or unplug it during a print job. This could damage the printer.
1.
Make sure no print jobs are in progress.
If the Message lamp is ashing, check the message on the Display Screen and take action as
necessary. (→P.686)
If the Data lamp is ashing, the printer is receiving a print job. Turn off the printer only after
printing is nished.
2.
Hold down the Power button for more than a second.
After Shut Down.. Please Wait.. is shown on the Display Screen, the printer shuts off.
28 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Printer Modes
Printer modes are classied as follows and described in this topic.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Modes (→P.29)
Mode transition (→P.30)
Online, and state of the Control Panel (→P.31)
Ofine, and state of the Control Panel (→P.32)
Menu mode, and state of the Control Panel (→P.33)
Submenu mode, and state of the Control Panel (→P.33)
Modes
The printer has ve modes as follows:
• Online
The printer is ready to receive jobs sent from the computer. Jobs sent from the computer are processed
immediately. If jobs are received in other modes, they are printed the next time the printer goes online.
• Ofine
Any jobs sent from the computer are held without being processed.
While the printer is ofine, you can feed or cut roll paper manually.
The printer goes ofine automatically if jobs cannot be processed, such as if errors occur.
• Menu mode
Menus are displayed on the printer, and you can select, set, or execute menu items. Any jobs sent
from the computer are held without being printed.
• Submenu mode
Submenus are displayed regarding ink and paper information. Jobs can be received and printing is
possible while submenus are displayed and the printer is online. In other modes, any jobs sent from the
computer are held without being printed while submenus are displayed.
• Sleep mode
The printer is in power-saving mode. The printer automatically enters Sleep mode to conserve power if
it is idle for a specic period (by factory default, ve minutes), that is, if no print jobs are received or
buttons are pressed while all covers are closed.
You can specify the period before the printer enters Sleep mode in the Sleep Timer menu. (→P.59)
If any print jobs are received when the printer is in Sleep mode (after it was originally online), the
printer goes online and prints the jobs.
Printer Parts 29
Control Panel
Mode transition
The printer mode transitions are as follows:
*1: When submenus are displayed, you can press any button other than the Information button to return
to the previous mode.
*2: The printer automatically enters Sleep mode if it is idle for a specic period (by factory default, ve
minutes), that is, if no print jobs are received or buttons are pressed while all covers are closed.
However, it does not enter Sleep mode while error messages are displayed.
*3: In Sleep mode, the printer can be restored to the previous state by pressing any button. Sleep mode is
also terminated if a print job is received or a command is issued from RemoteUI. However, the printer
is turned off when you hold the Power for a while.
30 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Online, and state of the Control Panel
Not printing
Printing in progress (receiving or
processing print jobs)
Display Screen
• Top Line of the Display Screen
The printer status is displayed here. The selected paper source is indicated by an icon in the upper-right
corner.
Any warning messages are displayed here on lines 2-4. Take the appropriate action. (→P.686)
• Middle Level of the Display Screen
The rst and second lines display the paper type and size.
• Bottom Line of the Display Screen
Here, the remaining ink level is indicated. (→P.621)
Control Panel
• Online lamp
Lit when the printer is online.
• Data lamp
Flashes when print jobs are being received or processed.
• Message lamp
Lit when warning messages are displayed.
Printer Parts 31
Control Panel
Ofine, and state of the Control Panel
Ofine
Not printing
Printing is paused
Display Screen
• Display Screen
The printer status is displayed here. The selected paper source is indicated by an icon in the upper-right
corner.
Any warning messages are displayed here on lines 2-4. Take the appropriate action. (→P.686)
• Middle Level of the Display Screen
The rst and second lines display the paper type and size.
• Bottom Line of the Display Screen
Here, the remaining ink level is indicated. (→P.621)
Control Panel
• Message lamp
Lit when warning messages are displayed.
Error Messages
If action can be taken
If no action can be taken
• Top and Middle Levels
• Top and Middle Levels
• Top and Middle Levels
of the Display Screen
Error messages are
displayed.
• Bottom Line of the
Display Screen
Here, the remaining
ink level is indicated.
(→P.621)
of the Display Screen
Error messages are
displayed.
• Bottom Line of the
Display Screen
The corrective actions
are displayed here.
of the Display Screen
The error message
is displayed with the
following instructions:
Turn off printer, wait,
then turn on again..
• Data lamp
Flashes when print jobs are being received.
• Message lamp
Flashes when error messages are displayed.
Take the appropriate action. (→P.686)
32 Printer Parts
• Display Screen
“ERROR” is displayed,
followed by the error
code and Call for
service..
• Data lamp
Flashes when print jobs are being received.
• Message lamp
Flashes when error messages are displayed.
Turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds
before restoring the power.
If the message is still displayed after this, write down
the error code and message, turn off the printer, and
contact the Canon dealer for assistance.
Control Panel
Menu mode, and state of the Control Panel
Main menu
• Display Screen
Pressing the Menu button
when printing is not in progress
displays the main menu.
The title of the selected menu
is displayed on the rst line,
and menus immediately under
the current menu are displayed
on the second and subsequent
lines. The lower level menus
are available if “►” is displayed
at right. (→P.39)
Menu items and settings
• Display Screen
The title of the selected menu
is displayed on the rst line,
and menu items or settings are
displayed on the second and
subsequent lines. (→P.39)
The menu of options available
during printing (top gure) can
be displayed by pressing the ►
button when the main menu is
displayed (left gure).
Main menu (during printing)
• Display Screen
Menus available during printing
are displayed if you press the
Menu button during printing.
If you select a menu, the title of
the selected menu is displayed
on the rst line, and menus
immediately under the current
menu are displayed on the
second and subsequent lines.
The lower level menus are
available if “►” is displayed at
right. (→P.39)
Submenu mode, and state of the Control Panel
Remaining Maintenance
Information on the loaded paper
Cartridge capacity and ink levels
Printer information
Pressing the Information button switches the information displayed between Ink, Media Info, and System
Info. (→P.73)
Printer Parts 33
Control Panel
Switching Modes
Switching the Printer Online/Ofine
Press the Online button to switch the printer online or ofine.
The Online lamp is lit in Online mode. Printing is possible in this mode.
The Online lamp is off in Ofine mode.
34 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Depending on the status, the printer switches online and ofine as follows.
Printer Status
When Online is Pressed
Online
The printer switches ofine and the Online lamp goes
off.
Online, printing
Switches ofine and printing is paused.
When printing is paused, the Printing menu is
available.
Ofine
Switches online and the Online lamp is lit.
Ofine, when an error message is displayed
In the case of error messages other than those
shown below or if paper is not loaded, the printer
remains ofine until you solve the problem. The
Online lamp remains off.
If the following error messages are displayed, the
printer goes online and printing is resumed.
However, you may not be able to obtain the desired
printing results.
• Insufcient paper for job
• PHead needs cleaning.
• Papr Size Mismatch
• Papr Type Mismatch
Menu mode
Switches online and the Online lamp is lit.
Menu mode, printing
Switches online and the Online lamp is lit.
Print is resumed.
Printer Parts 35
Control Panel
Switching to Menu Mode
Press the Menu button to display the main menu.
Depending on the status, the printer switches to Menu mode as follows.
When Menu is Pressed
Printer Status
Online
Switches to Menu mode.
Online, printing
The printer stays online. It does not switch to Menu
mode.
Ofine
Switches to Menu mode.
Ofine, printing
Menus available during printing are displayed.
Ofine, when an error message is displayed
You cannot access Menu mode until the problem is
solved.
Press the Information button to display the submenus.
Pressing the Information button switches the information displayed between Ink, Media Info, and System
Info. Press the Information button repeatedly to change the information displayed. (→P.73)
Press any button other than the Information button to restore the previous mode.
After you display a submenu, the printer will revert to the previous mode in about ten seconds if no print
job is received or if you do not operate the printer.
Note
• You can start Head Cleaning A by holding down the Information button for three seconds or more.
(→P.625)
36 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Printer Menu Operations
The printer menu includes a main menu and submenus.
•
•
•
•
Main menu operations when no print job is in progress (→P.37)
Main menu operations during printing (→P.37)
Job Management Menu Operations (→P.38)
Submenu operations (→P.38)
Main menu operations when no print job is in progress
Access the main menu by pressing the Menu button on the Control Panel.
Note
• The main menu will not be displayed in the following case even if you press the Menu button.
• An error message is displayed:
Switches to Menu mode after the problem is solved.
The following operations are available from the main menu.
• Paper settings
• Print settings
• Printer settings
For a description of specic items available in the main menu, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.59)
For instructions on selecting and setting main menu items, see “Main Menu Operations”. (→P.39)
Note
• By default, main menu settings apply to all print jobs. However, for settings that are also available in the
printer driver, the values specied in the printer driver take priority.
Main menu operations during printing
Selecting Menu Durng Prtng on the Menu Selection screen (displayed by pressing the Menu button on the
Control Panel during printing) will display only the menu options you can execute during printing, specically,
Head Cleaning, Fine Band Adj., and Information.
Note
• The Menu Selection screen will not be displayed in the following case even if you press the Menu
button.
• An error message is displayed:
Switches to Menu mode after the problem is solved.
The following operations are available from the main menu during printing.
• Printhead cleaning
• Manual adjustment of the paper feed amount
• Display of printer-related information
For a description of specic items available in the main menu during printing, see “Main Menu Settings
(During Printing)”. (→P.70)
For instructions on selecting and setting main menu items during printing, see “Main Menu Operations”.
(→P.39)
Printer Parts 37
Control Panel
Job Management Menu Operations
To display the Job Mgmt Menu, press Job Mgmt Menu on the Menu Selection screen, which is displayed
by pressing the Menu button on the Control Panel during printing.
Note
• The Menu Selection screen will not be displayed in the following case even if you press the Menu
button.
• An error message is displayed
You can access Menu mode after you have solved the problem.
The following operations are available from the Job Mgmt Menu.
• Job queue operations
• Operations involving the common mail box
• Operations involving personal boxes
For a description of specic items available in the main menu during printing, see “Main Menu Settings
(During Printing)”. (→P.70)
Submenu operations
Access submenus by pressing the Information button on the Control Panel. You can check the following
information in submenus.
•
•
•
•
Remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity
Ink levels
Information on the loaded paper
Printer information
For a description of specic items displayed in submenus, see “Submenu Display”. (→P.73)
38 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Main Menu Operations
Press the Menu button to display the main menu. For details, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.59)
• Main menu when no print job is in progress
• Menu selection (if you press the Menu button when printing is in progress)
Note
• The main menu will not be displayed in the following case even if you press the Menu button.
• An error message is displayed
You can access the Menu mode after you have solved the problem.
To access each function menu from the main menu, and set or execute menu items, use buttons on the
Control Panel.
The following section describes menu operations and how they are presented in this User Manual.
•
•
•
•
Accessing Menus (→P.40)
Specifying menu items (→P.41)
Specifying numerical values (→P.42)
Executing menu commands (→P.43)
Printer Parts 39
Control Panel
Accessing Menus
Printer menus are grouped by function.
Menus are displayed with the upper line selected. Use the buttons on the Control Panel to access each menu.
• Press ▲ to access a higher menu in the menu list, and press ▼ to access a lower one. If items of the
menu list are more than the lines of the screen, press ▲ and ▼ to scroll the menu. If you navigate
to the lowest-level menu and press the ▼ button again, the display switches to the top-level menu
screen. If you navigate to the top-level menu and press the ▲ button again, the display switches to
the lowest-level menu screen. Items you select are highlighted.
The scroll bar at right indicates the current position in the overall menu.
• The lower level menus are available if “►” is displayed at right. To access these lower level menus,
select a menu and press ►.
• The upper level menus are available if “◄” is displayed at left. To access these upper level menus,
select a menu and press ◄.
40 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Specifying menu items
Follow the steps below to specify menu items.
1.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select a menu, and then press the ► button.
Repeat these steps until the desired menu options are displayed.
2.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired setting, and then press the OK button.
The check box at left is selected, and the setting is conrmed.
After two seconds, the display reverts to the upper level menu.
3.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
Note
• If a conrmation message is displayed regarding the setting you entered, press the OK button. The
setting is applied, and the printer goes online.
Printer Parts 41
Control Panel
Specifying numerical values
Follow the steps below to enter numbers for items such as network settings.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press the ► button.
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the number, and then press the OK button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select TCP/IP, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Setting, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Address, and then press the ► button.
Press ◄ or ► to move the cursor (_) to each eld for entering numbers.
Note
• Hold down ▲ or ▼ to increase or decrease the value continuously.
• Make sure the IP address you enter for the printer is not the same as any computer IP address
in your network.
7.
8.
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to continue entering numbers.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
Note
• If a conrmation message is displayed regarding the setting you entered, press the OK button. The
setting is applied, and the printer goes online.
42 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Executing menu commands
Follow the steps below to execute menu commands.
1.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select a menu, and then press the ► button.
Repeat these steps until the desired menu options are displayed.
2.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the action to execute, and then press the OK button.
After two seconds, the menu command is executed. After commands are executed, the printer
commonly reverts to the state before the menu operation, either online or ofine.
Printer Parts 43
Control Panel
Menu Structure
Main Menu
The structure of the main menu is as follows. Values at right indicated by an asterisk “*” are the defaults.
For instructions on menu operations, see “Main Menu Operations”. (→P.39)
For details on menu items, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.59)
First Level
Paper Cutting (*1)
Second Level
Third Level
No *
Yes
Rep. Ink Tank
No *
Yes
Head Cleaning
Head Cleaning A
Head Cleaning B
Media Menu
Manual PaperType
Plain Paper (*5)
Plain Paper HQ
(*5)
Plain Paper HG
(*5)
Recycled Coated
(*5)
High Resolution
(*5)
Coated Paper (*5)
HW Coated (*5)
Ex HW Coated (*5)
Premium MatteP
(*5)
Matte Photo (*5)
Glossy Photo (*5)
Semi-Gl Photo (*5)
HW GlossyPhoto2
(*5)
HW SemiGlPhoto2
(*5)
Poster Semi-Gl
(*5)
SatinPhoto 190
(*5)
Photo PaperPlus
(*5)
44 Printer Parts
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
Control Panel
First Level
Second Level
Third Level
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
PhotoPlusSemiGl
(*5)
Syn. Paper (*5)
Adh. Syn. Paper
(*5)
Backlit Film (*5)
Backprint Film (*5)
Flame-Res.Cloth
(*5)
ThinFab.Banner2
(*5)
Proong Paper
(*5)
News Proof 1 (*5)
News Proof 2 (*5)
FineArt Photo (*5)
FneArt HW Photo
(*5)
FineArt Txtr (*5)
FineArt Wtrclr (*5)
FineArtBlockP (*5)
Canvas Matte2
(*5)
JPN Paper Washi
(*5)
Colored Coated
(*5)
CAD Trace Paper
(*5)
CAD Matte Film
(*5)
POP Board (*5)
Special # Here, the
number is 1-10 (*5)
Manual PaperSize
ISO A1
ISO A2+
ISO A2
ISO A3+
ISO A3
Printer Parts 45
Control Panel
First Level
Second Level
Third Level
ISO A4
ISO B2
ISO B3
ISO B4
JIS B2
JIS B3
JIS B4
22"x34"(ANSI D)
17"x22"(ANSI C)
11"x17" (Ledger)
13"x19" (Super B)
Letter (8.5"x11")
Legal (8.5"x14")
24"x36" (ARCH D)
18"x24" (ARCH C)
12"x18" (ARCH B)
9"x12" (ARCH A)
DIN C2
DIN C3
DIN C4
20"x24"
18"x22"
14"x17"
12"x16"
10"x12"
10"x15"
8"x10"
16"x20"
20"x30"
13"x22"
300x900mm
Free Size Setng
Roll Media Type
(*1)
Plain Paper (*5)
Plain Paper HQ
(*5)
46 Printer Parts
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
Control Panel
First Level
Second Level
Third Level
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
Plain Paper HG
(*5)
Recycled Coated
(*5)
Coated Paper (*5)
HW Coated (*5)
Ex HW Coated (*5)
Premium MatteP
(*5)
Glossy Photo (*5)
Semi-Gl Photo (*5)
HW GlossyPhoto2
(*5)
HW SemiGlPhoto2
(*5)
Poster Semi-Gl
(*5)
SatinPhoto 190
(*5)
Syn. Paper (*5)
Adh. Syn. Paper
(*5)
Backlit Film (*5)
Backprint Film (*5)
Flame-Res.Cloth
(*5)
ThinFab.Banner2
(*5)
Proong Paper
(*5)
News Proof 1 (*5)
News Proof 2 (*5)
FineArt Photo (*5)
FneArt HW Photo
(*5)
FineArt Txtr (*5)
FineArt Wtrclr (*5)
FineArtBlockP (*5)
Canvas Matte2
(*5)
Printer Parts 47
Control Panel
First Level
Third Level
Second Level
Fourth Level
JPN Paper Washi
(*5)
Colored Coated
(*5)
CAD Trace Paper
(*5)
CAD Matte Film
(*5)
Special # Here, the
number is 1-10 (*5)
Chk Remain.Roll
Off *
On
Roll Length Set (*1, ### m (*11)
*2)
### feet (*11)
Paper Details
(The paper type is
Roll DryingTime
displayed here.) (*5)
Off
30 sec.
1 min.
3 min.
5 min.
10 min.
30 min.
60 min.
Scan Wait Time
Off
1 sec.
3 sec.
5 sec.
7 sec.
9 sec.
Feed Priority
Automatic *
Band Joint
Print Length
Adjust Length
From -0.70% to
0.70%
Head Height
Automatic *
Highest
High
48 Printer Parts
Fifth Level
Control Panel
First Level
Second Level
Third Level
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
Standard
Low
Lowest
Skew Check Lv.
High Accuracy
Standard *
Loose
Off
VacuumStrngth
Automatic *
Strongest
Strong
Standard
Weak
Weakest
NearEnd RollMrgn 3mm
20mm
Cut Speed
Fast
Standard
Slow
Trim Edge First
Automatic
Off
On
Cutting Mode
Automatic
Eject
Manual
Bordless Margin
Automatic
Fixed
CutDustReduct.
Off
On
NearEnd Sht Mrgn 3mm
20mm
Manual Feed
Front
Top
Return Defaults
(*12)
No
Yes
Printer Parts 49
Control Panel
First Level
Job Management
Third Level
Second Level
Job Queue Ope.
Job List
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
Delete
Priority
Com. BOX Ope.
Job List
Print
Delete
Print Job List
No
Yes
Psnl. BOX Ope.
Folder List
Job List
Print
Delete
Print Job List
No
Yes
Adjust Printer
Auto Head Adj.
Standard Adj.
No
Yes
Advanced Adj.
No
Yes
Auto Print
Off
On *
Manual Head Adj
(*9)
No
Yes
Auto Band Adj.
Standard Adj.
No
Yes
Advanced Adj.
No
Yes
Manual Band Adj
No
Yes
Adj Far Ed Feed
No
Yes
Adjust Length (*3)
No
Yes
Calibration
Auto Adjust
No
Yes
Calibration Log
Date
Paper Type
Use Adj. Value
Disabled
Enabled *
50 Printer Parts
Control Panel
First Level
Third Level
Second Level
Return Defaults
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
No
Yes *
Interface Setup
EOP Timer
10 sec.
30 sec.
1 min.
2 min.
5 min.
10 min. *
30 min.
60 min.
TCP/IP
IP Mode
Automatic
Manual *
Protocol (*4)
DHCP
On
Off *
BOOTP
On
Off *
RARP
On
Off *
IP Setting (*10)
NetWare
NetWare
IP Address
0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
Subnet Mask
0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
Default G/W
0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
On
Off *
Frame Type (*6)
Auto Detect
Ethernet 2
Ethernet 802.2 *
Ethernet 802.3
Ethernet SNAP
Print Service (*6)
BinderyPServer
RPrinter
NDSPServer *
NPrinter
AppleTalk
On
Printer Parts 51
Control Panel
First Level
Third Level
Second Level
Fourth Level
Off *
Ethernet Driver
Auto Detect
On *
Off
Comm.Mode (*7)
Half Duplex *
Full Duplex
Ethernet Type (*7) 10 Base-T *
100 Base-TX
Spanning Tree
Not Use *
Use
MAC Address
Return Defaults
000085XXXXXX
No
Yes
Maintenance
Repl. maint cart
No
Yes
Replace P.head
Printhead L
No
Yes
Printhead R
No
Yes
Move Printer
No *
Yes
Clean Platen
No
Yes
Spur Cleaning
No
Yes
System Setup
Warning
Buzzer
Off
On *
Detect Mismatch
Pause
Warning
None *
Keep Media Size
Off *
On
Paper Size Basis
Sht Selection
ISO A3+ *
13"x19"(Super B)
Roll Selection 1
ISO A3 (297mm) *
300mm Roll
52 Printer Parts
Fifth Level
Control Panel
First Level
Third Level
Second Level
Roll Selection 2
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
10in. (254mm) *
JIS B4 (257mm)
TrimEdge Reload
Automatic
Off *
On
Noz. Check Freq.
Off
1 page
10 pages
Automatic *
Sleep Timer
5 min. *
10 min.
15 min.
20 min.
30 min.
40 min.
50 min.
60 min.
240 min.
Length Unit
meter *
feet/inch
Time Zone
0:London (GMT)
+1:Paris,Rome
+2:Athens,Cairo
+3:Moscow
+4:Eerevan,Baku
+5:Islamabad
+6:Dacca
+7:Bangkok
+8:Hong Kong
+9:Tokyo,Seoul
+10:Canberra
+11NewCaledonia
+12:Wellington
-12:Eniwetok
-11:Midway is.
Printer Parts 53
Control Panel
First Level
Third Level
Second Level
Fourth Level
-10Hawaii(AHST)
-9:Alaska(AKST)
-8:Oregon (PST)
-7:Arizona(MST)
-6:Texas (CST)
-5:NewYork(EST)
-4:Santiago
-3:Buenos Aires
-2:
-1:Cape Verde
Date Format
yyyy/mm/dd *
dd/mm/yyyy
mm/dd/yyyy
Date & Time
Date
yyyy/mm/dd (*8)
Time
hh:mm
Language
Contrast Adj.
-4, -3, -2, -1, 0*, +1,
+2, +3, +4
Reset PaprSetngs
No
Yes
Erase HDD Data
High Speed
No
Yes
Secure High Spd.
54 Printer Parts
No
Fifth Level
Control Panel
First Level
Third Level
Second Level
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
Yes
Secure
No
Yes
Test Print
Status Print
No
Yes
Media Details
No
Yes
Print Job Log
No
Yes
Menu Map
No
Yes
Nozzle Check
No
Yes
Information
System Info
Error Log
########-####
Job Log
(Choose from
Document Name
information about
the latest three print
jobs.)
User Name
Page Count
Job Status
Print Start Time
yyyy/mm/dd
hh:mm
Print End Time
yyyy/mm/dd
hh:mm
Print Time
sec.
Print Size
xxxxxxxxsq.mm
Media Type
Interface
Ink Consumed
HDD Information
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
xx.x ml
HDDSpace
Available only if a roll is loaded.
Available only if Chk Remain.Roll is On.
Available if Feed Priority is Automatic or Print Length.
Not displayed if IP Mode is Manual.
Printer Parts 55
Control Panel
*5: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.108) The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control
Panel) is updated when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change
paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. See the Media Conguration Tool Guide
(Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).
*6: Not displayed if NetWare is Off.
*7: Not displayed if Auto Detect is On.
*8: Follows the setting in Date Format.
*9: Available after you have used Advanced Adj. in Auto Head Adj. once.
*10: Not displayed if IP Mode is Automatic.
*11: Follows the setting in Length Unit.
*12: Select Yes to restore Paper Details to the factory default values. Any paper type settings you
have changed on the Control Panel of the printer are restored to the original values when you install
the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you update paper information by using the
Media Conguration Tool.
Caution
• Only the following menus are displayed during printing.
• Menu Durng Prtng
If you press the Online button while printing to pause printing and then press the Menu button,
Head Cleaning, Fine Band Adj., and Information are displayed.
Submenus
Each time you press the Information button on the Control Panel, printer information is displayed in the
following order.
■The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and ink levels
■Information on the loaded paper
■Printer information
For details on submenu screens, see “Submenu Display”. (→P.73)
56 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Main menu during printing
The structure of the main menu during printing is as follows.
For instructions on menu operations, see “Main Menu Operations”. (→P.39)
For details on menu items available during printing, see “Main Menu Settings (During Printing)”. (→P.70)
Second
Seventh
First Level
Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
Sixth Level
Level
Level
Menu Durng Head
Head
Prtng
Cleaning
Cleaning A
Head
Cleaning B
Fine Band
Adj. (*1)
From -5 to 5
Information
System Info
Error Log
######## ####
Job Log
(Choose from Document
information
Name
about the
latest three
print jobs.)
User Name
Page Count
Job Status
Print Start
Time
Print End
Time
Print Time
Print Size
Media Type
Interface
Ink
Consumed
HDD
Information
Job Mgmt
Menu
Job Queue
Ope.
Job List
(Choose a
print job)
Priority
Delete
Com. BOX
Ope.
Job List
(Choose a
print job)
Print
Delete
Print Job List No
Yes
Printer Parts 57
Control Panel
First Level
Second
Level
Psnl. BOX
Ope.
Third Level
Folder List
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
(Enter a
Job List
password if
one has been
set.)
Sixth Level
(Choose a
print job)
Seventh
Level
Print
Delete
Print Job List No
Yes
*1: Available if Feed Priority is Automatic or Band Joint.
58 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Main Menu Settings
Main menu items are described in the following tables.
For instructions on menu operations, see “Main Menu Operations”. (→P.39)
For details on menu levels and values, see “Menu Structure”. (→P.44)
Setting Item
Description, Instructions
Paper Cutting
This command is available only if a roll is loaded.
Choose Yes to cut the roll at the current position. If the roll is not already at the
cut position, the roll will be automatically advanced to that position and then cut.
Rep. Ink Tank
When replacing the Ink Tank, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the
screen. (→P.615)
Head Cleaning
Specify Printhead cleaning options. (→P.625)
Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or contains foreign
substances.
Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all, or if printing is not improved
by Head Cleaning A.
Media Menu
Specify the type and size of paper. (→P.60)
Paper Details
Specify detailed paper-related settings, including the ink drying time and
borderless printing options. (→P.61)
Job Management
Manage print jobs on the printer’s hard disk. (→P.63)
Adjust Printer
Adjust the Printhead alignment or amount of feed by printing a test pattern.
(→P.64)
Interface Setup
Congure the EOP timer and network settings. (→P.65)
Maintenance
Access maintenance settings when replacing the Printhead or preparing to move
the printer. (→P.66)
System Setup
Specify the printer system settings, including the date format and display
language. (→P.67)
Test Print
Choose Status Print to print information about the printer.
Choose Media Details to print the paper settings as specied in Paper Details.
Choose Print Job Log to print a record of print jobs, including the paper type
and size, amount of ink used, and so on. (Information on ink consumption is
general, not specic in nature.)
Choose Menu Map to print a list of the main menu options.
Choose Nozzle Check to print a test pattern for checking the nozzles.
Information
Displays information about the printer and record of print jobs. (→P.69)
Printer Parts 59
Control Panel
Media Menu
Setting Item
Description, Instructions
Manual PaperType (*1)
Choose the type of sheets to be loaded manually.
(→P.149)
Manual PaperSize (*1)
Choose the size of paper to be loaded manually.
(→P.150)
Roll Media Type (*1)
Choose the size of the roll.
(→P.117)
Chk Remain.Roll
Choose On to print a barcode at the end of a roll before you remove it. The
printed barcode can be used in managing the amount of roll paper left. Choose
Off if you prefer not to print the barcode.
Roll Length Set
Displayed if Chk Remain.Roll is On.
If a barcode is not printed on rolls, specify the roll length. The roll length is
displayed in meters or feet, depending on the setting in Length Unit.
*1: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.108) The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control
Panel) is updated when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change
paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. See the Media Conguration Tool Guide
(Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).
60 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Paper Details
Setting Item
(The paper type is
Roll DryingTime
displayed here.)(*1)
Scan Wait Time
Description, Instructions
Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry for each sheet.
Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry between each scan
in bidirectional printing, in consideration of how quickly the ink
dries. Note that printing will take longer if you specify a wait
time.
Feed Priority
Specify exact paper feeding, if desired. Normally, select
Automatic. Choose Print Length if you prefer to feed the
paper an exact amount. However, note that choosing Print
Length may result in slight banding in the direction of Carriage
scanning.
Adjust Length
Displayed if Feed Priority is Print Length.
Adjustment relative to the amount of stretching or shrinkage of
the current paper.
Enter either the adjustment results from Print Pattern or the
discrepancy that you measured (as a percentage).
For paper that tends to stretch, increase the feed amount by
choosing a higher adjustment value. For paper that tends
to shrink, decrease the feed amount by choosing a lower
adjustment value.
Head Height
Adjust the Printhead height. (→P.576)
Skew Check Lv.
If you print on Japanese paper (washi) or other handmade
paper that has an irregular width, choose Loose for a higher
skew detection threshold, or choose Off to disable skew
detection. However, if paper is loaded askew when detection is
Off, note that paper jams or Platen soiling may occur.
VacuumStrngth
Specify the level of suction that holds paper against the Platen.
(→P.587)
NearEnd RollMrgn
Specify the minimum margin at the leading edge of roll paper to
ensure better printing quality at the leading edge.
Note that if you choose 3mm, it may lower the printing quality
at the leading edge and affect feeding accuracy. The printed
surface may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading
edge. It may also cause the Platen to become soiled.
Cut Speed
Choose the cutting speed. If you use adhesive paper, choosing
Slow helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and
keeps the cutter sharp.
Trim Edge First
If a roll is loaded, the end of the paper will be cut.
Choose On to have 40 mm (1.6 in) cut off the leading edge of
the roll after you load the roll. Scraps are then removed.
When Automatic is selected, if the left and right side of the
leading edge of the roll are uneven (by 3 mm [0.12 in] or more),
the edge is cut an amount relative to the slant to ensure a
straight edge after you load the roll. Scraps are then removed.
If the unevenness is less than 3 mm or if Off is selected, the
edge is not cut and scraps are not removed.
Printer Parts 61
Control Panel
Setting Item
(The paper type is
Cutting Mode
displayed here.)(*1)
Description, Instructions
Specify whether or not to cut with the standard round-bladed
cutter.
Choose Automatic to have the roll cut automatically after
printing. If you choose Eject, the paper is cut after you hold
down the Stop button for a second or more. If you choose
Manual, the paper will not be cut after printing. Instead, a line
will be printed at the cut position.
Bordless Margin
Adjust the margin during borderless printing.
Choose Automatic to have the printer automatically detect the
paper width and congure the margin settings for borderless
printing. If margins are mistakenly created when Automatic is
selected, choose Fixed. In this case, the paper width is not
detected automatically, and the document is printed without
borders, using the margin settings required by the printer.
CutDustReduct.
Choose On to reduce the amount of debris generated when
cutting lm and similar media by printing a line at the cut
position. This option reduces the amount of debris given off after
cutting. It also helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter
and keeps the cutter sharp if you use adhesive paper. (→P.141)
NearEnd Sht Mrgn
Specify a margin at the leading edge of sheets to ensure better
printing quality at the leading edge.
Note that if you choose 3mm, it may lower the printing quality
at the leading edge and affect feeding accuracy. The printed
surface may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading
edge.
Manual Feed
When printing manually, choose the Paper Feed Slot. Normally,
choose Top. For heavyweight paper such as POP Board,
choose Front.
Return Defaults
Choose Yes to restore Paper Details to the factory default
values.
*1: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.108) The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control
Panel) is updated when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change
paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool.
62 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Job Management
Setting Item
Job Queue Job List
Ope.
Com. BOX Job List
Ope.
(Choose a
print job)
(Choose a
print job)
Description, Instructions
Delete
Delete the current job or queued jobs.
(→P.529)
Priority
Print the job rst after the current print
job is nished. (→P.529)
Print
Print jobs in the Common Box.
Delete
Delete jobs in the Common Box.
Print Job
List
Psnl. BOX Folder List (Enter a
Ope.
password
if one has
been set.)
Print a list of jobs in the Common Box.
Job List
Print Job
List
Print
Print jobs in Personal Boxes.
Delete
Delete jobs in Personal Boxes.
Print a list of jobs in Personal Boxes.
Printer Parts 63
Control Panel
Adjust Printer
Setting Item
Auto Head Adj.
Standard Adj.
Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a test pattern
for the automatic adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to
the printing direction. (→P.572)
Advanced Adj.
Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a test pattern for
the automatic adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the
nozzle and printing direction. (→P.572)
Auto Print
Choose On to have the printer automatically execute the
Advanced Adj. operations after you replace the Printhead.
(→P.572)
Manual Head Adj
Auto Band Adj.
Description, Instructions
Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjustment of Printhead
alignment relative to the printing direction. Enter the adjustment
value manually based on the resulting pattern. (→P.574)
Standard Adj.
Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a band adjustment
test pattern for automatic adjustment of the feed amount.
(→P.577)
Advanced Adj.
Choose this option when using paper other than genuine Canon
paper, or paper for purposes other than checking output.
Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a band adjustment
test pattern for automatic adjustment of the feed amount. Note
that this function takes more time and requires more ink than
Standard Adj.. (→P.577)
Manual Band Adj
Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjusting the feed amount
based on the paper type.
Adj Far Ed Feed
Choose Yes for adjustment of the feed amount of the trailing
edge.
Adjust Length
Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjustment relative to
paper stretching or shrinkage, after which you can enter the
amount of adjustment. (→P.583)
Calibration
64 Printer Parts
Auto Adjust
Choose Yes for automatic adjustment of the adjustment value
after a test pattern for color calibration is printed. The latest
color calibration adjustment value is applied for all paper.
Calibration Log
The date of color calibration and the paper type is indicated
on the Display Screen.
Use Adj. Value
Select Disabled and press the OK button to print without
applying the color calibration adjustment value. The printer
driver settings are given priority.
Select Enabled and press the OK button to apply the color
calibration adjustment value in printing. However, the printer
driver settings will be given priority.
Return Defaults
Clears the color calibration adjustment value and log.
Control Panel
Interface Setup
Setting Item
Description, Instructions
EOP Timer
TCP/IP
Specify the timeout period before cancellation of print jobs
that cannot be received by the printer.
IP Mode
Protocol
Choose whether the printer IP address is congured
automatically or a static IP address is entered manually.
DHCP
BOOTP
Specify the protocol used to congure the IP address
automatically.
RARP
IP Setting
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default G/W
NetWare
NetWare
Specify the NetWare protocol. To apply your changes,
choose Register Setting.
Frame Type
Specify the frame type to use.
Print Service
Choose the print service.
AppleTalk
Ethernet
Driver
Return
Defaults
Specify the printer network information when using a static
IP address.
Enter the IP address assigned to the printer, as well as the
network subnet mask and default gateway.
Specify whether to use the AppleTalk protocol. To apply
your changes, choose Register Setting.
Auto Detect
Specify the communication method. To apply your
changes, choose Register Setting.
Choose On for automatic conguration of the LAN
communication protocol. Choose Off to use settings
values of Comm.Mode and Ethernet Type.
Comm.Mode
Choose the LAN communication method.
Ethernet Type
Choose the LAN transfer rate.
Spanning
Tree
Choose whether spanning-tree packets are supported
over the LAN.
MAC Address
Displays the MAC address.
Execute? is displayed if you press the ▼ button. Choose
OK to restore the network settings to the default values.
Printer Parts 65
Control Panel
Maintenance
Setting Item
Description, Instructions
Repl. maint cart
When replacing the Maintenance Cartridge, choose Yes and follow the instructions
on the screen. (→P.633)
Replace P.head
Not displayed during a warning message that the remaining Maintenance Cartridge
capacity is low.
When replacing the Printhead, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen.
(→P.626)
Move Printer
When transferring the printer to another location, follow the instructions on the screen.
(→P.649)
Clean Platen
After you select Yes, the Carriage is moved and the printer is ready for Platen cleaning.
Spur Cleaning
Click Yes to clean the spurs. (→P.645)
66 Printer Parts
Control Panel
System Setup
Setting Item
Warning
Buzzer
Description, Instructions
Set the buzzer. Choose On for the buzzer to sound once for warnings
and three times for errors.
Detect Mismatch Choose Warning for notication (display of a warning message)
during printing if the paper type specied in the printer menu does not
match the paper type in the printer driver. Choose None to continue
to print without notication. Choose Pause to have printing paused
under these circumstances. In this case, you can continue printing
by pressing the Online button.
Keep Media Size
Select On to use the paper size setting as the basis for printing
instead of other settings. The margin setting of the printer menu will
be used instead of the margin setting of the printer driver if the latter
is smaller, which may prevent text or images in the trailing margin
from being printed.
Choose Off to use the printer driver settings instead. Even if the
margin setting of the printer driver is smaller than that of the printer
driver, text or images will not be cut off. However, this requires longer
paper because the actual margin will be equal to the margin setting
of the printer driver plus the margin setting of the printer menu.
Paper Size Basis Sht Selection
If sheet size detection is activated, choose whether ISO A3+ or
13"x19"(Super B) is applied when an intermediate size is detected.
Roll Selection 1
If roll size detection is activated, choose whether ISO A3 (297mm)
or 300mm Roll is applied when a roll of an intermediate width is
detected.
Roll Selection 2
If roll size detection is activated, choose whether 10in. (254mm)
or JIS B4 (257mm) is applied when a roll of an intermediate width
is detected.
TrimEdge
Reload
When Automatic is selected, the leading edge will be cut as needed,
taking into account how long the paper has been loaded without being
printed. (However, it is not cut if Cutting Mode is set to Manual.)
Choose On to cut the leading edge.
Noz. Check
Freq.
Specify the timing for automatic checks of nozzle clogging. Choose 1
page to check once per printed page. Choose 10 pages to check
once per ten printed pages. Choose Automatic to have the printer
automatically adjust the timing for checks based on the frequency
of nozzle use.
Sleep Timer
Specify the period before the printer enters Sleep mode.
Printer Parts 67
Control Panel
Setting Item
Description, Instructions
Length Unit
Choose the unit of measurement when roll length is displayed. You
can switch the unit displayed for Roll Length Set and the remaining
paper amount displayed in the submenu.
Time Zone
Specify the time zone. Time zone options indicate a main city in this
time zone and the difference from Greenwich Mean Time.
Date Format
Specify the date format.
Date & Time
Date
Set the current date.
Time
Set the current time.
Language
Specify the language used on the Display Screen.
Contrast Adj.
Adjust the Display Screen contrast level.
Reset
PaprSetngs
Restores settings that you have changed with Media Conguration
Tool to the factory default values. If paper added using the Media
Conguration Tool was used for color calibration, such color
calibration can no longer be applied to any type of paper.
Erase HDD Data High Speed
Erases le management data for print job data stored on the printer’s
hard disk. (→P.571)
68 Printer Parts
Secure High
Spd.
Overwrites the entire hard disk with random data. (→P.571)
Secure
Overwrites the entire hard disk with 00, FF, and random data (one
time each). Verication is performed to check if the data was correctly
written. (→P.571)
Control Panel
Information
Setting Item
System Info
Version
Description, Instructions
Firm
Displays the printer rmware version.
Boot
Displays the version of the boot ROM.
MIT
Displays the version of the MIT database format.
s/n
Displays the printer’s serial number.
MAC
Displays the MAC address of the printer.
IP
Displays the printer’s IP address.
Error Log
########-####
Displays the most recent error messages (up to
two).
Job Log
(Choose from
Document Name
information about
User Name
the latest three print
jobs.)
Page Count
Displays the document name in the last print job.
HDD
Information
HDDSpace
Displays the name of the user who sent the print
job.
Displays the number of pages in the print job.
Job Status
Displays the results of the print job processed.
Print Start Time
Displays the time when the print job was started.
Print End Time
Displays the time when the print job was nished.
Print Time
Displays the time required to print the job.
Print Size
Displays the paper size in the print job.
Media Type
Displays the paper type in the print job.
Interface
Displays the interface used for the print job.
Ink Consumed
Displays the ink consumption.
Displays the space available on the printer’s hard
disk.
Printer Parts 69
Control Panel
Main Menu Settings (During Printing)
Main menu items during printing are described in the following tables.
For instructions on selecting or setting menu items, see “Main Menu Operations”. (→P.39)
For details on menu levels and values, see “Menu Structure”. (→P.44)
Setting Item
Menu Durng Prtng Head Cleaning
Job Mgmt Menu
70 Printer Parts
Description, Instructions
Printhead cleaning options. (→P.625)
Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or
contains foreign substances.
Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all, or if printing
is not improved by Head Cleaning A.
Fine Band Adj.
Fine-tune the feed amount manually.
Information
Displays the information about the printer and history of print
jobs. (→P.71)
Manage print jobs on the printer’s hard disk. (→P.72)
Control Panel
Information
Setting Item
System Info
Version
Description, Instructions
Firm
Displays the version of the printer and rmware.
Boot
Displays the version of the boot ROM.
MIT
Displays the version of the MIT database format.
Ext I/F
Displays the name of interfaces compatible with
the expansion slot.
s/n
Displays the printer’s serial number.
MAC
Displays the MAC address.
HDDSpace
Displays the space available on the printer’s hard
disk.
Error Log
########-####
Displays the most recent error messages (up to
two).
Job Log
(Choose from
Document Name
information about
User Name
the latest three print
jobs.)
Page Count
Displays the document name in the last print job.
HDD
Information
HDDSpace
Displays the name of the user who sent the print
job.
Displays the number of pages in the print job.
Job Status
Displays the results of the print job processed.
Print Start Time
Displays the time when the print job was started.
Print End Time
Displays the time when the print job was nished.
Print Time
Displays the time required to print the job.
Print Size
Displays the paper size in the print job.
Media Type
Displays the paper type in the print job.
Interface
Displays the interface used for the print job.
Ink Consumed
Displays the ink consumption.
Displays the space available on the printer’s hard
disk.
Printer Parts 71
Control Panel
Job Mgmt Menu
Setting Item
Job Queue Job List
Ope.
Com. BOX Job List
Ope.
(Choose a
print job)
(Choose a
print job)
Description, Instructions
Priority
Print the job rst after the current print
job is nished. (→P.529)
Delete
Delete the current job or queued jobs.
(→P.529)
Print
Print jobs in the Common Box.
Delete
Delete jobs in the Common Box.
Print Job
List
Psnl. BOX
Ope.
72 Printer Parts
Folder List (Enter a
password
if one has
been set.)
Print a list of jobs in the Common Box.
Job List
Print Job
List
Print
Print jobs in Personal Boxes.
Delete
Delete jobs in Personal Boxes.
Print a list of jobs in Personal Boxes.
Control Panel
Submenu Display
Pressing the Information button switches the information displayed between Ink, Media Info, and System
Info.
Each time you press the Information button, the following submenus are displayed.
Note
• Press any button other than the Information button to restore the previous mode.
• After you display a submenu, the printer will revert to the previous mode in about ve seconds if no print
job is received or if you do not operate the printer.
Remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and ink levels
The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is shown on the top level of the Display Screen.
The remaining level of each ink is shown on the bottom level of the Display Screen. Ink levels shown on the
Display Screen correspond to the inks identied by the color labels on the bottom of the Display Screen.
These symbols may be displayed above the ink level: “!” if ink is low, “×” if no ink is left, and “?” if you have
deactivated ink level detection.
Remaining ink is indicated as follows.
Information on the loaded paper
Here, the paper size, type, and related printer settings are displayed.
Printer information
Displays the rmware version, serial number, IP address, and hard disk capacity.
Printer Parts 73
Control Panel
Status Print
You can print a Status Print report indicating the current status of the printer.
With Status Print, information is printed regarding the printer rmware version, various settings, and the
utilization level of consumables.
Printing Status Print Reports
1.
Load paper.
If using sheets, load paper A4/Letter-sized. You will need at least four sheets.
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Test Print, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Status Print, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
Checking the information in the Status Print report
The following information is included in the Status Print report.
Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxxx Status Print
Printer model
Firm
Firmware version
Boot
Boot version
MIT
MIT format version
S/N
Printer serial number
MC
Maintenance Cartridge capacity (%)
Y, PC, C, PGY, GY, BK, PM, M,
MBK, R, G, and B
Ink levels.
The remaining ink is displayed in a ve-level scale.
74 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Media Menu
Information on the loaded paper.
Manual Paper Type
Roll Media Type
Check Remain. Roll
Adjust Printer
Current printer settings.
Head Adjust
Printhead adjustment value.
Auto Print
A1-F2
Feed Priority
Settings related to paper feeding.
Adjust Length
Calibration
The color calibration setting value.
Execution Log
Date
Media
Use Effect Value
The calibration log.
Indicates the date calibration was performed and the type of paper
used.
This value indicates whether the results of color calibration are used
or not.
Printer Parts 75
Control Panel
Interface Setup
Current network settings.
EOP Timer
Sets the elapsed time between receiving last data and
canceling printing.
TCP/IP
Settings related to TCP/IP.
IP Mode
Protocol
DHCP
BOOTP
RARP
IP Setting
IP Setting values.
IP Address
Subnet
Mask
Default
G/W
NetWare
NetWare settings.
NetWare
Frame Type
Print Service
AppleTalk
Values that specify whether AppleTalk is active or not.
Ethernet Driver
Ethernet Driver settings.
Auto Detect
Comm.Mode
Ethernet Type
Spanning Tree
MAC Address
76 Printer Parts
Control Panel
System Setup
Warning
Current warning and error settings.
Buzzer
Detect mismatch
Keep Media Size
Current paper-related settings.
Sheet Selection
Roll Selection 1
Roll Selection 2
TrimEdge Reload
Noz. Check Freq.
Nozzle-check settings.
Sleep Timer
General printer settings.
Length Unit
Time Zone
Date Format
Language
Contrast Adj.
Information
System information and an error log.
RAM
Ext. Interface
Error Log
HDDSpace
Printer Parts 77
Control Panel
Network (RemoteUI)
Current network settings used by RemoteUI.
TCP/IP
Frame Type
Use DHCP
Use BOOTP
Use RARP
Enable DNS Dynamic
Update
Use Zeroconf Function
IP Address*
Subnet Mask*
Gateway Address*
LPD Printing
IPP Printing
IPP Printer URI
RAW Printing
Raw Port Number
Raw Mode Bi-direction
FTP Printing
Primary DNS Server
Address*
Secondary DNS Server
Address*
DNS Host Name*
DNS Domain Name*
SMTP Server Address*
Multicast DNS Service
Name
*: Blank if the status has been saved by using Status Monitor.
NetWare
Current NetWare settings.
Frame Type
IPX External Network
Number*
Node Number*
Print Service
*: Depending on the NetWare print service settings, information on one of the following four items is printed.
78 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Bindery PServer
File Server
Name*
Values set when NetWare > Print Service > Bindery PServer is
selected.
Print Server
Name*
Print Server
Password*
Polling Interval
RPrinter
Values set when NetWare > Print Service > RPrinter is selected.
Print Server
Name*
Printer Number*
NDS PServer
Values set when NetWare > Print Service > NDS PServer is selected.
Tree Name*
Context name*
Print Server
Name*
Print Server
Password*
Polling Interval
NPrinter
Values set when NetWare > Print Service > NPrinter is selected.
Print Server
Name*
Printer Number*
*: Blank if the status has been saved by using Status Monitor.
AppleTalk
Current AppleTalk settings.
Phase Type
Name*
Network Number*
Zone*
*: Blank if the status has been saved by using Status Monitor.
HEAD LOT NUMBER
Printhead lot number.
LOT R
LOT L
PARTS STATUS
Utilization status of replacement parts that require servicing.
COUNTER A-I
Printer Parts 79
Control Panel
COUNTER
Utilization status of the cutter, media, and other items (indicating how
much they have been used).
CUTTER
MEDIA
MEDIA1-7
LIFE TTL
LIFE ROLL
LIFE CUTSHEET
PRINTER
AFTER
INSTALLATION
80 Printer Parts
Optional accessories
Optional accessories
Stand
The printer can be mounted on the following Stand.
• Printer Stand ST-25
Note
• For details on assembling the Stand, refer to the instructions provided with the Stand.
Printer Parts 81
Optional accessories
Roll Holder Set
A set of parts including a Roll Holder, Holder Stopper (for 2- and 3-inch paper cores), 3-Inch Paper Core
Attachment, and Spacer for Borderless Printing (used for both 2- and 3-inch paper cores).
To load a roll with a 3-inch paper core, insert the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment on the Roll Holder and attach
the Holder Stopper for 3-inch paper cores. If you use an A1 (594 mm [23.4 in]) roll or A2 (420 mm [16.5 in])
roll for borderless printing, insert the Spacer for Borderless Printing on the Roll Holder.
• Roll Holder Set RH2-24
• Roll Holder
• Holder Stopper (for 2- and 3-inch paper cores (a) and (b))
• 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment
• Spacer for Borderless Printing
For instructions on installing these parts, see “Attaching Accessories to the Roll Holder”. (→P.143)
82 Printer Parts
Printer Specications
Printer Specications
Specications
Important
• This information is subject to change as the printer is updated.
• The following values may vary depending on the operating environment.
Printer
Power supply
100-120 V AC (50/60 Hz), 220-240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
Power consumption In operation
100 W max.
Sleep mode
100-120 V: 5 W max.
220-240 V: 6 W max.
Off
1 W max. (*1)
Operating noise
Operating
environment
Approx. 49 dB (A) max.
Temperature
15-30°C (59-86°F)
Humidity
10-80%, non-condensing
Dimensions (W × D Printer only
× H)
With stand
1,177×670×344 mm (46.3 × 26.4 × 13.5 in)
Weight
(not including the
Printhead and Ink
Tank)
Printer only
51 kg (112.4 lb)
With stand
66 kg (145.5 lb)
Space required for
installation (*2)
Printer only
1,477×1,770×644 mm (58.1 × 80.7 × 25.4 in)
With stand
1,477×1,970×1,291 mm (58.1 × 80.7 × 50.8 in)
Applicable standards
1,177×870×991 mm (46.3 × 34.3× 39.0 in)
International Energy Star Program, Law on Promoting Green
Purchasing, GPN, RoHS, The Eco Declaration, WEEE, U.S.
presidential directives
*1: The printer uses a trace amount of power even when turned off. To stop all power consumption,
turn off the printer and unplug the power cord.
*2: Normally, you will need to ensure an unobstructed space of 800 mm (31.5 in) in front of the printer, 300
mm (11.8 in) behind, 150 mm (5.9 in) on both sides, and 300 mm (11.8 in) above the printer. Only
when printing from the Front Paper Feed Slot, leave 1,300 mm (51.2 in) of unobstructed space in front
of the printer and 700 mm (27.6 in) behind it.
Printer Parts 83
Printer Specications
Printing performance
Print method
Bubblejet
Maximum resolution
2400 dpi horizontally (*1) × 1200 dpi vertically
Printhead
PF-03
Number of nozzles
2,560 per color
*1: Prints with a minimum 1/2400 inch dot pitch between ink droplets.
Interface
Expansion Board Slots
1
USB 2.0(*1)
Format
Internal port
Mode
Full-speed (12 Mbps), high-speed (480 Mbps), bulk transfer
Connector
Series B (4-pin)
Format
Internal port
Specication
IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T, IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX
/Auto-Negotiation, and IEEE 802.3x Full Duplex
Protocols
IPX/SPX (Netware 4.2, 5.1, 6.0), SNMP, HTTP, TCP/IP,
AppleTalk
Ethernet
*1: Use in USB 2.0 High Speed mode requires the following environment:
• Computer: USB 2.0 High-Speed-compatible
• Operating system: Windows Vista/Windows Server 2003/Windows XP/Windows
2000 or Mac OS X ver. 10.3.3 or later
• USB 2.0 driver: Microsoft USB 2.0 driver (available from Windows Update or the Service Pack.)
• USB cable: Certied USB 2.0 cable
84 Printer Parts
Printer Specications
Ink
Ink Tank
Y Ink Tank ( Yellow Ink)
Pigment ink
PFI-101Y (user-replaceable)
PC Ink Tank ( Photo Cyan Ink)
Pigment ink
PFI-101PC (user-replaceable)
C Ink Tank ( Cyan Ink)
Pigment ink
PFI-101C (user-replaceable)
PGY Ink Tank ( Photo Gray Ink)
Pigment ink
PFI-103PGY (user-replaceable)
GY Ink Tank ( Gray Ink)
Pigment ink
PFI-103GY (user-replaceable)
BK Ink Tank ( Black Ink)
Pigment ink
PFI-103BK (user-replaceable)
PM Ink Tank ( Photo Magenta Ink)
Pigment ink
PFI-101PM (user-replaceable)
M Ink Tank ( Magenta Ink)
Pigment ink
PFI-101M (user-replaceable)
MBK Ink Tank ( Matte Black Ink, or
black ink for matte paper)
Pigment ink
PFI-103MBK (user-replaceable)
R Ink Tank ( Red Ink)
Pigment ink
PFI-101R (user-replaceable)
G Ink Tank ( Green Ink)
Pigment ink
PFI-101G (user-replaceable)
B Ink Tank ( Blue Ink)
Pigment ink
PFI-101B (user-replaceable)
Capacity
130 ml per color (*1)
*1: The provided Starter Ink Tanks contain 90 ml (3.0  oz) each.
Printer Parts 85
Printer Specications
Paper (*1)
Paper width
Maximum
length per
page
250-610 mm (9.8-24 in)
Sheets
Tray (top)
1,600 mm (63.0 in)
Tray (front)
914 mm (36.0 in)
Rolls
Thickness
Sheets
18 m (19.7 yd.)
Tray (top)
0.08-0.8 mm (0.003-0.031 in)
Tray (front)
0.8-1.5 mm (0.031-0.060 in)
Rolls
Paper size
Print area
Sheets
0.08-0.8 mm (0.003-0.031 in)
Supported
sizes
ISO A1, ISO A2, ISO A2+, ISO A3, ISO A3+, ISO A4, ISO B2,
ISO B3, ISO B4, JIS B2, JIS B3, JIS B4, 22"x34" (ANSI D),
17"x22" (ANSI C), 11"x17" (Ledger), 13"x19" (SuperB), Letter
(8.5"x11"), Legal (8.5"x14"), 24"x36" (ARCH D), 18"x24" (ARCH
C), 12"x18" (ARCH B), 9"x12" (ARCH A), DIN C2, DIN C3,
DIN C4, 20"x24", 18"x22", 14"x17", 12"x16", 10"x12", 10"x15",
8"x10", US Photo 16"x20", Poster 20"x30", 13"x22", Poster
300x900 mm
Tray (top)
• Width: 203-610 mm (8-24 in)
• Length: 279-1,600 mm (11-63 in)
Tray (front)
• Width: 250-610 mm (8-24 in)
• Length: 350-914 mm (14-36 in)
Rolls
8 inches (203 mm), 10 inches (254 mm), JIS B4 (257 mm),
ISO A3/A4 (297 mm), Banner (300 mm), A3+ (329 mm), 14
inches (356 mm), 16 inches (407 mm), ISO A2/A3 (420 mm), 17
inches (432 mm), JIS B2/B3 (515 mm), ISO A1/A2 (594 mm),
24 inches (610 mm)
Normal size
Printable area
• Sheets ( Top Paper Feed Slot)
Top: 3 mm (0.12 in); bottom: 3 or 23 mm (0.9 in); left and
right sides: 3 mm. (The bottom value varies depending on
the type of paper.)
• Sheets ( Front Paper Feed Slot)
3 mm (0.12 in) on top, 23 mm (0.9 in) on bottom, and 3 mm
(0.12 in) on both sides
• Rolls
3 mm (0.12 in) from each side
For information on the recommended print area, see “Print
Area”. (→P.89)
Borderless printing (*2)
Printable area (rolls)
Entire surface
Oversized (*2), (*3)
Printable area
Entire surface
Supported width for borderless printing
86 Printer Parts
10 inches (254 mm), JIS B4 (257 mm), A3+ (329 mm), 14
inches (356 mm), 16 inches (407 mm), ISO A2/A3 (420 mm)
(*4), 17 inches (432 mm), JIS B2/B3 (515 mm), ISO A1/A2 (594
mm) (*4), 24 inches (610 mm)
Printer Specications
*1: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.108)
*2: Printing may not be possible in some cases, depending on the type and size of paper.
*3: Load paper at least 6 mm (0.24 in) wider and 6 mm higher than the size selected in Page Size for roll
paper. Or, load paper at least 6 mm wider and 26 mm (1.0 in) higher for the tray.
*4: Borderless printing requires the Spacer for Borderless Printing.
Hard Disk
Capacity on the hard disk to store image data
48 GB
Print job storage capacity
• Common mail box: 100 jobs
• Personal boxes: 100 jobs
Printer Parts 87
Printer Specications
Basic Environmental Performance
Printer
Power consumption Sleep mode
Resource efciency
Product safety
100-120 V: 5 W max.
220-240 V: 6 W max.
Off
1 W max.
Weight
Printer only: 51 kg (112.4 lb)
Dimensions (W × D
× H)
Printer only: 1,177×670×344 mm (46.3 × 26.4 × 13.5 in)
Recycling
Recyclable plastic used for printer body
Toxic substances
Structural components: No prohibited brominated ame
retardants used (PBB or PBDE)
Body plastic: No heavy metals (Pb, Hg, Cr[Vl], or Cd) or
halogenated ame retardants used
Operating noise
Approx. 49 dB (A) max.
Packaging materials
Heavy metal content (Pb, Hg, Cr[Vl], and Cd)
88 Printer Parts
None (none in packaging)
Printer Specications
Print Area
A margin required by the printer is added with respect to the size of paper loaded in the printer. Except in
borderless printing, the actual printing area corresponds to the paper size minus the space for this margin.
Sheets
Printable Area
Recommended Print Area
Bottom
Bottom
Top Edge
Top Edge
Sides
Sides
Edge
Edge
3/23 mm
Top Paper 3 mm (0.12
3 mm (0.12
(0.12/0.91
Feed Slot
in)
in)
20 mm (0.79 27 mm (1.06 5 mm (0.20
in)
in)
in)
in)
Front Paper 3 mm (0.12 23 mm (0.91 3 mm (0.12
Feed Slot
in)
in)
in)
Rolls
0/3 mm
(0/0.12 in)
0/3 mm
(0/0.12 in)
0/3 mm
(0/0.12 in)
20 mm (0.79 5 mm (0.20
in)
in)
5 mm (0.20
in)
Sheets
• Printable Area:
Printing from the Top Paper Feed Slot requires a margin of 3 mm (0.12 in) on all sides. (A bottom margin
of 23 mm [0.9 in] may sometimes be required.) The bottom margin is 23 mm for some types of paper.
For more information, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)
When printing from the Front Paper Feed Slot, a margin of 23 mm (0.9 in) on all sides is required.
• Recommended print area:
A margin of 20 mm (0.79 in) on top, 27 mm (1.06 in) on bottom, and 5 mm (0.20 in) on left and right
sides is required.
Note
• Printable area: The area that can be printed.
• Guaranteed Print Area: We recommend printing within this area.
• To print so that your original matches the print area exactly, use an oversized paper size that includes
the required margin. (→P.256)
• You can choose a bottom margin of 3 mm or 23 mm when printing from the Top Paper Feed Slot.
In the printer driver, choosing Manual in Paper Source sets the bottom margin at 23 mm. On the
other hand, choosing Manual (3mm margins) in Paper Source sets the bottom margin at 3 mm,
which provides a larger area for printing.
However, the option Manual (3mm margins) is not available with the following paper.
• Fine Art Photo Paper
• Fine Art Heavyweight Photo Paper
• Fine Art Textured Paper
• The types of paper listed above may be updated, in some cases.
For details on paper types, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)
• If you set the bottom margin at 3 mm, images in the bottom margin may be distorted.
In this case, choose Manual in Paper Source to set the bottom margin at 23 mm.
Printer Parts 89
Printer Specications
Rolls
• Printable Area:
A margin of 3 mm (0.12 in) on all sides is required. During borderless printing, the margin on all sides
is 0 mm. For information on paper compatible with borderless printing, see the Paper Reference
Guide. (→P.108)
• Recommended print area:
A margin of 20 mm (0.79 in) on top, 5 mm (0.20 in) on bottom, and 5 mm (0.20 in) on left and right
sides is required.
Note
• Printable area: The area that can be printed.
• Guaranteed Print Area: We recommend printing within this area.
• To print so that your original matches the print area exactly, use an oversized paper size that includes
the required margin. (→P.256)
90 Printer Parts
Printing procedure
Basic Printing Workow
Printing procedure
Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets
The printer supports both rolls and sheets.
This section introduces the main features of each, as well as the main printing methods available. Select rolls
or sheets to suit your particular printing application.
Note
• For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)
• A variety of other ways to print are available besides those introduced here. Choose the printing
method that suits your particular printing application, referring to "Working With Various Print Jobs" and
"Enhanced Printing Options" from the table of contents.
Roll printing
Media in spooled rolls is generally called Roll Media. Rolls are loaded on the Roll Holder, which are in
turn loaded in the printer.
Rolls can be used to print large photos or create posters or banners that cannot be printed on regular sheets.
• Large-format printing
Easily print vertical or horizontal banners from familiar applications such as Microsoft Ofce applications.
(→P.291)
• Borderless printing
Print without a margin (border) around posters or photos.
(→P.270)
(→P.277)
(→P.263)
• Banner printing
You can print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.
(→P.313)
• 90-degree rotation before printing
Originals in portrait orientation are rotated 90 degrees when possible to use paper more efciently.
(→P.337)
• Enlarged/reduced printing
You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing originals before printing.
(→P.233)
(→P.239)
(→P.245)
• Free Layout function
Print multiple documents from multiple applications (such as word-processing programs, spreadsheet
programs, and so on) next to each other.
(→P.307)
Basic Printing Workow 91
Printing procedure
Sheet printing
Sheets refers to individual sheets of paper in regular sizes.
Insert the sheet between the Platen and the Paper Retainer.
• Enlarged/reduced printing
You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing originals before printing.
(→P.233)
(→P.239)
(→P.245)
• Free Layout function
Print multiple documents from multiple applications (such as word-processing programs, spreadsheet
programs, and so on) next to each other.
(→P.307)
92 Basic Printing Workow
Printing procedure
Loading and Printing on Rolls
These are the basic steps for loading and printing on rolls.
Follow these steps to switch to a new roll or a roll of a different type or width before printing.
Note
• If a sheet is loaded in the Top Paper Feed Slot, remove it before this procedure. (→P.145)
• Before printing banners or other long documents, spread a clean cloth or paper on the oor or use the
Output Stacker to prevent the printed surface from becoming dirty from the oor after printing.
• If you will wait for the ink to dry after printing and simply eject the document, you can deactivate
automatic cutting and print a cut line instead. (→P.135)
1.
Turn the printer on. (→P.27)
2.
Select a roll as the paper source. (→P.116)
Basic Printing Workow 93
Printing procedure
3.
Load a roll on the Roll Holder. (→P.119)
Note
• When switching rolls, rst remove the current roll from the Roll Holder. (→P.126)
4.
Load the roll in the Roll Feed Unit. (→P.121)
94 Basic Printing Workow
Printing procedure
5.
Load the roll in the printer. (→P.122)
6.
Select the type of paper. (→P.117)
7.
Specify the paper length. (→P.118)
Basic Printing Workow 95
Printing procedure
8.
Complete settings in the printer driver for the type of paper and other details.
• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) (→P.229)
• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) (→P.231)
Important
• Always specify the same type and size of paper in the printer menu and printer driver.
If the type and size do not match, an error message will be displayed and printing is not possible.
• Papr Type Mismatch (→P.688)
• RollWdthMismatch (→P.689)
96 Basic Printing Workow
Printing procedure
9.
Send the print job.
• Printing from Windows (→P.100)
• Printing from Mac OS X (→P.101)
Start printing.
Note
• Steps 6 and 7 are not required if a barcode has been printed on the roll and you have activated automatic
detection of the remaining roll paper. The type of paper and amount left are automatically detected.
• Keeping a roll in the printer for a long time without printing on it may leave a depression on the leading
edge.
When printing quality is most important, we recommend setting TrimEdge Reload to On or Automatic
so that the paper edge is automatically cut before printing.
• For details on supported sizes and types of rolls, see “Paper Sizes” or the Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.113) (→P.108)
• Clean the platen after you have used up a roll. (→P.641)
• When a roll has been advanced, do not pull it out by force. This will prevent the paper from being
advanced. (→P.124)
If you accidentally pull out the paper, see “Roll Paper Cannot be Inserted into the Paper Feed Slot”.
(→P.664)
• When printing on rolls after printing on sheets, if the lit paper selection lamp does not switch from the
Cut Sheet lamp to the Roll Media lamp, press the Feeder Selection button.
Basic Printing Workow 97
Printing procedure
Loading and Printing on Sheets in the Paper Feed Slot
These are the basic steps for loading sheets in the paper feed slot and then printing from this slot.
Follow the steps below to load and print on sheets in the paper feed slot.
Note
• If a roll is loaded, rewind the roll before this procedure.
(→P.145)
1.
Turn the printer on. (→P.27)
2.
Complete settings in the printer driver for the type and size of paper and other details.
• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) (→P.229)
• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) (→P.231)
98 Basic Printing Workow
Printing procedure
3.
Send the print job.
• Printing from Windows (→P.100)
• Printing from Mac OS X (→P.101)
4.
Load sheets manually. (→P.151)
(Top Paper Feed Slot)
(Front Paper Feed Slot)
Note
• If you will load a sheet before sending a print job, you must select the type and size of paper in
advance on the printer Display Screen. Follow these steps.
• Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet) (→P.149)
• Selecting the Paper Size (Sheet) (→P.150)
Start printing.
Note
• For details on supported sizes and types of the paper that can be loaded in the tray, see “Paper Sizes”
or the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.113) (→P.108)
Basic Printing Workow 99
Printing procedure
Printing from Windows
Print from the application software menu.
Important
• The Windows printer driver can be used in the following versions of Windows:
• Windows 2000 (Professional or Server)
• Windows XP (Home Edition or Professional)
• Windows Server 2003 (Standard Edition)
• Windows Vista
• We recommend exiting unnecessary applications before printing. Running several applications while
printing may interrupt the transfer of print data and affect printing quality.
1.
In the application software, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing
conditions.
2.
After conrming that the printer is selected in the dialog box, click Print or OK to start printing.
Note
• The appearance of the dialog box varies depending on the application software. In most cases, the
dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the range of
pages, number of copies, and so on.
Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application software
Note
• If another printer is selected, select the printer you want to use under Select Printer or in the dialog
box displayed after clicking Printer.
Settings for many printing methods (including enlarged or reduced printing, borderless printing, and so on) are
displayed in the printer driver dialog box. There are two ways to access the printer driver dialog box, as follows:
• From the application software
(→P.404)
• From the operating system menu
(→P.406)
100 Basic Printing Workow
Printing procedure
Printing from Mac OS X
Print from the application menu after registering the printer.
Important
• We recommend exiting unnecessary applications before printing. Running several applications while
printing may interrupt the transfer of print data and affect printing quality.
Registering the printer
Before printing, you must register the printer in Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center ).
For instructions on registering the printer, see “Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh)”.
(→P.510)
Important
• During this setup process, the printer will not be listed among available printers if it is off or disconnected.
• By factory default, the AppleTalk protocol is disabled on the printer. You must enable the AppleTalk
protocol before using the printer in an AppleTalk network. For instructions on activating AppleTalk
protocol, see “Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk Networks (Macintosh)”. (→P.512)
Note
• For Canon IP(iPF) connections, enter the printer’s IP address.
Printing from the application software
1.
In the application software, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing
conditions.
Note
• This dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the
range of pages, number of copies, and so on.
2.
Select the printer in the Printer list.
Basic Printing Workow 101
Printing procedure
3.
Click Print to start printing.
As shown in the following illustration, you can switch to other panes in this dialog box to complete
settings for various methods of printing, including enlarged and reduced printing, borderless
printing, and so on.
102 Basic Printing Workow
Canceling print jobs
Canceling print jobs
Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel
Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to cancel print jobs or ink drying in progress when the
printer is online, ofine, or in Menu mode.
Printer operation varies depending on the status when you hold down the Stop button for a second or
more during printing.
• If you press theStop button before printing starts
Holding down the Stop button for a second or more before printing cancels the print job and brings
the printer online.
When the roll is selected as the paper source, the printer goes online, and when sheet is selected,
the printer goes ofine.
• If you press the Stop button during printing
Holding down the Stop button for a second or more during printing stops printing immediately.
Basic Printing Workow 103
Canceling print jobs
• If you press the Stop button when printing is paused
Holding down the Stop button for a second or more when printing is paused cancels the print job.
104 Basic Printing Workow
Canceling print jobs
Canceling Print Jobs from Windows
You can cancel print jobs in the printer window.
1.
Click the printer icon in the taskbar to display the printer window.
Note
• You can also display this window by double-clicking the printer icon in the Printers and Faxes (or
Printers) folder, accessible through the Windows start menu.
2.
Right-click the job to cancel and select Cancel.
To cancel print jobs from the Control Panel, follow these steps.
1.
If the Display Screen of the Control Panel still indicates that the job is in progress and the Data
lamp continues ashing, hold down the Stop button for a second or more to stop printing.
Do the following if no print jobs are shown in the printer window (because they have already been sent to
the printer).
1.
2.
Double-click the taskbar icon to access the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor.
On the Printer Status sheet, click Cancel Job.
Basic Printing Workow 105
Canceling print jobs
Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X
You can cancel print jobs in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.
1.
2.
Click the printer icon in the Dock to display the printer window.
Click Stop Jobs to stop printing.
In this window, you can cancel jobs sent to the printer.
Note
• The print job is displayed on the printer’s screen during the transmission of print data from the
computer. When the transmission is completed, the job is not displayed even during printing.
Alternatively, you can cancel print jobs as follows.
1.
Click Utility to display imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.
106 Basic Printing Workow
Canceling print jobs
2.
Select the print job to cancel and click the Cancel Job button to remove the print job.
The job sent to the printer is canceled.
Note
• The print job is displayed on the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor window while the printer receives
the print data from the computer. It is not displayed before transmission of print data to the printer,
even if the computer has started the process of the data.
3.
Exit imagePROGRAF Printmonitor. In the printer window, click Start Jobs.
Important
• Always follow these steps if you cancel print jobs. If you do not restart job processing, the next
job cannot be printed.
To cancel print jobs from the Control Panel, follow these steps.
1.
If the Display Screen of the Control Panel still indicates that the job is in progress and the Data
lamp continues ashing, hold down the Stop button for a second or more to stop printing.
Basic Printing Workow 107
Paper
Handling Paper
Paper
Types of Paper
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide . This guide
identies supported plain paper, coated paper, photo paper (such as glossy photo paper), proong paper,
CAD paper, and other types of paper. The Paper Reference Guide identies types and specications of paper,
as well as information on printer driver settings and tips on handling paper.
You can update paper information in the Paper Reference Guide , on the printer Control Panel, and in the
printer driver by downloading the latest version of the Media Conguration Tool from the imagePROGRAF
website.
Note
• The media types with "†" marked in the product name are those specied as genuine Canon media.
For other media, please contact the respective media manufacturer after reading the instruction
manuals supplied with the media.
108 Handling Paper
Paper
Viewing the Paper Reference Guide
You can access the Paper Reference Guide as follows. Follow the steps for your particular operating system.
• Windows
1. Double-click the iPFxxxx Support icon on the desktop. (Here, iPFxxxx represents the printer
model.)
The online support window is displayed.
2. Select Paper Reference Guide.
The Paper Reference Guide is displayed.
Handling Paper 109
Paper
• Mac OS X
1. Click the iPF Support icon in the Dock.
The online support window is displayed.
2. Select Paper Reference Guide.
The Paper Reference Guide is displayed.
110 Handling Paper
Paper
Updating paper information
You can update paper information in the Paper Reference Guide and on the printer by downloading the
latest version of the Media Conguration Tool from the imagePROGRAF website. For information about
the Media Conguration Tool, see the Media Conguration Tool Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration
Tool Guide (Macintosh).
Follow these steps to access the imagePROGRAF website.
Important
• When you update paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool, the paper type setting on the
Control Panel, in the printer driver, and in related software is updated.
• Windows
1. Double-click the iPFxxxx Support icon on the desktop. (Here, iPFxxxx represents the printer
model.)
The online support window is displayed.
2. Select Stay Informed.
The default browser is started, and the imagePROGRAF webpage is displayed.
Handling Paper 111
Paper
• Mac OS X
1. Click the iPF Support icon in the Dock.
The online support window is displayed.
2. Select Stay Informed.
The default browser is started, and the imagePROGRAF webpage is displayed.
Note
• In Windows, you can also access the imagePROGRAF webpage by clicking the start menu, selecting
Programs > iPFxxxx Media Conguration Tool (here, iPFxxxx represents the printer model) > iPFxxxx
Media Conguration Tool to start the Media Conguration Tool, and clicking Extra Information.
• On a Macintosh computer, you can also access the imagePROGRAF website from the Finder by
selecting Applications > Canon Utilities > iPFxxxx Media Conguration Tool (here, iPFxxxx represents
the printer model) > MCTxxxx to start the Media Conguration Tool and then clicking Extra Information.
112 Handling Paper
Paper
Paper Sizes
You can use the following sizes of paper.
Sheets
You can use sheets in the following sizes, up to 610 mm (24 in) wide.
Paper Size
Dimensions
ISO A1
594 × 841 mm (23 × 33 in)
ISO A2
420 × 594 mm (16.5 × 23 in)
ISO A2+
432 × 610 mm (17 × 24 in)
ISO A3
297 × 420 mm (12 × 17 in)
ISO A3+
329 × 483 mm (13 × 19 in)
ISO A4
210 × 297 mm (8 × 12 in)
ISO B2
500 × 707 mm (20 × 28 in)
ISO B3
353 × 500 mm (14 × 20 in)
ISO B4
250 × 353 mm (10 × 14 in)
JIS B2
515 × 728 mm (20 × 29 in)
JIS B3
364 × 515 mm (14 × 20 in)
JIS B4
257 × 364 mm (10 × 14 in)
22"x34"(ANSI D)
559 × 864 mm (22 × 34 in)
17"x22"(ANSI C)
432 × 559 mm (17 × 22 in)
11"x17" (Ledger)
279 × 432 mm (11 × 17 in)
13"x19" (Super B)
330 × 483 mm (13 × 19 in)
Letter (8.5"x11")
216 × 279 mm (8.5 × 11 in)
Legal (8.5"x14")
216 × 356 mm (8.5 × 14 in)
24"x36" (ARCH D)
610 × 914 mm (24 × 36 in)
18"x24" (ARCH C)
457 × 610 mm (18 × 24 in)
12"x18" (ARCH B)
305 × 457 mm (12 × 18 in)
9"x12" (ARCH A)
229 × 305 mm (9 × 12 in)
DIN C2
458 × 648 mm (18 × 26 in)
DIN C3
324 × 458 mm (13 × 18 in)
DIN C4
229 × 324 mm (9 × 13 in)
20"x24"
508 × 610 mm (20 × 24 in)
18"x22"
457 × 559 mm (18 × 22 in)
14"x17"
355 × 432 mm (14 × 17 in)
12"x16"
304 × 406 mm (12 × 16 in)
10"x12"
254 × 305 mm (10 × 12 in)
10"x15"
254 × 381 mm (10 × 15 in)
Handling Paper 113
Paper
Paper Size
Dimensions
US Photo 16"x20"
406 × 508 mm (16 × 20 in)
Poster 20"x30"
508 × 762 mm (20 × 30 in)
13"x22"
329 × 558 mm (13 × 22 in)
Poster 300x900mm
300 × 900 mm (12 × 35 in)
Custom
Media Size
Top Paper Feed Slot
203 × 279 mm (8 × 11 in) - 610 × 1600 mm (24 × 63 in)
Front Paper Feed Slot
203× 520 mm (8× 21 in) - 610 × 914 mm (24 × 36 in)
114 Handling Paper
Paper
Rolls
Rolls that meet the following conditions are supported.
• Outer diameter: up to 150 mm (6 in)
• Inner diameter of paper core: 2 or 3 inches
• Printing side out
Identication in Roll Paper Width in
Printer Driver (*1)
24-in. Roll (610mm)
Yes
ISO A1/A2 Roll (594mm)
Yes (*2)
JIS B2/B3 Roll (515mm)
Yes
17-in. Roll (432mm)
Yes
ISO A2/A3 Roll (420mm)
Yes (*2)
16-in. Roll (406mm)
Yes
14-in. Roll (356mm)
Yes
A3+ Roll (329mm)
Yes
300mm Roll (300mm)
No
ISO A3/A4 Roll (297mm)
No
JIS B4 Roll (257mm)
Yes
10-in. Roll (254mm)
Yes
8-in. Roll (203mm)
No
Borderless Printing (*1)
*1: For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper Reference
Guide (→P.108)
*2: Requires the Spacer for Borderless Printing.
Note
• In the printer driver, paper sizes are categorized into groups based on the “size system,” such as ISO A
and JIS. In Windows, some size systems are not available by default.
• For details on non-standard Custom Media Size, see “Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes”. (→P.300)
• Borderless printing is not supported on sheets.
Handling Paper 115
Handling rolls
Handling rolls
Selecting the Paper Source
When selecting Paper Feed Slot, press the Feeder Selection button.
You can determine which Paper Feed Slot is selected by checking which lamp is lit, the Roll Media lamp
(a) or the Cut Sheet lamp (b).
• Roll Media lamp : Selected when printing on Roll Media.
• Cut Sheet lamp : Selected when printing on Sheets from the Top Paper Feed Slot or Front Paper
Feed Slot.
Note
• If any paper is loaded that will not be used, a message is shown on the Display Screen, either Remove
roll? or Eject sheet? when you press the Feeder Selection button.
When removing the paper, press the OK button. (→P.145)
• You cannot switch the paper source in the following situations:
• If the Message lamp is ashing
Check the message on the Display Screen and take action as necessary. (→P.684)
• If the Data lamp is ashing
Select the paper source after printing.
• If a printer menu operation is in progress
Select the paper source after the menu operation.
• When in the process of loading paper
Finish loading the paper before selecting the paper source.
• When in the process of replacing Ink Tanks
Finish replacing the Ink Tanks before selecting the paper source.
• If the Top Cover is open
Close the Top Cover before selecting the paper source.
116 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Selecting the Paper Type (Roll)
When changing the type of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the type of paper as follows.
Important
• For best printing results, the printer ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper. That’s why the
margins and the size of printed images may vary depending on the type of paper used. If printing results
are not as you expected, adjust the paper feed amount and Printhead height.
(→P.577)
(→P.576)
Note
• After you load the roll, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the paper type on the
Display Screen, unless a barcode has been printed on the roll or you have activated automatic detection
of the remaining roll paper. Select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.
If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have activated automatic detection of the remaining
roll paper, specify the roll length after the paper type. (→P.118)
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Media Menu, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Roll Media Type, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.
Note
• For details on types of paper, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108) By factory default, Plain
Paper is selected.
• Be sure to select the correct paper type. If this setting does not match the loaded paper, it may
cause feed errors and affect the printing quality.
5.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
Handling Paper 117
Handling rolls
Specifying the Paper Length (Roll)
When changing the length of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the length as follows.
Note
• When you specify the roll length in the printer menu, Chk Remain.Roll must be set to On. If it is
Off, the Roll Length Set menu is not shown.
• After you load a roll and specify the roll type, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of
the roll length on the Display Screen if no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have activated
automatic detection of the remaining roll paper. Select the roll length, and then press the OK button.
The printer will automatically go online.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Media Menu, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Roll Length Set, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the length of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.
Specify the roll length as follows.
1. Press ◄ or ► to move the cursor (_) to each eld for entering numbers.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to enter the value.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to nish entering the value, and then press the OK button.
5.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
118 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder
Note
• For details on supported sizes and types of the roll that can be loaded, see “Paper Sizes” or the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.113) (→P.108)
• Align the edges of the paper on both ends of the roll.
• If the edge of the roll is bent or soiled, use the Paper Cutting operation of the printer to cut the edge of
the paper manually. (→P.135)
• If the paper is badly creased or bent, cut the edge of the roll with scissors before loading the roll in
the printer, and then cut the edge of the paper manually using the Paper Cutting operation of the
printer. (→P.135)
• To load a roll with a 3-inch paper core, insert the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment on the roll holder and
attach the 3-Inch Paper Core Holder Stopper. (→P.143)
• If you use a roll A1, A2 or larger for Borderless Printing, insert the provided Spacer for Borderless
Printing on the Roll Holder.
Follow the steps 3 and 4 below.
1.
Remove the Holder Stopper from the Roll Holder.
2.
With the Roll Holder sideways and the edge of the roll paper facing forward as shown, insert
the roll in the Roll Holder from the left. Insert the roll rmly until it touches the ange (a) of
the Roll Holder.
Handling Paper 119
Handling rolls
Important
• Always put the Roll Holder sideways when loading rolls. If you accidentally load a roll when the Roll
Holder is upright, it may damage the Roll Holder.
• Set the roll on a table or other at surface so that it does not roll or fall. Rolls are heavy, and dropping
a roll may cause injury.
3.
Insert the Holder Stopper from the left in the Roll Holder as shown, pushing it rmly in until the
ange (a) of the Holder Stopper touches the roll.
Important
• Insert the roll rmly until it touches the Holder Stopper. If it does not touch the stopper, feeding
problems may occur.
120 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Loading Rolls in the Roll Feed Unit
Once a roll is in the Roll Holder, follow these steps to load the roll in the Roll Feed Unit.
1.
Open the Roll Feed Unit Cover.
2.
With the edge of the roll facing up toward you, insert the Roll Holder shaft into the guide grooves
(a) of the Roll Holder Slot on both sides. Make sure that the colors of the Roll Holder shaft ends
(b) and the guide grooves match.
Caution
• Be careful not to pinch your ngers between the guide grooves (a) and the Roll Holder shaft
(b) when loading rolls.
Note
• If it is difcult to load rolls from the front, load them from behind the printer.
At this point, to advance the roll, see “Loading the Roll in the Printer”. (→P.122)
Handling Paper 121
Handling rolls
Loading the Roll in the Printer
Follow these steps to load rolls in the printer.
Note
• Remove any loaded paper that will not be used.
• Rolls: (→P.124)
• Sheets: (→P.157)
• If the Platen is dirty, clean inside the Top Cover. (→P.641)
1.
Open the Roll Feed Unit Cover.
2.
Insert the edge of the roll paper into the Paper Feed Slot (a) and feed it manually until you
hear the paper feed tone.
Important
• Be careful not to soil the printing surface of roll paper as you pull it out. This may affect the printing
quality. We recommend wearing clean cloth gloves when handling rolls to protect the printing surface.
• If the paper is wrinkled or warped, straighten it out before loading it.
• Load paper straight so it is not fed askew.
The printer now starts advancing the paper.
122 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
3.
Close the Roll Feed Unit Cover.
Note
• How the printer operates after the paper is fed varies depending on the setting for automatic
detection of the remaining roll paper, as well as the barcode printed on rolls.
Automatic Detection of the
Remaining Roll Paper
On
Off
Barcodes
Printer Operation After the Paper is Fed
Printed
The type and amount of paper left is
automatically detected based on the barcode
printed on the roll.
There is no need to specify the type and
length of the paper.
Not printed
You must specify the type and length of the
paper. A menu for selection of the paper type
and length is automatically shown on the
Display Screen.
(→P.117)
(→P.118)
Printed
You must specify the type of paper.
(→P.117)
Not printed
• If the edge of the roll is bent or soiled, cut the edge of the paper. (→P.135)
Handling Paper 123
Handling rolls
Removing the Roll from the Printer
Note
• If you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper, always follow these steps to
remove rolls. You will be unable to manage the amount of roll paper left if you remove the roll before
the barcode is printed.
• When a roll has been advanced, do not pull it out by force. This will prevent the paper from being
advanced, and you will be unable to manage the amount of roll paper left.
If you accidentally pull out the paper, hold down the Stop button to enable feeding.
1.
Press the Load/Eject button.
A conrmation message is displayed regarding removal of the roll.
2.
Press the OK button.
The roll can now be removed.
Note
• If you need to cut the roll, select Paper Cutting and cut the roll at the desired position. (→P.135)
• If you have selected Media Menu > Chk Remain.Roll > On in the printer menu and the printed
document has been ejected, a barcode and brief text message are printed on the leading edge of
rolls.
If the document is not cut but kept in the printer, only the text message is printed. This is also the
case when printing on 8-inch rolls or clear lm.
Next, when removing rolls from the Roll Feed Unit, see “Removing Rolls from the Roll Feed
Unit”. (→P.125)
124 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Removing Rolls from the Roll Feed Unit
Remove any rolls in the Roll Feed Unit as follows.
1.
Open the Roll Feed Unit Cover.
2.
Using both hands, rotate the Roll Holder toward the back to rewind the roll.
3.
Remove the Roll Holder from the Roll Holder Slot.
4.
Close the Roll Feed Unit Cover.
Handling Paper 125
Handling rolls
Removing Rolls From the Roll Holder
1.
Remove the Holder Stopper from the Roll Holder.
2.
Remove the roll from the Roll Holder.
Important
• After removal, store the roll in the original bag or box, away from high temperature, humidity, and
direct sunlight. If paper is not stored properly, the printing surface may become scratched, which
may affect the printing quality when you use it again.
Note
• How to remove the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment : (→P.143)
• How to remove the Spacer for Borderless Printing : (→P.143)
126 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper
If paper from a roll becomes jammed, Paper jam. is shown on the Display Screen of the Control Panel.
Remove the jammed paper as follows.
Note
• For instructions on removing a paper jam from a roll if the scrap of paper remains in the Paper Feed
Slot, see “Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot)”. (→P.130)
1.
Open the Roll Feed Unit Cover. Use a store-bought cutter or the like to cut the paper of the
loaded roll.
Caution
• When cutting paper, be careful to avoid scratching the printer.
2.
Press Load/Eject button.
3.
Remove the jammed paper.
• If paper is jammed inside the Top Cover
1. Open the Top Cover and move the Carriage to the side.
Handling Paper 127
Handling rolls
2. Clear any jammed paper from inside the Top Cover.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.
3. Close the Top Cover.
Important
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b).
• If paper from a roll is jammed by the Paper Feed Slot
1. Open the Roll Feed Unit Cover.
2. Remove the jammed paper from the Paper Feed Slot.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer. If paper
is jammed deep in the Paper Feed Slot (→P.129), remove the Roll Feed Unit and clear the
paper jam.
128 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
• If the paper is jammed by the Ejection Guide
Remove the jammed paper from the Output Tray.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.
4.
Press OK.
If paper is jammed deep in the Paper Feed Slot, remove the Roll Feed Unit and clear the paper jam as follows.
1.
2.
Turn off the printer and remove the Roll Feed Unit from the printer. (→P.146)
Remove the jammed paper from the Paper Feed Slot.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.
3.
Install the Roll Feed Unit on the printer again. (→P.147)
Handling Paper 129
Handling rolls
Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot)
Follow these steps to remove any scraps left in the Paper Feed Slot after you clear jammed sheets or
roll paper.
1.
2.
Press the Feeder Selection button to activate the Cut Sheet lamp.
Press the Load/Eject button.
A screen is displayed for paper type selection.
3.
Select POP Board and press the OK button.
A screen is displayed for paper size selection.
4.
Select the desired size and press the OK button.
Instructions for feeding POP Board are shown on the Control Panel, but instead of following
them, follow this procedure to remove the jammed paper.
5.
6.
Open the Top Cover.
Fold an A4 sheet lengthwise four times and insert it through the gap of the Back Cover. Push the
scrap out toward the Platen.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Remove the scrap when it is pushed out onto the Platen.
If any scraps remain inside the Paper Feed Slot, repeat steps 6 and 7.
Close the Top Cover.
Turn the printer off. (→P.27)
130 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Feeding Roll Paper Manually
You can bring the printer ofine by pressing the Online button.
When the printer is ofine and roll paper is selected as the paper source, you can advance or retract the
roll by pressing ▲ or ▼.
Press ▲ to retract the roll manually.
Press ▼ to advance the roll manually.
If you hold down the ▲ or ▼ button for less than a second, the roll paper will move about 1 mm (0.039 in).
If you hold down ▲ or ▼ for more than a second, the paper will move until you release the button. Release
the button when the Display Screen indicates End of paper feed. Cannot feed paper more..
Handling Paper 131
Handling rolls
Detection of the Remaining Roll Paper
If you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper, when the roll is ejected, a barcode with text is
printed on the roll paper that identies the type of paper and amount left. If this function is activated and barcodes
are printed on the roll paper, the type of paper and amount left are automatically detected when you load a
roll. The barcode will be cut off after it has been read.
Note
• If the document is not cut but kept in the printer, only the text message is printed. This is also the
case when printing on 8-inch rolls or clear lm.
Important
• If the barcode on the roll is not detected, enter the type and length of paper on the Control Panel.
Follow these steps to activate detection of the remaining roll paper.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Media Menu, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Chk Remain.Roll, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired setting option, and then press the OK button.
132 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls
When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere, if the Cutter touches printed surfaces that are still
wet, it may damage the paper or cause rough cut edges. Also, ink may be transferred onto the paper surface during
ejection, soiling it. You can prevent problems by adjusting the drying time after printing before the paper is cut.
Windows
1.
Display the printer driver dialog box.
(→P.406)
2.
Select the Main sheet and click C Advanced Settings in A Media Type.
3.
In the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box displayed next, select C Between Pages and D
Between Scans in B Drying Time, and then click OK.
(→P.412)
Handling Paper 133
Handling rolls
Mac OS X
1.
2.
Choose Print in the application menu.
3.
In the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box displayed next, select C Between Pages and D
Select the Main pane and click C Settings in A Media Type.
Between Scans in B Drying Time, and then click OK.
(→P.459)
Note
• By factory default, Drying Time is deactivated ( Off) for all paper types.
• To have the printer wait for ink to dry immediately after printing without releasing paper, set Cutting
Mode to Eject in the printer menu.
(→P.135)
134 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls
How a roll is cut after ejection varies depending on the printer settings.
Cutting Method
Automatic
The roll is automatically cut by the Cutter
Unit following printer driver settings.
Eject
(→P.136)
Menu Settings
Cutting
Mode
Driver Setting
Automatic Auto Cut
Yes
Choose this setting if you prefer not to
have documents dropped immediately after
printing, as when waiting for ink to dry.
To cut the roll using the Cutter Unit, hold
down the Stop button for a second or more.
Eject
Yes
Manual
(→P.137)
Choose this setting when using media that
cannot be cut using the Cutter Unit.
Cut each page from the roll using scissors.
For continuous printing (if you will cut each
page later), in Auto Cut, select Yes, or
select Print Cut Guideline.
(→P.367)
Manual
NoYesPrint
Cut
Guideline
Paper
Cutting
(→P.139)
Choose this option if you want to cut pages Paper
by pressing Cutter Unit buttons for manual Cutting
cutting after printing when the printer driver
is congured to Auto Cut > No or Print Cut
Guideline.
Otherwise choose this option if you want to
cut the roll edge after loading a roll.
Yes
NoPrint
Cut
Guideline
Note
• Automatic and Eject are valid only when you have specied Auto Cut > Yes in the printer driver.
• With Eject, printing does not resume after a series of jobs have been printed continuously until the
roll is cut.
Cut rolls manually in the following cases:
Handling Paper 135
Handling rolls
Eject (waiting for ink to dry after printing)
Important
• When cutting wide printed documents after ejection, support the documents. If the paper drops, printed
documents may be damaged.
• Do not lift the paper when holding printed documents before cutting. If the paper rises, it may affect the
printing quality.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cutting Mode, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Eject, and then press the OK button.
Start printing.
Roll paper is fed to the specied cut position and then automatically stopped.
7.
As you support the printed document to prevent it from dropping, hold down the Stop button
for at least a second to cut the roll.
136 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Manual (when using media that cannot be cut using the Cutter Unit)
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cutting Mode, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual, and then press the OK button.
Start printing.
The printer stops advancing the paper after printing.
7.
Press the Online button.
Roll paper is fed to the specied cut position and then automatically stopped.
Handling Paper 137
Handling rolls
8.
Use scissors to cut the roll paper along the cut line.
9.
Press the Online button.
The roll is rewound, and rewinding stops automatically.
138 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Paper Cutting (to have the roll cut at your specied position)
1.
If the printer stops operating after printing, press the Online button. The printer goes ofine.
2.
Press ▲ or ▼ to feed the roll paper to the position for cutting.
3.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Cutting, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
After the roll paper is cut, it is rewound automatically.
Caution
• If paper would be short when cut at a particular position, the roll may automatically be advanced in
some cases before cutting.
Handling Paper 139
Handling rolls
Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically
If the leading edge of a roll is crooked or warped, it may cause an error message or printing problems. In this
case, set Trim Edge First to Automatic or On on the Control Panel to have the printer cut the leading edge to
make the edge straight after you load a roll.
Trim Edge First offers the following options.
• Automatic
If the left and right side of the leading edge of the roll ((a) and (b)) are uneven by 3 mm (0.12 in) or more
when you load the roll, the edge is cut an amount relative to the slant to ensure a straight edge, and
scraps are removed. The edge is not cut if the unevenness is less than 3 mm.
• Off
The edge is not cut and scraps are not removed. This setting is Off for most types of paper, by default.
For more information, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)
• On
The leading edge is cut off when you load a roll, and scraps are removed. The amount of paper cut
off from the leading edge varies depending on the paper type. For more information, see the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.108)
Note
• If you print on paper that has an irregular width, set Skew Check Lv. to Loose for a higher skew
detection threshold or to Off to disable skew detection. However, if paper is loaded askew when
detection is Off, note that paper jams or Platen soiling may occur.
Follow these steps to change the Trim Edge First setting.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Trim Edge First, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired setting option, and then press the OK button.
This setting takes effect the next time you load a roll.
140 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls
The printer is equipped with a function to reduce cutting dust for media such as Backlit Film that are more likely to
generate debris when cut. This may improve printing quality and help prevent Printhead damage. You can set up
this function to be activated for some types of paper.
When this function is activated, black lines are printed at the leading and trailing edges of documents.
Important
• Do not activate the function to reduce cutting dust for paper that wrinkles easily, such as Plain Paper or
lightweight paper. This may impair cutting and cause paper jams.
• Borderless printing is not available when this function is activated. Deactivate this function before
borderless printing.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select CutDustReduct., and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select On, and then press the OK button.
The function to reduce cutting dust is now activated.
Handling Paper 141
Handling rolls
Roll Holder Set
A set of parts including a Roll Holder, Holder Stopper (for 2- and 3-inch paper cores), 3-Inch Paper Core
Attachment, and Spacer for Borderless Printing (used for both 2- and 3-inch paper cores).
To load a roll with a 3-inch paper core, insert the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment on the Roll Holder and attach
the Holder Stopper for 3-inch paper cores. If you use an A1 (594 mm [23.4 in]) roll or A2 (420 mm [16.5 in])
roll for borderless printing, insert the Spacer for Borderless Printing on the Roll Holder.
• Roll Holder Set RH2-24
• Roll Holder
• Holder Stopper (for 2- and 3-inch paper cores (a) and (b))
• 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment
• Spacer for Borderless Printing
For instructions on installing these parts, see “Attaching Accessories to the Roll Holder”. (→P.143)
142 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Attaching Accessories to the Roll Holder
Mounting the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment
To load a roll with a 3-inch paper core, insert the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment on the Roll Holder.
Align the triangular part (b) of the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment (a) with the triangular groove (c) of the Roll
Holder as shown, and insert the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment into the Roll Holder.
Use the Holder Stopper for 3-inch paper cores.
Removing the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment
Spread the tips (b) of the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment that protrude by the triangular label (a) of the Roll
Holder as shown, and remove the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment.
Handling Paper 143
Handling rolls
Attaching the Spacer for Borderless Printing
If you use an A1 or A2 roll for borderless printing, insert the provided Spacer for Borderless Printing on
the Roll Holder.
Insert the protrusions (b) of the Spacer for Borderless Printing (a) into the holes (c) of the Roll Holder, as
shown.
Removing the Spacer for Borderless Printing
Pull out the Spacer for Borderless Printing from the Roll Holder, as shown.
144 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Feeding Paper from the Roll Feed Unit
The Paper Feed Slot used to feed roll paper is the same as the Paper Feed Slot used for the Top Paper Feed
Slot, so both methods of feeding paper cannot be used at the same time.
Thus, if a roll has been advanced when you wish to print from the Top Paper Feed Slot or Front Paper Feed
Slot, change the paper source.
1.
2.
Select sheets as the paper source. (→P.116)
After Remove roll? is displayed, press the OK button.
The roll is rewound automatically.
Similarly, if a sheet is in the Top Paper Feed Slot or Front Paper Feed Slot when you wish to print on a
roll, you will need to remove the sheet from the slot and reinsert the roll paper (which has been rewound)
in the Paper Feed Slot.
1.
2.
Select the roll as the paper source. (→P.116)
After Eject sheet? is displayed, press the OK button.
The sheet is ejected automatically.
Handling Paper 145
Handling rolls
Removing the Roll Feed Unit
Important
• Always make sure the printer is off before removing the Roll Feed Unit.
1.
2.
Remove any rolls in the Roll Feed Unit. (→P.125)
Use a coin or screwdriver to loosen the screws (a) on both sides of the back of the Roll Feed Unit
and remove the unit from the printer.
3.
Hold the Roll Feed Unit by the Carrying Handles (a) as you remove the Roll Feed Unit from
the printer.
146 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Installing the Roll Feed Unit
Important
• Always make sure the printer is off before attaching the Roll Feed Unit.
1.
Holding the Roll Feed Unit by the Carrying Handles (a), insert the two pins of the Roll Feed Unit
(b) into the each hole on the back of the printer (c).
2.
Use a coin or screwdriver to tighten the two screws on the back of the Roll Feed Unit (a)
to secure it to the printer.
Handling Paper 147
Handling sheets
Handling sheets
Selecting the Paper Source
When advancing paper, press the Feeder Selection button and select the source.
You can determine the selected source by checking which lamp is lit-either the Roll Media lamp (a) or the
Cut Sheet lamp (b).
• Roll Media lamp : Selected when printing on Roll Media.
• Cut Sheet lamp : Selected when printing on Sheets from the Top Paper Feed Slot or Front Paper
Feed Slot.
Note
• If any paper is loaded that will not be used, a message is shown on the Display Screen (either Remove
roll? or Eject sheet? ) when you press the Feeder Selection button.
To remove the paper, press the OK button. (→P.145)
• You cannot switch the paper source in the following situations:
• When the Message lamp is ashing
Check the message on the Display Screen and take action as necessary. (→P.684)
• When the Data lamp is ashing
Select the paper source after printing is nished.
• When a printer menu operation is in progress
Wait until the operation is nished before selecting the paper source.
• When in the process of loading paper
Finish loading the paper before selecting the paper source.
• When in the process of replacing ink tanks
Finish replacing the Ink Tank before selecting the paper source.
• When the Top Cover is open
Close the Top Cover before selecting the paper source.
148 Handling Paper
Handling sheets
Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet)
When changing the type of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the type of paper as follows.
Note
• After you press the Feeder Selection button to illuminate the Cut Sheet lamp, press the Load/Eject
button to display a screen for selection of the paper type.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button to display a screen for selection
of the paper size. (→P.150)
• If you have sent the print job from a computer beforehand, the screen for paper type and size selection
is not displayed. Printing will start after the paper is advanced.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Media Menu, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual PaperType, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.
Note
• Select POP Board when loading heavyweight paper.
• For details on paper types, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108) Plain Paper is selected by
factory default.
• Be sure to select the correct paper type. If this setting does not match the loaded paper, it may
cause feed errors and affect the printing quality.
5.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
Handling Paper 149
Handling sheets
Selecting the Paper Size (Sheet)
To change the paper size after paper has been advanced, select the paper size as follows.
Note
• After you press the Feeder Selection button to illuminate the Cut Sheet lamp, press the Load/Eject
button to display a screen for selection of the paper type automatically.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button to display a screen for selection
of the paper size. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the paper size, and then press the OK button. The printer
is now ready to advance the paper.
• If you have sent the print job from a computer beforehand, the screen for paper type and size selection
is not displayed. Printing will start after the paper is advanced.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Media Menu, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual PaperSize, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the size of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.
Note
• For details on paper sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.113)
5.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
150 Handling Paper
Handling sheets
Loading Sheets Manually
When using the tray, load the paper in the Top Paper Feed Slot. (→P.151) However, if you have specied
POP Board, insert the sheet in the Front Paper Feed Slot. (→P.153)
Loading paper in the Top Paper Feed Slot
Note
• You can load only one sheet in the Top Paper Feed Slot. Do not load more than one sheet at a time.
This may cause paper jams.
•
•
•
•
Store unused paper in the original package, away from high temperature, humidity, and direct sunlight.
Paper that is wrinkled or warped may jam. If necessary, straighten the paper and reload it.
Load the paper straight. Loading paper askew will cause an error.
Before feeding paper or printing, make sure the sheet is at against the Paper Tray Cover . The sheet
may jam if it curls before feeding or printing and the trailing edge drops toward the front.
• If a roll is loaded, rewind the roll before this procedure. (→P.145)
1.
If you send a print job specifying a paper other than POP Board from a computer beforehand,
the type and size of paper are shown on the Display Screen. Press the Load/Eject button.
Note
• If you will load paper before sending a print job, press the Load/Eject button. After a menu for
selection of the type of paper is shown on the Display Screen, press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of
paper, and then press the OK button. Next, a menu for selection of the paper size is shown on the
Display Screen. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the size of paper, and then press the OK button.
2.
Open the Paper Tray Cover (a), and then open the Tray Extension (b).
3.
Slide the Width Guide (a) to align it with the mark for the size of paper you will load.
Handling Paper 151
Handling sheets
4.
Load the paper in the Top Paper Feed Slot with the printing side face-up.
Insert the paper until its edge touches the far end of the tray lightly.
Caution
• If you load A2 or larger in the printer, the paper goes down on the back of the printer under its own
weight. Therefore, place your hands on the paper till the paper is fed.
5.
Move the Width Guide (a) to match the size of paper loaded.
Set the Width Guide against the edge of the paper to prevent the paper from becoming crooked
or wrinkled.
6.
Press the OK button to start feeding the paper.
After the paper is advanced and the printer goes online, printing starts automatically.
If no print job was received beforehand, the printer enters Standby mode.
152 Handling Paper
Handling sheets
Loading heavyweight paper in the Front Paper Feed Slot
Important
• Before loading heavyweight paper, change the media type setting to POP Board. After POP Board is
selected as the type of paper, you can select Front Paper Feed Slot.
• Always load a POP Board in the Front Paper Feed Slot. Loading it another way may damage the
printer or cause malfunction.
Note
•
•
•
•
•
1.
You can load only one sheet of paper at a time.
Store unused paper in the original package, away from high temperature, humidity, and direct sunlight.
If the paper is warped, straighten it before loading it.
Load the paper straight. Loading paper askew will cause an error.
After loading the paper, you cannot move it laterally to reposition it. Be sure to load the paper straight.
If you send a print job specifying POP Board from a computer beforehand, the type and size of
paper are shown on the Display Screen. Press the Load/Eject button.
Note
• If you will load heavyweight paper before sending a print job, press the Load/Eject button. After a
menu for selection of the type of paper is shown on the Display Screen, press ▲ or ▼ to select POP
Board, and then press the OK button. Next, a menu for selection of the paper size is shown on the
Display Screen. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the size of paper, and then press the OK button.
2.
If Leave 70cm (28") space behind printer. is displayed, check the space behind the printer, lift
the four Front Tray Guides on the Ejection Guide, and then press the OK button.
Note
• Sufcient space behind the printer is required when loading paper in the Front Paper Feed Slot. For
details on the space required for installation, see “Specications”. (→P.83)
Handling Paper 153
Handling sheets
3.
Open Upper Cover is displayed. At this point, open the Top Cover.
4.
With the sheet printing-side up, place the leading edge on the Front Tray Guides and keep it at
as you insert it into the Front Paper Feed Slot.
Caution
• When loading paper in the Front Paper Feed Slot, keep it at as you insert it into the slot. If you
do not, the printing surface may be damaged.
154 Handling Paper
Handling sheets
5.
As you look inside the Top Cover, insert the leading edge of the paper between the Platen and
Paper Retainer (a), keeping it parallel to the Paper Retainer (a), and align the paper with the
Paper Alignment Line (b) of the Front Tray Guides.
Important
• Never touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b). This may stain your hands and damage
the printer.
Handling Paper 155
Handling sheets
6.
Close top cover. is displayed. At this point, close the Top Cover and press the OK button.
The paper is held between the Platen and Back Cover as it is fed.
After the paper is advanced and the printer goes online, printing starts automatically.
If no print job has been received from the computer beforehand, the printer enters Standby mode.
7.
After printing, the printer will temporarily stop advancing the paper while the trailing edge is still
in the rollers to prevent the sheet from dropping. Press the Load/Eject button to release the
sheet. After pulling it straight out, press the OK button. (→P.158)
8.
Lift the four Front Tray Guides on the Ejection Guide to store them toward the front, and then
press the OK button.
156 Handling Paper
Handling sheets
Removing Sheets from the Top Paper Feed Slot
1.
Press the Load/Eject button.
A conrmation message is displayed regarding removal of the sheet.
Note
• Paper cannot be ejected by using the Load/Eject button when print jobs are in progress or during
the ink drying period. Before ejecting paper, hold down the Stop button for a second or more to
cancel printing, print job processing, or ink drying.
2.
Press the OK button.
The paper is ejected from the front of the printer.
Caution
• If the trailing edge of the sheet is not ejected, pull the sheet toward the front to remove it, keeping it
level. If you do not remove the sheet by pulling it straight forward and keeping it level, the printed
surface may become scratched.
Handling Paper 157
Handling sheets
Removing Heavyweight Paper from the Front Paper Feed
Slot
If you are printing heavyweight paper from the Front Paper Feed Slot, the printer will stop advancing the paper while
the trailing edge is still in the rollers to prevent the sheet from dropping. In this case, remove the paper as follows.
1.
Press the Load/Eject button.
Note
• If you load paper from the Front Paper Feed Slot but press the Load/Eject button without printing,
the printer will eject the paper and stop advancing it momentarily while the trailing edge is still in
the rollers to prevent the sheet from dropping. Press the Load/Eject button again when you are
ready to remove the paper.
2.
Remove the sheet by pulling it forward, keeping it at.
Caution
• If you do not remove POP Board by pulling it straight forward and keeping it at, the printed surface
may become scratched.
3.
Press the OK button.
Caution
• Always remove the sheet before pressing the OK button. If you do not remove the sheet before step 3,
the sheet may go back inside the printer, leaving roller marks across the trailing edge of the sheet.
158 Handling Paper
Handling sheets
Clearing Jammed Paper from the Tray
If a sheet loaded manually becomes jammed, Paper jam. is shown on the Display Screen of the Control
Panel. Remove the jammed paper as follows.
1.
Press the Load/Eject button.
2.
Remove the jammed paper.
• If paper is jammed inside the Top Cover
1. Open the Top Cover and move the Carriage to the side manually.
2. Clear any jammed paper from inside the Top Cover.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.
3. Close the Top Cover.
Handling Paper 159
Handling sheets
Important
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b). This may stain your hands and damage
the printer.
• If paper is jammed by the Paper Feed Slot of the Top Paper Feed Slot
Remove the jammed paper from the Paper Feed Slot.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer. If paper is
jammed deep in the Paper Feed Slot (→P.161), remove the Roll Feed Unit and clear the paper jam.
160 Handling Paper
Handling sheets
• If the paper is jammed by the Ejection Guide
Remove the jammed paper from the Output Tray.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.
• If paper is jammed in the back of the printer
Remove the jammed paper from the back.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.
3.
Press the OK button.
If paper is jammed deep in the Paper Feed Slot, remove the Roll Feed Unit and clear the paper jam as follows.
1.
Turn off the printer and remove the Roll Feed Unit from the printer.
(→P.146)
2.
Remove the jammed paper from the Paper Feed Slot.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.
3.
Install the Roll Feed Unit on the printer again.
(→P.147)
Handling Paper 161
Output Stacker
Output Stacker
Output Stacker Precautions
When you print on rolls, you can use the Output Stacker to hold ejected printouts.
When you use the Output Stacker (b), push down Basket Rod #1 fully toward the front, keeping it even on the
left and right so that Basket Rod #2 (a) is not slanted.
The Output Stacker can accommodate one sheet. Remove each sheet before printing if you are printing
a series of documents.
Use the Output Stacker in the normal position (a). However, for some types of media, you can use the
stacker in the extended position (b). This position enables printed documents to be removed more easily.
For information on types of paper you can use with the stacker in the extended position, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.108)
162 Handling Paper
Output Stacker
Using the Output Stacker
The Output Stacker can be held at two positions, as shown.
• When storing printed documents on the Output Stacker
Use position (1).
• When the Output Stacker is not used
Use position (2).
Important
• When storing printed documents on the Output Stacker, always use it in position (1). If you do not, printed
documents may not be dropped into the Output Stacker, and the printed surface may become soiled.
• The Output Stacker can hold one sheet. When printing multiple pages, remove each sheet after it
is printed.
Handling Paper 163
Output Stacker
Use the Output Stacker in the normal position (a).
However, for some types of media, you can use the stacker in the position for easy removal (b). To switch
the stacker to the position for easy removal, move the Support Rod to the position of (b). This position
enables printed documents to be removed more easily.
For information on the position for easy removal, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)
164 Handling Paper
Printing Photos and Images
Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing Photos and Images
Printing Photos and Images
Printing is easy when you simply choose the print target.
Easy Settings
Simply choose the printing application in the list for optimal printing results.
Print Target
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
Print targets for photos and images
Print Target
Description
Highest Quality
Setting optimized for printing at the highest level
of quality.
Draft
Setting optimized for high-speed draft printing.
Photo (Photo Studio)
For printing with an effect similar to that
produced by photo studios. In subdued, dark
photos, images of people and dark scenes are
printed attractively.
Photo (Standard)
Setting optimized for printing photographic
images from digital cameras.
Photo (Adobe RGB)
Setting optimized for printing in colors matching
those of images created using the Adobe RGB
color space.
Photo (Monochrome)
Setting optimized for printing monochrome
photos in the neutral black image tone of
conventional lm photographs.
Poster (Photos)
Suitable for printing posters composed mainly
of photographs.
Working With Various Print Jobs 165
Printing Photos and Images
Print Target
Description
Poster (Text, Illustrations)
Setting optimized for printing vivid, eye-catching
store posters combining images and text.
Scanned Image
Setting optimized for printing scanned images
with accurate color reproduction to match the
original images.
Caution
• Depending on the Media Type setting, some Print Target options may not be available.
Note
• You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings.
• You can also ne-tune these values as needed. (Advanced Settings)
For details on Advanced Settings, see “Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors
for Printing”. (→P.216)
• For instructions on printing photos and images, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
• Printing Photos and Images (Windows) (→P.167)
• Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X) (→P.169)
166 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing Photos and Images
Printing Photos and Images (Windows)
This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Photo image from a digital camera
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Glossy Photo Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Photo Paper.
In the A Media Type, choose the type of paper used for printing, such as Glossy Paper, Coated
Paper, and so on. Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.
Note
• The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel) is
updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you
change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. (See the Media Conguration Tool
Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).)
5.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (Standard) or Photo (Photo
Studio) in the E Print Target list.
Note
• For information on settings optimized for printing photos and images, see “Printing Photos and
Images”. (→P.165)
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View Settings.
Working With Various Print Jobs 167
Printing Photos and Images
6.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
7.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click 10"x12".
8.
9.
Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 10-in.
Roll (254.0mm), and then click OK.
10.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P.394)
11.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
168 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing Photos and Images
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Photo image from a digital camera
Page Size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper Type: Glossy Photo Paper
Roll paper Width: 10 inches (254 mm)
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12".
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Working With Various Print Jobs 169
Printing Photos and Images
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy
Photo Paper.
Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.
Note
• The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel) is
updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you
change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. See the Media Conguration Tool
Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).
8.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (Standard) or Photo (Photo
Studio) in the E Print Target list.
Note
• For information on settings optimized for printing photos and images, see “Printing Photos and
Images”. (→P.165)
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View set..
9.
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.
170 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing Photos and Images
11.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
12.
Make sure C Page Size on the Page Setup pane shows the original size as specied in C
Paper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, 10"x12".
13.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.447)
14.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
Working With Various Print Jobs 171
Printing Photos and Images
Printing Photos in Monochrome
The following settings are available for monochrome printing.
Main
Easy
Settings
Print
Target
Advanced Color
Settings Mode
172 Working With Various Print Jobs
Photo
(Monochrome)
A mode optimized for printing monochrome images
with maximum expressiveness through simple
operations. Choosing Photo (Monochrome) in Easy
Settings applies image processing to keep color ink
use to an absolute minimum, suppressing color shift
and achieving consistent gray balance.
• Photo (Monochrome) is not available for all types
of paper.
• Printing that matches the pure neutral black of
conventional photos (silver-halide prints) is possible.
Printing Photos in Monochrome (Windows) (→P.173)
Printing Photos in Monochrome (Mac OS X) (→P.175)
Monochrome
(Photo)
A mode for printing monochrome images with
maximum expressiveness by specifying detailed
settings. In these settings, you can specify to apply
image processing to keep color ink use to an absolute
minimum, suppress color shift, and achieve consistent
gray balance. You can also ne-tune the color balance
by selecting “Warm Black,” “Cool Black”, and so on.
• Even more detailed adjustment is possible on the
Gray Adjustment sheet.
• Monochrome (Photo) is not available for all types
of paper.
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing
Photos (Windows) (→P.178)
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing
Photos (Mac OS X) (→P.180)
Monochrome
Deactivates color printing so that images are printed in
monochrome, with continuous-tone color data printed
using gray midtones. Use this mode to print ofce
documents or graphics in monochrome, or if the paper
is not compatible with the Monochrome (Photo)
setting.
• Even more detailed adjustment is possible on the
Color Adjustment sheet.
• If the paper is not compatible with the Monochrome
(Photo) setting, choose Monochrome.
• Because color ink is used to produce gray
continuous-tone images, the gray may appear to
have a tinge of color.
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing
Photos (Windows) (→P.178)
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing
Photos (Mac OS X) (→P.180)
Printing Photos and Images
Printing Photos in Monochrome (Windows)
This topic describes how to print photos in monochrome based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Original: Photo image from a digital camera
Page size: 10×12 inches
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Glossy Photo Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Photo Paper.
In the A Media Type setting, choose the type of paper for printing, such as Glossy Paper,
Coated Paper, and so on. Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.
Note
• The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel) is
updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you
change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. (See the Media Conguration Tool
Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).)
Working With Various Print Jobs 173
Printing Photos and Images
5.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (Monochrome) in the E Print
Target list.
Caution
• Photo (Monochrome) may not be available for all types of paper.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View Settings.
6.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
7.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click 10"x12".
8.
9.
Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 10-in.
Roll (254.0mm), and then click OK.
10.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P.394)
11.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
174 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing Photos and Images
Printing Photos in Monochrome (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print photos in monochrome based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Original: Photo image from a digital camera
Page size: 10×12 inches
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Glossy Photo Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the print target in the B Format for list.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12".
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
In the source application menu, choose Print.
Access the Main pane.
Working With Various Print Jobs 175
Printing Photos and Images
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy
Photo Paper.
In the A Media Type setting, choose the type of paper for printing, such as Glossy Paper,
Coated Paper, and so on. Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.
Note
• The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel) is
updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you
change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. (See the Media Conguration Tool
Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).)
8.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (Monochrome) in the E Print
Target list.
Caution
• Photo (Monochrome) may not be available for all types of paper.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View set..
9.
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.
176 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing Photos and Images
11.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
12.
Make sure C Page Size on the Page Setup pane shows the original size as specied in C
Paper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, 10"x12".
13.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.447)
14.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
Working With Various Print Jobs 177
Printing Photos and Images
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Photos
(Windows)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to
ne-tune monochrome settings before printing.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
6.
Click Monochrome (Photo) in the G Color Mode list.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
Note
• Monochrome (Photo) may not be available for all types of paper.
178 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing Photos and Images
7.
Click H Color Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.
8.
9.
10.
On the Gray Adjustment sheet, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.
11.
12.
Conrm the settings of A Page Size, L Paper Source, and so on.
Close the Color Settings dialog box.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
Working With Various Print Jobs 179
Printing Photos and Images
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Photos
(Mac OS X)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to
ne-tune monochrome settings before printing.
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the print target in the B Format for list.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
In the source application menu, choose Print.
Access the Main pane.
180 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing Photos and Images
8.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
9.
Click Monochrome (Photo) in the H Color Mode list.
Note
• Monochrome (Photo) may not be available for all types of paper.
10.
Click I Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.
11.
12.
On the Gray Adjustment pane, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.
Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.
Working With Various Print Jobs 181
Printing Photos and Images
13.
Access the Page Setup pane.
14.
15.
Conrm the settings of A Paper Source and C Page Size.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
182 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing Photos and Images
Printing from Photoshop
You can print images in the Adobe RGB color space that you have created in Photoshop, the Adobe Systems
photo retouching application. Using the dedicated Photoshop printer driver plug-in (provided with the printer)
makes it easy to print Adobe RGB images more attractively.
• Using the Plug-in to Print (→P.183)
• Using the Printer Driver to Print (→P.183)
Using the Plug-in to Print
The imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop is a dedicated plug-in provided with the printer that you can
load in Photoshop and customize for your printing needs. By using the plug-in, you can print while preserving
the 16-bit RGB data from Photoshop without losing the exceptional color gradations of original image. Some
of the settings and customizations available in the plug-in are as follows.
• Automatic detection of the color space (sRGB or Adobe RGB) for automatic selection of the optimal
prole. This feature eliminates the need to complete intricate settings when printing Adobe RGB images.
• Advanced gray adjustment, including adjustment of tone curves, in addition to an array of standard
adjustments for color balance, brightness, contrast, highlight, and shadow.
• Fine-tune color tones in Photoshop while viewing a preview that accurately reproduces printing results.
• With print log management, you can save and load setting parameters from past print jobs.
Note
• imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop for Windows and Macintosh are provided with the printer.
For instructions and details on which versions of Photoshop are compatible with the imagePROGRAF Print
Plug-In for Photoshop, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Print Plug-In (Windows)
• Print Plug-In (Macintosh)
Using the Printer Driver to Print
The printer driver offers the following settings and adjustments.
• Choose the standard sRBG color space or Adobe RGB as desired.
• Adjust the color balance, brightness, contrast, saturation, and gray levels.
For instructions on using the printer driver to print Adobe RGB images created in Photoshop, refer to the
following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Printing Adobe RGB Images (Windows) (→P.184)
• Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X) (→P.187)
Working With Various Print Jobs 183
Printing Photos and Images
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Windows)
This topic describes how to print Adobe RGB images based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Adobe RGB image created in Photoshop
Page Size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Glossy Photo Paper
Roll Paper Width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
Important
• In Photoshop, select no color-matching.
• In the printer driver settings, select Driver Matching Mode and choose Adobe RGB in Color Space.
1.
In Photoshop, create an image in the Adobe RGB color space.
Note
• The following procedures are based on the example of Photoshop CS2.
• For instructions on creating Adobe RGB images, refer to the Photoshop documentation.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Choose Print with Preview from the File menu to display the Print dialog box.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy
Make sure the setting mode is Color Management.
In the Color Handling list in Options, click No Color Management.
Click Print to display the Print dialog box.
Select the printer and click Properties to display the printer driver dialog box.
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Photo Paper.
184 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing Photos and Images
9.
10.
11.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
Click Image in the E Print Priority list.
Select the print quality in the F Print Quality list.
Note
• Options displayed in the F Print Quality list vary depending on the paper type.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Click Color in the G Color Mode list.
Click H Color Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Click the Matching tab to display the Matching sheet.
In Matching Mode, click Driver Matching Mode.
In Color Space, click Adobe RGB.
Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Working With Various Print Jobs 185
Printing Photos and Images
19.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the source application.
In this case, click 10"x12".
20.
21.
Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 10-in. Roll
(254.0mm), and then click OK.
22.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
186 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing Photos and Images
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print Adobe RGB images based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Adobe RGB image created in Photoshop
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Glossy Photo Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
Important
• In Photoshop, select no color-matching.
• In the printer driver settings, select Driver Matching Mode and choose Adobe RGB in Color Space.
1.
In Photoshop, create an image in the Adobe RGB color space.
Note
• The following procedures are based on the example of Photoshop CS2.
• For instructions on creating Adobe RGB images, refer to the Photoshop documentation.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Choose Print with Preview from the Photoshop menu to display the Print dialog box.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy
Make sure the setting mode is Color Management.
In the Color Handling list in Options, click No Color Management.
Click Print.
Access the Main pane.
Photo Paper.
Working With Various Print Jobs 187
Printing Photos and Images
8.
9.
10.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
Click Image in the E Print Priority list.
Select the print quality in the F Print Quality list.
Note
• Options displayed in the F Print Quality list vary depending on the type of paper.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Click Color in the H Color Mode list.
Click I Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Click Matching to display the Matching pane.
In Matching Mode, click Driver Matching Mode.
In Color Space, click Adobe RGB.
Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.
Access the Page Setup pane.
188 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing Photos and Images
18.
19.
Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll paper is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-here,
10-in. Roll (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
20.
Make sure C Page Size in the Page Setup pane matches the size of the original as specied in
Photoshop-in this case, 10"x12".
21.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
Working With Various Print Jobs 189
Printing CAD Drawings
Printing CAD Drawings
Printing CAD Drawings
Using this printer, you can print ne lines and text clearly and sharply. It’s easy to produce highly precise
drawings from CAD applications.
For instructions on CAD printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating
system.
• Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows) (→P.191)
• Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X) (→P.193)
Printing Line Drawings and Text
Printing is easy when you simply choose the type of original to print.
Easy Settings
Simply choose the printing application in the list for optimal printing results.
Print Target
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
Print targets for line drawings and text
Print Target
Description
Poster (Notice Announcement)
Settings optimized for printing announcements
such as wall newspapers and other notices with
a large amount of text.
3D CAD, GIS
Settings optimized for printing 3D CAD drawings,
perspective drawings, and maps, including GIS
maps.
CAD (Line Drawing)
Settings optimized to print intricate lines in CAD
drawings clearly.
Note
• You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings.
• You can also ne-tune these values as needed. (Advanced Settings)
For details on Advanced Settings, see “Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors
for Printing”. (→P.216)
For instructions on printing line drawings and text, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
• Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows) (→P.191)
• Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X) (→P.193)
190 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing CAD Drawings
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows)
This topic describes how to print line drawings based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: CAD drawing
Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Line Drawing) in the E Print
Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View Settings.
6.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Working With Various Print Jobs 191
Printing CAD Drawings
7.
In A Page Size, click the size of the original as specied in the application software. In this
case, click ISO A3.
8.
9.
Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm).
10.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P.394)
11.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
192 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing CAD Drawings
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print line drawings based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: CAD drawing
Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A3.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Line Drawing) in the E Print
Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View set..
Working With Various Print Jobs 193
Printing CAD Drawings
9.
10.
11.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
194 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing CAD Drawings
12.
Make sure C Page Size on the Page Setup pane shows the original size as specied in C
Paper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A3.
13.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.447)
14.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
Working With Various Print Jobs 195
Printing Ofce Documents
Printing Ofce Documents
Printing Ofce Documents
Printing is easy when you simply choose the type of original to print.
Easy Settings
Simply choose the printing application in the list for optimal printing results.
Print Target
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
Print targets for ofce documents
Print Target
Ofce Document
Description
Settings optimized for clear printing of ofce
documents such as handouts.
Note
• You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings.
• You can also ne-tune these values as needed. (Advanced Settings)
For details on Advanced Settings, see “Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors
for Printing”. (→P.216)
For instructions on printing ofce documents, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer
and operating system.
• Printing Ofce Documents (Windows) (→P.197)
• Printing Ofce Documents (Mac OS X) (→P.199)
196 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing Ofce Documents
Printing Ofce Documents (Windows)
This topic describes how to print ofce documents based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Ofce document created using word-processing software or spreadsheet programs
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Sheets
Paper type: Plain Paper
Paper size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Ofce Document in the E Print
Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View Settings.
Working With Various Print Jobs 197
Printing Ofce Documents
6.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setupsheet.
7.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
8.
9.
Click Manual in the L Paper Source list.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P.394)
10.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Caution
• Depending on the Media Type setting, some Print Target options may not be available.
Note
• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
198 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing Ofce Documents
Printing Ofce Documents (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print ofce documents based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Ofce document created using word-processing or spreadsheet programs
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Sheets
Paper type: Plain Paper
Paper size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Ofce Document in the E Print
Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View set..
Working With Various Print Jobs 199
Printing Ofce Documents
9.
10.
11.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Sheets in the A Paper Source list.
Make sure C Page Size shows the original size as specied in C Paper Size in the Page
Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
12.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.447)
13.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
200 Working With Various Print Jobs
Using the Printer With a Color imageRUNNER
Using the Printer With a Color imageRUNNER
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color
imageRUNNER
Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.
For instructions on printing enlargements of scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER, refer to the
following topic.
• Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Windows) (→P.201)
• Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X) (→P.204)
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color
imageRUNNER (Windows)
Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.
Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed
automatically after enlargement according to printing conditions you specify for that folder.
This processing sequence is called the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy function.
To use Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, rst complete these settings in the following order.
1. Register a hot folder on your computer.
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER
and complete the settings for enlargement copy.
2. Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder.
After these settings are complete, you can print enlarged copies of scanned originals from the Color
imageRUNNER.
Working With Various Print Jobs 201
Using the Printer With a Color imageRUNNER
Registering a hot folder on your computer
Folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy) are called hot folders.
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER. You can
specify printing conditions (such as the image quality and paper size), based on which originals transferred to
the hot folder will be printed. Follow these steps to register and modify hot folders.
1.
2.
Display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.406)
3.
Click B Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy to start the Color imageRUNNER
Click the Utility tab to display the Utility sheet.
Enlargement Copy utility.
4.
Use the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility to register or modify hot folders.
For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help le for the Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility.
Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder. It is easy to send scanned
originals to the hot folder if you assign the scanning settings and destination to a Favorites button on the
Color imageRUNNER.
For instructions on assigning scanning settings and destinations to a Favorites button, refer to the setting
manual, displayed by clicking Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual button of Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility, or refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.
202 Working With Various Print Jobs
Using the Printer With a Color imageRUNNER
Scanning the original and print an enlargement
Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printing on the printer.
For detailed instructions, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Load the original on the platen glass or document feeder of the Color imageRUNNER.
Press Send to display the screen for transmission.
Press Favorites, and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder.
Press Start on the control panel. If you scan originals on the platen glass, after scanning all
originals, press Done on the touch-panel display.
Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the
conditions you specied for the folder.
Note
• For details on Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, refer to Color imageRUNNER Enlargement
Copy .
Working With Various Print Jobs 203
Using the Printer With a Color imageRUNNER
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color
imageRUNNER (Mac OS X)
Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.
Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed
automatically enlarged according to printing conditions you specify for that folder.
This processing sequence is called the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy function.
To use Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, rst complete these settings in the following order.
1. Register a hot folder on your computer.
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER
and complete the settings for enlargement copy.
2. Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder.
After these settings are complete, you can print enlarged copies of scanned originals from the Color
imageRUNNER.
Registering a hot folder on your computer
Folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy) are called hot folders.
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER. You can
specify printing conditions (such as the image quality and paper size), based on which originals transferred to
the hot folder will be printed. Follow these steps to register and modify hot folders.
1.
To display the GARO ExtraKit dialog box, either double-click the GARO ExtraKit icon after
navigating to Applications - Canon Utilities - imagePROGRAF, or click C Set on the Utility
pane.
2.
In Enlarged Copy Settings, click Add or Edit and either create or modify the hot folder.
For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help le for the GARO
ExtraKit utility.
204 Working With Various Print Jobs
Using the Printer With a Color imageRUNNER
Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder. It is easy to send scanned
originals to the hot folder if you assign the scanning settings and destination to a Favorites button on the
Color imageRUNNER.
For instructions on assigning scanning and sending settings to the Favorites button, refer to the Color
imageRUNNER manual.
Scanning the original and print an enlargement
Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printing on the printer.
For detailed instructions, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Load the original on the platen glass or document feeder of the Color imageRUNNER.
Press Send to display the screen for transmission.
Press Favorites, and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder.
Press Start on the control panel. If you scan originals on the platen glass, after scanning all
originals, press Done on the touch-panel display.
Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the
conditions you specied for the folder.
Note
• For details on Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, refer to Color imageRUNNER Enlargement
Copy .
Working With Various Print Jobs 205
Adjusting Images
Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver
Color settings specied in the application for your documents are essentially given priority over other settings
for each print job, but further color adjustment is possible in the printer driver.
Color Mode
Choose how the printer driver processes color, as desired.
The available options vary depending on the color mode.
Description
Color Mode
Color
Print in color.
Color Adjustment
You can adjust the color balance and
color-matching method.
Monochrome (Photo) Grayscale printing optimized for
monochrome photos.
You can adjust the color balance in ways
tailored to monochrome photos.
Monochrome
You can adjust the color balance.
Print in grayscale.
Color Adjustment
You can adjust colors separately for images, graphics, and text documents.
Adjustment Item
Cyan
Description
Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow.
Magenta
Yellow
Brightness
Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest
portions intact.
Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other.
For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the contrast.
Saturation
Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from subdued to vivid.
Gray Tone
Adjustment
Adjust the grayscale, in a range from cool, blue tones to warm, red tones.
206 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
Matching
You can choose the color-matching mode and method.
By adjusting the color-matching mode and method, you can make printed colors match the colors of
on-screen images more closely.
Matching Mode
Description
Notes
Driver Matching
Mode (Kyuanos)
Color adjustment based on the original
color prole of the printer driver
This is the default color-matching method.
Normally, use Driver Matching Mode.
ICC Matching Mode
Color adjustment based on ICC color
proles (an international standard) using
the printer driver
You can select the printer prole in the
Printer Prole Settings list.
Driver ICM Mode
Color adjustment based on the standard Available when using Windows 2000,
Windows ICM function. The printer driver Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, or
adjusts the colors.
Windows Vista
Host ICM Mode
Color adjustment based on the standard
Windows ICM function. Windows adjusts
the colors.
ColorSync
Color adjustment based on the standard
Mac OS ColorSync function. Mac OS
adjusts the colors.
Available when using the Mac OS
Off (No Correction)
No color-matching
Choose this option for color-matching by
the software application or with your own
color prole, when you want to disable
color-matching by the printer driver.
Enhanced Printing Options 207
Adjusting Images
Matching Method
Description
Auto
Color-matching optimized for images,
graphics, or text
Perceptual
Color-matching optimized for photos.
Print images with smooth gradations and
colors closer to those as displayed on
the screen.
Perceptual (People,
Dark Areas)
Color matching optimized for printing
skin tone and dark areas attractively
in subdued, dark photos. For printing
indoor shots of people or evening scenes
attractively.
Colorimetric
Color-matching with adjustment to
remove color from white area. Without
white adjustment, colors are added to
white area.
Colorimetric (No
Wht-pnt Corr)
Color-matching without white adjustment
to reect the prole of original data.
Without white adjustment, colors are
added to white area.
Saturation
Color-matching optimized for graphics.
This option emphasizes color saturation.
Monitor Matching
Suitable for optimized printing to match
the appearance on the monitor.
Reproduces colors as displayed on
calibrated sRGB monitors.
208 Enhanced Printing Options
Notes
The available options and their display
order varies depending on your selection
in Color-Matching Mode, as well as the
operating system.
Adjusting Images
Gray Tone Adjustment
The following settings can be adjusted if “Monochrome (Photo)” is selected in Color Mode.
Gray Adjustment
Description
Items
Color Balance
Adjust the gray tone to suit the images of monochrome photos. Choose cool black
(tinged with blue), pure black (neutral), warm black (tinged with red), and so on.
Select the color tone in the color region or from the list.
Brightness
Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest
portions intact.
Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as
desired.
For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the contrast.
Highlight
Adjust levels of image highlight areas.
Shadow
Adjust levels of image shadow areas.
Note
• Be sure to calibrate your monitor colors correctly if you adjust the colors for printing. If monitor colors
are not calibrated correctly, you may not obtain the desired printing results. For instructions on monitor
calibration, refer to the documentation for your monitor and operating system.
For instructions on color adjustment, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and
operating system.
• Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows) (→P.210)
• Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X) (→P.213)
Enhanced Printing Options 209
Adjusting Images
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how
to ne-tune the color tone of photos before printing.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
6.
Click Color in the G Color Mode list.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
210 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
7.
Click H Color Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.
8.
On the Color Adjustment sheet, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.
Adjustment Item
C Cyan
D Magenta
Description
Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan,
Magenta, and Yellow.
E Yellow
9.
F Brightness
Adjust the brightness of printed images while
keeping the darkest and lightest portions intact.
G Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest
portions relative to each other.
For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard
gradation, increase the contrast.
H Saturation
Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from
subdued to vivid.
I Gray Tone Adjustment
Adjust the gray tone to suit the images of
monochrome photos. Choose cool black (tinged
with blue), pure black (neutral), warm black (tinged
with red), and so on. Select the color tone in the
color region or from the list.
Close the Color Settings dialog box.
Enhanced Printing Options 211
Adjusting Images
10.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
11.
12.
Conrm the settings of A Page Size, L Paper Source, and so on.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
212 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how
to ne-tune the color tone of photos before printing.
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Enhanced Printing Options 213
Adjusting Images
8.
9.
10.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
Click Color in the H Color Mode list.
Click I Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.
214 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
11.
On the Color Adjustment pane, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.
Adjustment Item
C Cyan
D Magenta
Description
Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan,
Magenta, and Yellow.
E Yellow
F Brightness
Adjust the brightness of printed images while
keeping the darkest and lightest portions intact.
G Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest
portions relative to each other.
For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard
gradation, increase the contrast.
H Saturation
Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from
subdued to vivid.
I Gray Tone
Adjust the gray tone to suit the images of
monochrome photos. Choose cool black (tinged
with blue), pure black (neutral), warm black (tinged
with red), and so on. Select the color tone in the
color region or from the list.
12.
13.
Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.
14.
15.
Conrm the settings of A Paper Source and C Page Size.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
Enhanced Printing Options 215
Adjusting Images
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors
for Printing
You can specify detailed print settings as desired for the quality level, colors, and other criteria.
Advanced Settings
For printing results that appear just as expected for your original, you can specify which graphic elements and
colors to prioritize for printing.
Note
• Easy Settings are also available, providing convenient presets. To use the presets, simply choose
the printing application.
For details on Easy Settings, refer to the following topics.
• Printing Photos and Images (→P.165)
• Printing Line Drawings and Text (→P.190)
• Printing Ofce Documents (→P.196)
Print Priority
Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.
Print Priority (*1)
Description
Image
A setting for posters or other documents made up mainly of photos or images, or for
emphasizing photos or images in printed documents.
Line Drawing/Text
Choose this setting for CAD drawings made up mainly of intricate lines, or wall
newspapers and other notices with a large amount of text. Suitable for emphasizing
detailed text in printed documents.
However, the quality may not be sufcient when printing photos or images that
require a lot of color coverage. In this case, choose “Image” instead.
Ofce Document
Choose this setting for better legibility of documents combining text and graphics,
such as documents and presentation material created with typical ofce applications.
*1: Options suitable for the selected paper type are listed under Print Priority.
216 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
Print Quality
Choose the print quality.
Print Quality (*1)
Print Priority
Description
Highest
A setting for printing at the highest resolution when quality is
most important. Printing takes longer and consumes more
ink than in other modes, but this mode offers superior printing
quality.
Image
High
Choose this setting to print at high resolution when quality is
most important.
Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in
“Standard” or “Draft” modes, but this mode offers exceptional
printing quality.
Image
Line Drawing/Text
Standard
Choose this setting to print at standard resolution when quality Image
and speed are both important.
Line Drawing/Text
Printing takes less time than in “Highest” or “High” mode.
Ofce Document
Draft
Choose this setting to print faster.
Image
Printing in draft mode can help you work more efciently when Line Drawing/Text
checking layouts.
*1: Options suitable for the selected Print Priority are listed under Print Quality.
Enhanced Printing Options 217
Adjusting Images
Color Settings
Setting Item
Options
Description
Color Mode (*1)
Color
Monochrome (Photo)
Monochrome
Choose whether to print in color or
monochrome.
(→P.206)
Color Adjustment (Images)
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
Brightness
Contrast
Saturation
Gray Tone Adjustment
You can adjust the levels of cyan,
magenta, and yellow as well as the
brightness, contrast, saturation,
and gray tone separately for
images, graphics, and text
documents.
If you choose Monochrome in
Color Mode only Brightness and
Contrast can be adjusted.
Gray Adjustment
Color Balance
Brightness
Contrast
Highlight
Shadow
Choose the gray tone color balance
( Cool Black or Warm Black)
and adjust levels of brightness,
contrast, highlight, and shadow as
desired.
These levels can be adjusted when
Monochrome (Photo) is selected
in Color Mode.
Color-Matching Modes
Driver Matching Mode (Kyuanos) Choose the color-matching mode.
ICC Matching Mode
Other color-matching modes may
Off
be provided by the computer
operating system, such as ICM
and ColorSync.
Color-Matching Method (*2)
Auto
Perceptual
Perceptual (People, Dark Areas)
Saturation
Monitor Matching
Colorimetric
Others
Choose the color-matching
method. The available options
vary depending on your selection
in “Color-Matching Mode”.
Color Space (*3)
sRGB
Adobe RGB
Choose a standard color space
( sRGB) or an expanded color
space ( Adobe RGB).
Color Adjustment (Graphics)
Color Adjustment (Text)
*1: Options suitable for the selected Print Priority are listed under Color Mode.
*2: The order of options displayed varies depending on the operating system.
*3: Adobe RGB is not available if an incompatible combination of the paper type and print quality is
selected.
218 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
Enhancing Printing Quality
Setting Item
Description
Thicken Fine Lines (*1)
Choose this option to make ne lines clearer in CAD
drawings or similar documents.
Unidirectional Printing
Choosing unidirectional printing can improve printing
results if lines are printed crooked or images are
uneven. However, it takes more time than regular
printing.
High-Precision Printing
Enables printing at the highest level of quality.
However, this requires more time than usual for
printing.
*1: Displayed in Windows.
Note
• To print at a higher level of quality, in the printer driver, choose High or Highest in Print Quality, and
choose Unidirectional Printing as the direction of printing.
• For instructions on specifying the print quality and color settings before printing, refer to the following
topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows) (→P.220)
• Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS X) (→P.222)
Enhanced Printing Options 219
Adjusting Images
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions
(Windows)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how
to print CAD drawings in monochrome.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
6.
7.
Click Line Drawing/Text in the E Print Priority list.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
Click Standard (600dpi) in the F Print Quality list.
Note
• Options displayed in the F Print Quality list vary depending on the paper type.
220 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
8.
9.
Click Monochrome in the G Color Mode list.
To adjust the brightness and contrast, click H Color Settings.
Note
• For instructions on adjusting brightness and contrast, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”.
(→P.206)
10.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
11.
12.
Conrm the settings of A Page Size, L Paper Source, and so on.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
Enhanced Printing Options 221
Adjusting Images
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions
(Mac OS X)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how
to print CAD drawings in monochrome.
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
In the application menu, choose Print.
Access the Main pane.
222 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
8.
9.
10.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
Click Line Drawing in the E Print Priority list.
Click Standard(600dpi) in the F Print Quality list.
Note
• Options displayed in the F Print Quality list vary depending on the paper type.
11.
12.
Click Monochrome in the H Color Mode list.
To adjust the brightness and contrast, click I Set.
Note
• For instructions on adjusting brightness and contrast, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”.
(→P.206)
13.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Enhanced Printing Options 223
Adjusting Images
14.
15.
Conrm the settings of A Paper Source and C Page Size.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
224 Enhanced Printing Options
Choosing Paper for Printing
Choosing Paper for Printing
Choosing a Paper for Printing
Choosing the right paper for your particular printing application will give you the best printing results.
Media type
The printer and printer driver offer print settings optimized for various paper characteristics.
Note
• For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)
• The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel) is
updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change
paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool . For information about the Media Conguration
Tool, see the Media Conguration Tool Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).
• An error message is displayed on the printer Control Panel if the paper type as specied in the printer
driver does not match the type specied on the printer. Although you can print under these conditions,
the printing results may not be suitable.
If the paper type is not listed for selection
If the type of paper loaded cannot be selected, try specifying glossy paper or proong paper as a special
paper (Special 1 to Special 5, in this order). BK ( Black Ink) is used as the black ink. Try specifying other
types of paper as Special 6 to Special 10. MBK ( Matte Black Ink) is used as the black ink. Note that higher
numbers in this setting enable more vivid colors but may also cause colors to run together.
For instructions on specifying the paper type before printing, refer to the following topics.
• Selecting the Paper Type (Roll) (→P.226)
• Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet) (→P.227)
Enhanced Printing Options 225
Choosing Paper for Printing
Selecting the Paper Type (Roll)
When changing the type of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the type of paper as follows.
Important
• For best printing results, the printer ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper. That’s why the
margins and the size of printed images may vary depending on the type of paper used. If printing results
are not as you expected, adjust the paper feed amount and Printhead height.
(→P.577)
(→P.576)
Note
• After you load the roll, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the paper type on the
Display Screen, unless a barcode has been printed on the roll or you have activated automatic detection
of the remaining roll paper. Select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.
If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have activated automatic detection of the remaining
roll paper, specify the roll length after the paper type. (→P.118)
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Media Menu, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Roll Media Type, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.
Note
• For details on types of paper, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108) By factory default, Plain
Paper is selected.
• Be sure to select the correct paper type. If this setting does not match the loaded paper, it may
cause feed errors and affect the printing quality.
5.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
226 Enhanced Printing Options
Choosing Paper for Printing
Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet)
When changing the type of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the type of paper as follows.
Note
• After you press the Feeder Selection button to illuminate the Cut Sheet lamp, press the Load/Eject
button to display a screen for selection of the paper type.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button to display a screen for selection
of the paper size. (→P.150)
• If you have sent the print job from a computer beforehand, the screen for paper type and size selection
is not displayed. Printing will start after the paper is advanced.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Media Menu, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual PaperType, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.
Note
• Select POP Board when loading heavyweight paper.
• For details on paper types, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108) Plain Paper is selected by
factory default.
• Be sure to select the correct paper type. If this setting does not match the loaded paper, it may
cause feed errors and affect the printing quality.
5.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
Enhanced Printing Options 227
Choosing Paper for Printing
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
If you replace the paper, complete the printer driver settings for the paper type and size.
For instructions on conguring paper settings in the printer driver, refer to the following topics, as appropriate
for your computer and operating system.
• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) (→P.229)
• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) (→P.231)
228 Enhanced Printing Options
Choosing Paper for Printing
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows)
If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.
Important
• Always specify the same type and size of paper in the printer menu and printer driver.
If the type and size do not match, an error message will be displayed and printing is not possible.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
6.
7.
In the A Page Size list, select the size of the original as specied in the application.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
In the L Paper Source list, select how paper is supplied.
Enhanced Printing Options 229
Choosing Paper for Printing
8.
If you have selected Roll Paper in L Paper Source, select the width of the loaded roll in M Roll
Paper Width.
Note
• A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P.394)
230 Enhanced Printing Options
Choosing Paper for Printing
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X)
If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Enhanced Printing Options 231
Choosing Paper for Printing
8.
9.
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
In the A Paper Source list, select how paper is supplied.
If you have selected Cut Sheet or Manual in A Paper Source, make sure the size as selected in
Page Setup is displayed in C Page Size. If you have selected Roll Paper in A Paper Source,
make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Paper Width.
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
Note
• A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.447)
232 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size
You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.
Enlarged/Reduced Printing
Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver, as desired.
Fit Paper Size
Enlarge or reduce the original to match the size of the paper you are using.
For instructions on resizing originals to match the paper size, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for
your computer and operating system.
• Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) (→P.234)
• Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) (→P.236)
Note
• For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use
an image-editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of
150 dpi or more at actual size.
Enhanced Printing Options 233
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the paper size, based on the following
example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
234 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
7.
8.
Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm).
9.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this
case, click ISO A4.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Select the D Fit Paper Size check box.
Click ISO A3 in the G Media Size list.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
Enhanced Printing Options 235
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the paper size, based on the following
example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
236 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
9.
10.
11.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 237
Printing enlargements or reductions
12.
Make sure C Page Size on the Page Setup pane shows the original size as specied in C
Paper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Make sure E Fit Paper Size is selected.
Click ISO A3 in the I Paper Size list.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
238 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width
You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.
Enlarged/Reduced Printing
Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver, as desired.
Fit Roll Paper Width
Enlarge or reduce the original as a whole to match the roll paper width, as desired.
For instructions on resizing originals to match the roll paper width, refer to the following topics, as appropriate
for your computer and operating system.
• Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) (→P.240)
• Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) (→P.242)
Note
• For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use
an image-editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of
150 dpi or more at actual size.
Enhanced Printing Options 239
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
7.
8.
Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
240 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
9.
Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Note
• If the Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box is not displayed on the Page Setup sheet, clear the
B Borderless Printing check box.
10.
Click E Fit Roll Paper Width.
Note
• After you click E Fit Roll Paper Width, the Information dialog box is displayed. Select the width of
the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list and click OK.
• Make sure the roll paper width you specify matches the width of the loaded roll.
11.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
Enhanced Printing Options 241
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In C Paper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
242 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
9.
10.
11.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 16
in. (406.4mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 243
Printing enlargements or reductions
12.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
13.
14.
15.
Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Click F Fit Roll Paper Width.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
244 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value
You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.
Enlarged/Reduced Printing
Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver, as desired.
Scaling
Enlarge or reduce originals by a particular amount, as desired.
For instructions on entering a scaling value to resize originals, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for
your computer and operating system.
• Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows) (→P.246)
• Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS X) (→P.248)
Note
• For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use
an image-editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of
150 dpi or more at actual size.
Enhanced Printing Options 245
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value, based on the following
example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paperr width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
Important
• In borderless printing, you cannot resize originals by entering a scaling value.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
246 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
7.
8.
Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm).
9.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
10.
11.
12.
Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Click ISO A4 in the G Media Size list.
Click F Scaling and enter “120”.
Note
• You can specify enlargement that exceeds the paper size, but in this case, the portion off the edge of
the paper will not be printed.
• If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size, the original is
printed in the upper-left corner. In this case, you can center originals by selecting G Print Centered
on the Layout sheet.
13.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
Enhanced Printing Options 247
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS
X)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value, based on the following
example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
Important
• In borderless printing, you cannot resize originals by entering a scaling value.
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In C Paper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
248 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
9.
10.
11.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 249
Printing enlargements or reductions
12.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
13.
14.
Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Click G Scaling and enter “120”.
Note
• You can specify enlargement that exceeds the paper size, but in this case, the portion off the edge of
the paper will not be printed.
• If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size, the original is printed
in the upper-left corner. In this case, you can center originals by selecting the J Print Centered
check box.
15.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
250 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color
imageRUNNER
Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.
For instructions on printing enlargements of scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER, refer to the
following topic.
• Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Windows) (→P.252)
• Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X) (→P.254)
Enhanced Printing Options 251
Printing enlargements or reductions
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color
imageRUNNER (Windows)
Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.
Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed
automatically after enlargement according to printing conditions you specify for that folder.
This processing sequence is called the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy function.
To use Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, rst complete these settings in the following order.
1. Register a hot folder on your computer.
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER
and complete the settings for enlargement copy.
2. Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder.
After these settings are complete, you can print enlarged copies of scanned originals from the Color
imageRUNNER.
Registering a hot folder on your computer
Folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy) are called hot folders.
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER. You can
specify printing conditions (such as the image quality and paper size), based on which originals transferred to
the hot folder will be printed. Follow these steps to register and modify hot folders.
1.
2.
Display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.406)
3.
Click B Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy to start the Color imageRUNNER
Click the Utility tab to display the Utility sheet.
Enlargement Copy utility.
4.
Use the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility to register or modify hot folders.
For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help le for the Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility.
252 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder. It is easy to send scanned
originals to the hot folder if you assign the scanning settings and destination to a Favorites button on the
Color imageRUNNER.
For instructions on assigning scanning settings and destinations to a Favorites button, refer to the setting
manual, displayed by clicking Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual button of Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility, or refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.
Scanning the original and print an enlargement
Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printing on the printer.
For detailed instructions, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Load the original on the platen glass or document feeder of the Color imageRUNNER.
Press Send to display the screen for transmission.
Press Favorites, and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder.
Press Start on the control panel. If you scan originals on the platen glass, after scanning all
originals, press Done on the touch-panel display.
Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the
conditions you specied for the folder.
Note
• For details on Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, refer to Color imageRUNNER Enlargement
Copy .
Enhanced Printing Options 253
Printing enlargements or reductions
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color
imageRUNNER (Mac OS X)
Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.
Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed
automatically enlarged according to printing conditions you specify for that folder.
This processing sequence is called the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy function.
To use Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, rst complete these settings in the following order.
1. Register a hot folder on your computer.
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER
and complete the settings for enlargement copy.
2. Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder.
After these settings are complete, you can print enlarged copies of scanned originals from the Color
imageRUNNER.
Registering a hot folder on your computer
Folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy) are called hot folders.
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER. You can
specify printing conditions (such as the image quality and paper size), based on which originals transferred to
the hot folder will be printed. Follow these steps to register and modify hot folders.
1.
To display the GARO ExtraKit dialog box, either double-click the GARO ExtraKit icon after
navigating to Applications - Canon Utilities - imagePROGRAF, or click C Set on the Utility
pane.
2.
In Enlarged Copy Settings, click Add or Edit and either create or modify the hot folder.
For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help le for the GARO
ExtraKit utility.
254 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder. It is easy to send scanned
originals to the hot folder if you assign the scanning settings and destination to a Favorites button on the
Color imageRUNNER.
For instructions on assigning scanning and sending settings to the Favorites button, refer to the Color
imageRUNNER manual.
Scanning the original and print an enlargement
Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printing on the printer.
For detailed instructions, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Load the original on the platen glass or document feeder of the Color imageRUNNER.
Press Send to display the screen for transmission.
Press Favorites, and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder.
Press Start on the control panel. If you scan originals on the platen glass, after scanning all
originals, press Done on the touch-panel display.
Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the
conditions you specied for the folder.
Note
• For details on Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, refer to Color imageRUNNER Enlargement
Copy .
Enhanced Printing Options 255
Printing at full size
Printing at full size
Printing on Oversized Paper
Except in borderless printing, the actual printing area corresponds to your selected paper size minus the
space for a margin. (→P.89) To print documents or images you prepare without a margin at actual size,
use an oversized paper size.
For example, to print a A4-sized original without a margin at A4 size, print it on paper larger than A4 size and
cut away the excess margin.
Note
• If you prepare an original for printing without a margin and print it on paper of regular size, the image
near the edge will not be printed.
Oversize
The margin required by the printer is added around the “outside” of a regular paper size. For example, when
printing a A4-sized original (210×297 mm), you have the following options.
a. Regular paper size: Gray area not printed
b. Page Size
c. Oversized paper size: Print area matches the page size (b)
Important
• When printing on oversize paper, load paper larger than the page size-a size that includes the margin
required by the printer.
• Sheets: Load paper that is at least 6 mm (0.24 in) wider and 26 mm (1 in) higher than the page size
• Rolls: Load paper that is at least 6 mm (0.24 in) wider and 6 mm (0.24 in) higher than the page size
• Paper larger than the maximum size supported by the printer cannot be used as paper for oversized
printing. (→P.113)
256 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing at full size
Note
• Oversized printing (selecting Oversize in Page Size) is only available in Windows. For oversized
printing on sheets, choose Manual as the media source.
• To perform oversized printing on a Macintosh computer, you must specify a non-standard page size and
print on it.
• To specify a non-standard paper size in oversized printing, register the paper size as a Custom Media
Size. Oversized printing is not available with “Custom Size”. (→P.300)
For instructions on oversized printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and
operating system.
• Printing at Full Size (Windows) (→P.258)
• Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X) (→P.260)
Enhanced Printing Options 257
Printing at full size
Printing at Full Size (Windows)
This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example. (Oversized Printing)
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page Size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
6.
7.
8.
Click O Paper Size Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
In the Paper Size Options dialog box, select the Oversize check box in Display Series.
Click OK to close the Paper Size Options dialog box.
258 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing at full size
9.
10.
11.
Click Oversize - ISO A4 in the A Page Size list.
Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm).
12.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
Note
• You can select Oversize in Display Series to make all oversized versions of paper in the selected
Display Series available for printing. These sizes are displayed in the Page Size list in the format
Oversize - xxxxxx.
Enhanced Printing Options 259
Printing at full size
Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example. (Oversized Printing)
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
In C Paper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 - Oversize.
Note
• For oversized printing, choose paper identied by the regular paper name followed by “- Oversize”.
4.
5.
6.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
7.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
260 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing at full size
9.
10.
11.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 261
Printing at full size
12.
Make sure C Page Size shows the original size as specied in C Paper Size in the Page
Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4 - Oversize.
13.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
262 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing at full size
Borderless Printing at Actual Size
Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or
images) without a surrounding margin, or border.
Borderless Printing
In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you
can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.
Important
• Borderless printing is only available with rolls.
• Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular
widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.108)
• If you use an A1 or A2 roll for borderless printing, insert the provided Spacer for Borderless Printing
on the Roll Holder. (→P.143)
If you do not attach the Spacer for Borderless Printing, the Platen may be soiled from borderless printing.
• Paper incompatible with the printer’s auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and
right sides only.
• These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering
originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.
• You cannot have pages rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper if you have set up borderless printing at
actual size or in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size.
• When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be
uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver. In
this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. After ejecting and
cutting the printed document, use scissors to cut away the top and bottom edges.
• By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper. When you are using paper that takes
longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not
dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of
use. In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.
1. On the Main sheet of the printer driver, click Settings in Media Type.
2. Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying Time.
Borderless Printing Method
Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.
Enhanced Printing Options 263
Printing at full size
Print Image with Actual Size
Prints originals at actual size, without enlarging or reducing them. Originals must be prepared in a size that
exceeds the dimensions of the paper by 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side.
Note
• Not all page sizes are available.
• Even if you prepare originals of the same size as the paper size, the originals are automatically enlarged
when you print borderlessly in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size. This may
affect image quality. When image quality is most important, make the original 3 mm longer on each side
than the paper size so that the image can be printed at actual size in borderless printing.
For instructions on borderless printing of photos and images at actual size, refer to the following topics, as
appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) (→P.265)
• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X) (→P.267)
264 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing at full size
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)
This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.
If you use an A1 or A2 roll for borderless printing, insert the provided Spacer for Borderless Printing on the
Roll Holder. (→P.143)
If you do not attach the Spacer for Borderless Printing, the Platen may be soiled from borderless printing.
•
•
•
•
•
1.
Document: Any type
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
Create the original in the source application 3 mm (0.12 in) larger on each side than 254.0×304.8
mm (10 × 12 in) -that is, 260.0×310.8 mm (10.2 × 12.2 in)
Note
• If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on
specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.
• The extra 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side will not be printed. Create the original so that it ts inside the
paper area to be printed on.
2.
3.
4.
Choose Print in the application menu.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Coated Paper.
6.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 265
Printing at full size
7.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
8.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the source application.
In this case, click 10"x12".
9.
10.
Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.
11.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list-in this case, click 10-in. Roll
Select the B Borderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.
(254.0mm).
12.
13.
14.
Click OK to close the Information dialog box.
In C Borderless Printing Method, click F Print Image with Actual Size.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
266 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing at full size
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.
If you use an A1 or A2 roll for borderless printing, insert the provided Spacer for Borderless Printing on the
Roll Holder. (→P.143)
The platen may be soiled from borderless printing if you do not attach it.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: 10 × 12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)-Borderless
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
In the C Paper Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click
10"x12" - Borderless.
Note
• Paper sizes supported for borderless printing are indicated by “-Borderless”.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Enhanced Printing Options 267
Printing at full size
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Coated Paper.
9.
10.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
11.
12.
Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Conrm that the roll paper width matches the paper size.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
268 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing at full size
13.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, 10"x12" - Borderless.
14.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
Enhanced Printing Options 269
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size
Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or
images) without a surrounding margin, or border.
Borderless Printing
In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you
can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.
Important
• Borderless printing is only available with rolls.
• Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular
widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.108)
• If you use an A1 or A2 roll for borderless printing, insert the provided Spacer for Borderless Printing
on the Roll Holder. (→P.143)
If you do not attach the Spacer for Borderless Printing, the Platen may be soiled from borderless printing.
• Paper incompatible with the printer’s auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and
right sides only.
• These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering
originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.
• You cannot have pages rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper if you have set up borderless printing at
actual size or in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size.
• When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be
uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver. In
this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. After ejecting and
cutting the printed document, use scissors to cut away the top and bottom edges.
• By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper. When you are using paper that takes
longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not
dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of
use. In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.
1. On the Main sheet of the printer driver, click Settings in Media Type.
2. Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying Time.
Borderless Printing Method
Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.
270 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
Fit Paper Size
Enlarge or reduce the original to match the size of the paper you are using.
Note
• The printer driver automatically enlarges originals 3 mm (0.12 in) past the dimensions of the paper on
each side. The 3 mm portion beyond the edge on each side is not printed.
For instructions on borderless printing of photos, images, and other documents to match the paper size, refer
to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) (→P.272)
• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) (→P.274)
Enhanced Printing Options 271
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the
Paper Size (Windows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the paper size, based on the
following example.
If you use an A1 or A2 roll for borderless printing, insert the provided Spacer for Borderless Printing on the
Roll Holder. (→P.143)
If you do not attach the Spacer for Borderless Printing, the Platen may be soiled from borderless printing.
•
•
•
•
•
1.
Document: Any type
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Note
• If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on
specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.
2.
3.
4.
Choose Print in the application menu.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Coated Paper.
6.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
272 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
7.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
8.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click 10"x12".
9.
10.
Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.
11.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list-in this case, click 10-in. Roll
Select the B Borderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.
(254.0mm).
12.
13.
14.
15.
Click OK to close the Information dialog box.
In C Borderless Printing Method, click D Fit Paper Size.
Click Match Page Size in the G Media Size list.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
Enhanced Printing Options 273
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the
Paper Size (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the paper size, based on the
following example.
If you use an A1 or A2 roll for borderless printing, insert the provided Spacer for Borderless Printing on the
Roll Holder. (→P.143)
If you do not attach the Spacer for Borderless Printing, the Platen may be soiled from borderless printing.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12".
Note
• All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to match the paper size.
4.
5.
6.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Choose Print in the application menu.
274 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
7.
Access the Main pane.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Coated Paper.
9.
10.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
11.
Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Enhanced Printing Options 275
Borderless Printing
12.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
13.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, 10"x12".
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Select the H Borderless Printing check box.
Click E Fit Paper Size under D Enlarged/Reduced Printing.
In I Paper Size, click the paper size. In this case, click 10"x12" - Borderless.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
276 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll
Width
Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or
images) without a surrounding margin, or border.
Borderless Printing
In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you
can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.
Important
• Borderless printing is only available with rolls.
• Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular
widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.108)
• If you use an A1 or A2 roll for borderless printing, insert the provided Spacer for Borderless Printing
on the Roll Holder. (→P.143)
If you do not attach the Spacer for Borderless Printing, the Platen may be soiled from borderless printing.
• Paper incompatible with the printer’s auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and
right sides only.
• These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering
originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.
• You cannot have pages rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper if you have set up borderless printing at
actual size or in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size.
• When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be
uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver. In
this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. After ejecting and
cutting the printed document, use scissors to cut away the top and bottom edges.
• By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper. When you are using paper that takes
longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not
dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of
use. In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.
1. On the Main sheet of the printer driver, click Settings in Media Type.
2. Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying Time.
Borderless Printing Method
Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.
Enhanced Printing Options 277
Borderless Printing
Scale to t Roll Paper Width
Enlarge or reduce the original as a whole to match the roll paper width.
Note
• You can combine this function with rotating pages 90 degrees before printing so that the original width
(relative to portrait orientation) matches the roll paper width in borderless printing.
For instructions on borderless printing of photos, images, and other documents to match the roll paper width,
refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) (→P.279)
• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) (→P.281)
278 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll
Width (Windows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the roll width, based on the
following example.
If you use n A1 or A2 roll for borderless printing, insert the provided Spacer for Borderless Printing on the Roll
Holder. (→P.143)
If you do not attach the Spacer for Borderless Printing, the Platen may be soiled from borderless printing.
•
•
•
•
•
1.
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Note
• If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on
specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.
2.
3.
4.
Choose Print in the application menu.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Coated Paper.
6.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 279
Borderless Printing
7.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
8.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
9.
10.
Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.
11.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list-in this case, click 10-in. Roll
Select the B Borderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.
(254.0mm).
12.
13.
14.
Click OK to close the Information dialog box.
In C Borderless Printing Method, make sure E Scale to t Roll Paper Width is selected.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
280 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll
Width (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.
If you use an A1 or A2 roll for borderless printing, insert the provided Spacer for Borderless Printing on the
Roll Holder. (→P.143)
If you do not attach the Spacer for Borderless Printing, the Platen may be soiled from borderless printing.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
In C Paper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Note
• All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to t the roll width.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Enhanced Printing Options 281
Borderless Printing
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Coated Paper.
9.
10.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
11.
12.
Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-here, 10
in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
282 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
13.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
14.
15.
Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Select the H Borderless Printing check box.
This ensures that F Fit Roll Paper Width is automatically selected in D Enlarged/Reduced
Printing.
16.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
Enhanced Printing Options 283
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing at Actual Size
Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or
images) without a surrounding margin, or border.
Borderless Printing
In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you
can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.
Important
• Borderless printing is only available with rolls.
• Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular
widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.108)
• If you use an A1 or A2 roll for borderless printing, insert the provided Spacer for Borderless Printing
on the Roll Holder. (→P.143)
If you do not attach the Spacer for Borderless Printing, the Platen may be soiled from borderless printing.
• Paper incompatible with the printer’s auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and
right sides only.
• These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering
originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.
• You cannot have pages rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper if you have set up borderless printing at
actual size or in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size.
• When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be
uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver. In
this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. After ejecting and
cutting the printed document, use scissors to cut away the top and bottom edges.
• By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper. When you are using paper that takes
longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not
dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of
use. In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.
1. On the Main sheet of the printer driver, click Settings in Media Type.
2. Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying Time.
Borderless Printing Method
Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.
284 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
Print Image with Actual Size
Prints originals at actual size, without enlarging or reducing them. Originals must be prepared in a size that
exceeds the dimensions of the paper by 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side.
Note
• Not all page sizes are available.
• Even if you prepare originals of the same size as the paper size, the originals are automatically enlarged
when you print borderlessly in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size. This may
affect image quality. When image quality is most important, make the original 3 mm longer on each side
than the paper size so that the image can be printed at actual size in borderless printing.
For instructions on borderless printing of photos and images at actual size, refer to the following topics, as
appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) (→P.286)
• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X) (→P.288)
Enhanced Printing Options 285
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)
This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.
If you use an A1 or A2 roll for borderless printing, insert the provided Spacer for Borderless Printing on the
Roll Holder. (→P.143)
If you do not attach the Spacer for Borderless Printing, the Platen may be soiled from borderless printing.
•
•
•
•
•
1.
Document: Any type
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
Create the original in the source application 3 mm (0.12 in) larger on each side than 254.0×304.8
mm (10 × 12 in) -that is, 260.0×310.8 mm (10.2 × 12.2 in)
Note
• If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on
specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.
• The extra 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side will not be printed. Create the original so that it ts inside the
paper area to be printed on.
2.
3.
4.
Choose Print in the application menu.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Coated Paper.
6.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
286 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
7.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
8.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the source application.
In this case, click 10"x12".
9.
10.
Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.
11.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list-in this case, click 10-in. Roll
Select the B Borderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.
(254.0mm).
12.
13.
14.
Click OK to close the Information dialog box.
In C Borderless Printing Method, click F Print Image with Actual Size.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
Enhanced Printing Options 287
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.
If you use an A1 or A2 roll for borderless printing, insert the provided Spacer for Borderless Printing on the
Roll Holder. (→P.143)
The platen may be soiled from borderless printing if you do not attach it.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: 10 × 12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)-Borderless
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
In the C Paper Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click
10"x12" - Borderless.
Note
• Paper sizes supported for borderless printing are indicated by “-Borderless”.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
288 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Coated Paper.
9.
10.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
11.
12.
Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Conrm that the roll paper width matches the paper size.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 289
Borderless Printing
13.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, 10"x12" - Borderless.
14.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
290 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing banners or at other non-standard
sizes
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format
Printing)
You can create vertical or horizontal banners by printing originals that are in banner format on rolls.
Originals created in Microsoft Word or other applications in your preferred size can be enlarged to ll the width
of roll paper by completing simple printer driver settings.
Fit Roll Paper Width
You can easily create vertical or horizontal banners by automatically enlarging or reducing originals to t the
full width of rolls.
Note
• The maximum supported roll length is 18.0 m or 19.7 yd (when printing in Mac OS X).
For instructions on printing vertical or horizontal banners, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for
your computer and operating system.
• Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows) (→P.292)
• Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X) (→P.296)
Important
• Before printing, check how much of the roll paper is left. If you have activated automatic detection of the
remaining roll paper, a warning message is displayed when there is not enough roll paper left.
• If not much ink is left, prepare replacement ink tanks.
• To print at a higher level of quality, in the printer driver, choose High or Highest in Print Quality, and
choose Unidirectional Printing as the direction of printing.
Enhanced Printing Options 291
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format
Printing; Windows)
This topic describes how to print a banner about ve times as long as the roll width based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: A horizontal banner created in Microsoft Word
Page size: Non-standard (100×500 mm [3.9×19.7 in])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: 16 in (406.4 mm)
Follow the steps below to print a banner in either horizontal or vertical format.
1. Register a Custom Media Size.
Banners tend to be in non-standard sizes, so register a Custom Media Size. In this example, 100×500
mm (3.9×19.7 in) is registered.
2. In the application, create an original in the size you registered.
3. Print the banner, using the settings that correspond to banners.
Registering a Custom Media Size
This example describes how to register a paper size that is horizontally elongated and suitable for banners in
either horizontal or vertical format.
1.
2.
Display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.406)
3.
4.
5.
Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Click O Paper Size Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box.
Enter a desired paper name in Custom Paper Size Name. “My Horizontal Banner” is used
in this example.
6.
7.
8.
9.
In Units, click mm.
Under Paper Size, enter “100” in Width and “500” in Height.
Click Add to add the paper size of “My Horizontal Banner”.
Click OK to close the Paper Size Options dialog box.
292 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
10.
Close the printer driver dialog box.
Note
• You can also specify a Custom Size as the paper size. Note that Custom Size settings are not
available after you exit the application.
For more information, see “Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)”. (→P.301)
Creating the banner in the application
Follow the steps below to create the banner in Microsoft Word using the Custom Media Size you registered.
1.
2.
3.
Start Microsoft Word.
Choose Page Setup from the File menu to display the Page Setup dialog box.
Under Paper Size, click the Custom Media Size you registered-"My Horizontal Banner" in this
example.
Important
• If "My Horizontal Banner" is not listed, make sure this printer is selected as the printer to use.
• In applications such as Microsoft PowerPoint that do not enable you to choose registered paper
sizes, use the custom paper size setting in “Custom” and specify 100×500 mm (3.9×19.7 in)
4.
5.
Set the printing orientation to horizontal.
Create the banner.
Enhanced Printing Options 293
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing the banner
Follow the steps below to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the Microsoft Word menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
7.
In the A Page Size list, click the size you registered, "My Horizontal Banner".
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click POP Ad in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
294 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
8.
Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Note
• If the Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box is not displayed on the Page Setup sheet, clear the
B Borderless Printing check box.
9.
10.
11.
Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.
After you click E Fit Roll Paper Width, the Information dialog box is displayed.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 16-in. Roll
(406.4mm), and then click OK.
12.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
Note
• If printing is unsuccessful, you may be able to print after completing the following setting.
1. On the Layout sheet, click M Special Settings to display the Special Settings dialog box.
2. In the FineZoom Settings list, click Yes.
Enhanced Printing Options 295
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format
Printing; Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print a banner about ve times as long as the roll width based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: An original designed for a horizontal banner
Page Size: Non-standard (100×500 mm [3.9×19.7 in])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)
Follow the steps below to print a banner in either horizontal or vertical format.
1. In the application, create an original in the format of a horizontal or vertical banner.
2. Register a “Custom Page Size”.
Banners tend to be in non-standard sizes, so register a “Custom Page Size” in Page Setup. In this
example, 100×500 mm (3.9×19.7 in) is registered.
3. Print the banner, using the settings that correspond to banners.
Note
• The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of setting up non-standard paper
sizes varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.
296 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Register a Custom Page Size
This example describes how to register and print using a page size that is horizontally elongated and suitable
for banners in either horizontal or vertical format.
1.
2.
Create the document in the application.
3.
4.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
Click Manage Custom Sizes in the C Paper Size list to display the Custom Page Sizes
dialog box.
5.
Double-click Untitled in the list at left, and then enter a name for the page size you want
to register. Here, enter “100*500”.
If the Untitled size is not listed at left, click + below the list.
6.
Under Page Size, enter “10” in Width and “50” in Height. Here, measurements are entered
in centimeters.
7.
Specify the margins by entering “0.3” in Printer Margins. Here, too, measurements are entered
in centimeters.
8.
9.
Click OK to close the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click "100*500", the size
you registered.
10.
11.
In D Orientation, click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Enhanced Printing Options 297
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Print the banner
Follow the steps below to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.
1.
2.
Choose Print in the application menu.
3.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
6.
Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.
Access the Main pane.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click POP in the E Print Target list.
Access the Page Setup pane.
298 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
7.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 16
in. (406.4mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
8.
9.
10.
11.
In C Page Size, make sure "100*500" is displayed, as registered in Page Setup.
Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Click F Fit Roll Paper Width.
Conrm the print settings, and click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
Enhanced Printing Options 299
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes
By specifying the paper size, you can print on non-standard sizes of paper.
There are two ways to print on non-standard paper sizes, as follows.
Registering non-standard paper size in the printer driver
After you register non-standard paper sizes, they are listed with standard sizes so that you can choose
them anytime as needed.
Note
• These non-standard paper sizes you register in the printer driver are called Custom Media Sizes in
Windows and “Custom Sizes” in Mac OS X.
Specifying custom media sizes for temporary use
Because these are sizes you specify temporarily in the printer driver, the sizes will not be available after you
exit the application. If you want to set up a non-standard paper size so that it will always be available, we
recommend registering the paper size in the printer driver.
Note
• These temporary paper sizes you register on the printer are called “Custom Sizes” in Windows.
For instructions on specifying non-standard paper sizes for printing, refer to the following topics, as
appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows) (→P.301)
• Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X) (→P.305)
300 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)
This topic describes two ways to print on non-standard paper sizes.
• Printing by using Custom Size (→P.301)
• Printing by using Custom Media Size (→P.303)
Printing by using Custom Size
This section describes how to print using Custom Size based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Scanned image
Page size: Square of non-standard dimensions (430×430 mm [16.9×16.9 in])
Paper: Sheets ( Manual)
Paper type: Plain Paper
Paper size: A square sheet (430×430 mm [16.9×16.9 in])
1.
2.
3.
4.
Load the square paper (430×430 mm [16.9×16.9 in]) in the Top Paper Feed Slot.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Choose Print in the source application menu.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Scanned Image in the E Print Target
list.
Enhanced Printing Options 301
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
7.
8.
9.
10.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Click Manual in the L Paper Source list.
Click Custom Size in the A Page Size list to display the Custom Size Settings dialog box.
Complete the following settings in the Custom Size Settings dialog box.
1. Select mm or inch in Units.
2. Enter “430” [16.9 in] in both Width and Height.
11.
12.
Click OK to close the Custom Size Settings dialog box.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
302 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing by using Custom Media Size
This section describes how to print using Custom Media Size based on the following example. First, register
a non-standard paper size called “430 mm Square” as a Custom Media Size.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Scanned image
Page size: A square sheet (430×430 mm [16.9×16.9 in])
Paper: Sheets ( Manual)
Paper type: Plain Paper
Paper size: A square sheet (430×430 mm [16.9×16.9 in])
1.
2.
3.
4.
Load the square paper (430×430 mm [16.9×16.9 in]) in the Top Paper Feed Slot.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Choose Print in the source application menu.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Scanned Image in the E Print Target
list.
7.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Enhanced Printing Options 303
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
8.
9.
Click O Paper Size Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box.
Complete the following settings in the Paper Size Options dialog box.
1. Enter a desired paper name in Custom Paper Size Name. “430 mm Square” is used in this example.
2. Select mm or inch in Units.
3. Enter “430” [16.9 in] in both Width and Height.
Note
• If you select the Fix the Ratio of the Width to Height check box, after you enter a value in either
Width or Height, the other value will be automatically applied based on the original aspect ratio.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Click Add to register “430 mm Square”.
Click OK to close the Paper Size Options dialog box.
Click Manual in the L Paper Source list.
In the A Page Size list, click the size you added, "430 mm Square".
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
304 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print after registering “Custom Media Size” based on the following example. Here, you
will register a non-standard paper size named “430*430” in “Custom Media Size”.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Scanned image
Page size: A square sheet (430×430 mm [16.9×16.9 in])
Paper: Sheets ( Manual)
Paper type: Plain Paper
Paper size: A square sheet (430×430 mm [16.9×16.9 in])
Note
• The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of setting up non-standard paper
sizes varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.
1.
2.
3.
Create the document in the application.
4.
5.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
Load the square paper (430×430 mm [16.9×16.9 in]) in the Top Paper Feed Slot.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
Click Manage Custom Sizes in the C Paper Size list to display the Custom Page Sizes
dialog box.
6.
In Page Size, enter the height and width of the original. Here, enter “43.00 cm” in Height and
Width.
7.
In Printer Margins, enter “0.3” for the top and side margins and “2.3” for the bottom margin.
Here, measurements are entered in centimeters.
8.
Double-click Untitled in the list at left in the Custom Page Sizes dialog box and enter the
paper name-in this case, “430*430”.
9.
10.
Click OK to close the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click “430*430”, the size
you registered.
11.
12.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Enhanced Printing Options 305
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
13.
Access the Main pane.
14.
15.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Scanned Image in the E Print Target
list.
16.
Access the Page Setup pane.
17.
18.
19.
Click Manual in the A Paper Source list.
In D Easy Settings, make sure “430*430” is displayed, as registered in Page Setup.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
306 Enhanced Printing Options
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other
By arranging originals from word-processing or spreadsheet programs or web browser screen shots next to
each other on single sheets, you can create highly expressive presentation materials, easy-to-understand
meeting materials, and a variety of other printed documents.
Free Layout (Windows)
Besides combining multiple pages in a single-page layout, you can combine originals from multiple les-even
multiple source applications-in a single-page layout.
Enhanced Printing Options 307
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
imagePROGRAF Free Layout (Macintosh)
Besides combining multiple pages in a single-page layout, you can combine originals from multiple les-even
multiple source applications-in a single-page layout.
Important
• The driver must be installed from the User Software CD-ROM to use this function.
For instructions on arranging originals from multiple applications, refer to the following topics.
• Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows) (→P.309)
• Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X) (→P.311)
308 Enhanced Printing Options
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows)
This topic describes how to arrange multiple originals using the Free Layout function.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
5.
6.
Select the A Page Layout check box.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click Free Layout in the B Page Layout list.
Enhanced Printing Options 309
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
7.
When you attempt to print, the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window is displayed. (At this
point, the document will not be printed yet.)
8.
Edit and rearrange the image in the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window as desired.
Important
• Without closing the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window, repeat steps 1-7 to arrange originals
from multiple applications on the same page.
Note
• For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the imagePROGRAF Free Layout
help topic.
9.
Print from the imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu.
Note
• For details on imagePROGRAF Free Layout functions, refer to Free Layout .
310 Enhanced Printing Options
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to use the Free Layout function to arrange multiple originals next to each other before
printing.
1.
2.
Choose Print in the application menu.
3.
The Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window is displayed.
Click PDF and select Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout.
Enhanced Printing Options 311
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
4.
Edit and rearrange the image in the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window as desired.
Important
• Without closing the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window, repeat steps 1-7 to arrange
originals from multiple applications on the same page.
Note
• For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the Canon imagePROGRAF Free
Layout help topic.
5.
Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu.
Note
• For details on Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout functions, refer to Free Layout .
312 Enhanced Printing Options
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously
You can print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.
Roll paper (banner)
Important
• This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.
• During banner printing, settings for conserving paper, number of copies, borderless printing,
enlargement or reduction, and other layout-related settings are disregarded.
For instructions on borderless printing of photos and images at actual size, refer to the following topics, as
appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows) (→P.314)
• Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X) (→P.315)
Enhanced Printing Options 313
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows)
This topic describes how to print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.
Important
• This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.
• During banner printing, settings for conserving paper, number of copies, borderless printing,
enlargement or reduction, and other layout-related settings are disregarded.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, click the type of paper that is loaded.
6.
7.
Click Roll Paper (Banner) in the L Paper Source list.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Conrm the print settings and start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
314 Enhanced Printing Options
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.
Important
• This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.
• During banner printing, settings for conserving paper, number of copies, borderless printing,
enlargement or reduction, and other layout-related settings are disregarded.
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
8.
In the A Media Type list, click the type of paper that is loaded.
Click the original size in the C Paper Size list.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
In the source application menu, choose Print.
Access the Main pane.
Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 315
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
9.
10.
11.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Roll Paper (Banner) in the A Paper Source list.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
316 Enhanced Printing Options
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet
To conserve paper, you can print several pages of the original on a single sheet by reducing the original
and dividing the sheet into areas for each page.
Page Layout
Specify a number of pages of the original to print on a single sheet, in a layout of multiple pages per sheet.
Note
• You can print up to 16 pages of the original on a single sheet.
• You can also change the page layout order and print page boundary lines, as desired.
Important
• This function cannot be combined with the following options.
• Borderless Printing
• Resizing to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)
• Scaling Originals (Windows)
• Banner Printing (Windows)
For instructions on printing multiple pages per sheet, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
• Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows) (→P.318)
• Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X) (→P.320)
Enhanced Printing Options 317
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows)
This topic describes how to print four pages of originals together on a single sheet based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A3 (297.0×420.0 mm [11.7×16.5 in])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
7.
In A Page Size, click the size of the original as specied in the application software. In this case,
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
8.
Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.
318 Enhanced Printing Options
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
9.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm).
10.
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
11.
12.
Select the A Page Layout check box.
Click 4 Pages/Sheet in the B Page Layout list.
Note
• You can select the layout order for placing four pages on a sheet and a frame border in the Page
Layout Printing dialog box by clicking C Set.
13.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
Enhanced Printing Options 319
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print four pages of originals together on a single sheet based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
Click 4.0 in the A Pages per Sheet list.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A3.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Layout pane.
Note
• You can choose the layout order and specify a boundary line for the four pages in B Layout
Direction and C Border (or Border).
320 Enhanced Printing Options
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
8.
Access the Main pane.
9.
10.
11.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
12.
Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Enhanced Printing Options 321
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
13.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
14.
Make sure C Page Size shows the original size as specied in C Paper Size in the Page
Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A3.
15.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
322 Enhanced Printing Options
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Posters in Sections
You can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you
can create a poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer.
Page Layout
Choose poster printing.
For instructions on printing large posters, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer
and operating system.
• Printing Large Posters (Windows) (→P.324)
Note
• This method of poster printing is supported in Windows.
Enhanced Printing Options 323
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Large Posters (Windows)
You can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you can
create a poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer. This topic describes how to enlarge
an A2 original for printing it in sections on four sheets, based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Poster
Page size: A2 (420.0×594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])
Paper: Sheets ( Manual)
Paper Type: Glossy Paper
Paper size: A2 (420.0×594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click Poster (Graphic Image) in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
324 Enhanced Printing Options
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
7.
In A Page Size, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case, click
ISO A2.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Click Manual in the L Paper Source list.
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
Select the A Page Layout check box.
Click Poster (2 x 2) in the B Page Layout list.
Note
• Follow the steps below to print only a portion of the poster as divided for printing.
1. Click C Set under B Page Layout to display the Pages to Print dialog box.
2. On the Pages to Print dialog box, clear the check boxes of the portion you do not want to print.
3. Click OK to close the Pages to Print dialog box.
12.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
Enhanced Printing Options 325
Centering originals
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls
You can print originals centered on a page-for example, if the paper is larger than the original, or if you
are reducing the original.
Centering originals relative to roll paper width
If you use originals smaller than the roll paper width, you can center them relative to the width when printing.
Print Centered
Aligns the center of the original with the center of the roll, relative to the width.
For instructions on centering originals when printing on rolls, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for
your computer and operating system.
• Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows) (→P.327)
• Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X) (→P.329)
326 Enhanced Printing Options
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows)
This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
7.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
Enhanced Printing Options 327
Centering originals
8.
9.
Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A3/A4 Roll
(297.0mm).
10.
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
11.
12.
Select the G Print Centered check box.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
328 Enhanced Printing Options
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.00 mm [11.7 in])
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the print target in the B Format for list.
7.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In C Paper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 329
Centering originals
9.
10.
11.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
10-in. Roll.
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
330 Enhanced Printing Options
Centering originals
12.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
13.
14.
Select the J Print Centered check box.
Conrm the print settings, and click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
Enhanced Printing Options 331
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets
You can print originals centered on a page-for example, if the paper is larger than the original, or if you
are reducing the original.
Centering originals on sheets
If you use paper larger than the original size or print originals after reduction, the printed images may be
aligned in the upper-left corner of the paper. In this case, you can center originals on sheets when printing.
Print Centered
Aligns the center of the original with the center of the sheet.
For instructions on centering originals when printing on sheets, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for
your computer and operating system.
• Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows) (→P.333)
• Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X) (→P.335)
332 Enhanced Printing Options
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows)
This topic describes how to reduce an original 50% for printing centered on a sheet.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Sheets ( Manual)
Paper Type: Plain Paper
Paper size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
7.
In A Page Size, click the size of the original as specied in the application software. In this case,
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Select the type of document in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
8.
Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Enhanced Printing Options 333
Centering originals
9.
10.
11.
12.
Click Match Page Size in the G Media Size list.
13.
14.
Select the G Print Centered check box.
Click F Scaling and enter “50”.
Click Manual in the L Paper Source list.
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
Important
• If you have selected Manual as the media source but have not loaded the paper yet, follow the
instructions on the printer control panel to complete the size setting before loading the paper.
334 Enhanced Printing Options
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to center originals for printing on sheets, based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4/Letter
Paper: Sheets
Paper type: Plain Paper
Paper size: Non-standard
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
6.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
In the application software menu, choose Print.
Access the Main pane.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 335
Centering originals
8.
9.
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Manual in the A Paper Source list.
Make sure C Page Size shows the original size as specied in C Paper Size in the Page
Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
11.
12.
Select the J Print Centered check box.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
Important
• If you have selected Manual as the media source but have not loaded the paper yet, follow the
instructions on the printer control panel to complete the size setting before loading the paper.
336 Enhanced Printing Options
Conserving roll paper
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees
You can conserve roll paper by specifying particular settings as suitable for your original.
Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper)
When originals are printed in portrait orientation, the original is rotated 90 degrees before printing if it ts
within the roll width. This enables you to conserve paper.
Important
• If the page would exceed the roll paper width after rotation, use this function with Scale to t Roll
Paper Width to print rotated pages.
For tips on conserving roll paper, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating
system.
• Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows) (→P.338)
• Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS X) (→P.340)
Enhanced Printing Options 337
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees
(Windows)
This topic describes how to conserve paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the
following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3×11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])
This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3×11.7 in) original in portrait
orientation 90 degrees to t within the width of A3/A4 roll paper (297.0 mm [11.7 in]), which enables you to
conserve paper.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
338 Enhanced Printing Options
Conserving roll paper
6.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
7.
8.
Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A3/A4 Roll
(297.0mm).
9.
10.
Select the K Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) check box.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
Enhanced Printing Options 339
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees
(Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to conserve roll paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the
following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page Size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])
This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in) original in portrait
orientation 90 degrees to t within the width of A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in]), which enables you to conserve
paper.
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
340 Enhanced Printing Options
Conserving roll paper
8.
9.
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Paper Width -in this case, ISO
A3/A4 (297.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 341
Conserving roll paper
11.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
12.
13.
Select the L Rotate Page 90 degrees check box.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
342 Enhanced Printing Options
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top
and Bottom Margins
You can conserve roll paper by specifying particular settings as suitable for your original.
No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper)
You can print without feeding the paper for blank portions of originals if there are top and bottom margins in
originals. This enables you to conserve as much paper as the size of the margins.
Important
• Printing without the top and bottom margins is not supported in the following cases.
• Banner printing
• If you have chosen poster as the type of page layout
Note
• Even during borderless printing, you can print without the top and bottom margins.
• Printing without the top and bottom margins may cause inconsistency in the size of printed documents,
depending on the layout of images or text in your originals.
For tips on conserving roll paper, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating
system.
• Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows) (→P.344)
• Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X) (→P.346)
Enhanced Printing Options 343
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top
and Bottom Margins (Windows)
This topic describes how to conserve roll paper when printing originals that have a top and bottom margin,
based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
6.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
344 Enhanced Printing Options
Conserving roll paper
7.
8.
Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A3/A4 Roll
(297.0mm).
9.
10.
11.
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
Select the I No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper) check box.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
Enhanced Printing Options 345
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top
and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to conserve roll paper when printing originals that have a top and bottom margin,
based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the print target in the B Format for list.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In C Paper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
346 Enhanced Printing Options
Conserving roll paper
8.
9.
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Paper Width -in this case, ISO
A3/A4 (297.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 347
Conserving roll paper
11.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
12.
13.
Select the K No Spaces at Top or Bottom check box.
Conrm the print settings, and click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
348 Enhanced Printing Options
Checking Images Before Printing
Checking Images Before Printing
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
You can check the print layout on the preview screen.
Open Preview When Print Job Starts (Windows)
While viewing the preview screen, you can also adjust orientation or other settings, and your changes will be
instantly applied on the preview screen.
Note
• Under some settings and in some environments, PageComposer may be started.
Enhanced Printing Options 349
Checking Images Before Printing
Preview (Macintosh)
While viewing the preview screen, you can also adjust layout or size settings, and your changes will be
instantly applied on the preview screen.
Important
• The driver must be installed from the User Software CD-ROM to use this function.
For instructions on how to check the layout before printing, refer to the following topics:
• Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Windows) (→P.351)
• Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Mac OS X) (→P.353)
350 Enhanced Printing Options
Checking Images Before Printing
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
(Windows)
This topic describes how to preview images of print jobs before actually printing them.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
Select the L Open Preview When Print Job Starts check box.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
After you click OK, when you print a job, the imagePROGRAF Preview window will be displayed.
Note
• If PageComposer is running, access the Special Settings dialog box from the Layout sheet and
clear Enable Preview Switching.
Enhanced Printing Options 351
Checking Images Before Printing
6.
7.
On the main window, you can check the layout and change settings as needed.
To print, click Start Printing in the File menu.
Note
• For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, see Preview .
352 Enhanced Printing Options
Checking Images Before Printing
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Mac
OS X)
This topic describes how to check the layout before printing using the Preview function.
1.
2.
Choose Print in the application menu.
3.
The Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window is displayed.
4.
5.
Check the layout and adjust settings in the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window as desired.
Click PDF and select Canon imagePROGRAF Preview.
Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview menu.
Note
• For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, refer to imagePROGRAF Preview Guide .
Enhanced Printing Options 353
Other useful settings
Other useful settings
Printing With Watermarks
You can add watermarks (background images) to documents that require special handling.
Watermark
Watermarks are applied to all pages of your document.
Important
• Watermarks are not printed if you select poster as the type of page layout.
The following watermarks are provided:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CONFIDENTIAL
COPY
DRAFT
FILE COPY
FINAL
PRELIMINARY
PROOF
TOP SECRET
You can also create your own watermarks. Specify the following options to customize your watermark.
• Watermark string: Specify the font, size, color, and so on. Surround the watermark with a frame,
if desired.
• Watermark position: Specify the position on the page, the angle, and so on.
• Watermark printing method: Specify whether to print the watermark superimposed or under the
document image. You can also print the watermark only on the rst page, if desired.
Note
• Watermarks are supported in Windows.
• In addition to the provided watermarks, you can create up to 50 original watermarks in Windows.
For detailed instructions on printing with watermarks, refer to the following topics:
• Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows) (→P.355)
354 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on
(Windows)
This topic describes how to print ofce documents with a watermark (in this case, “FILE COPY”) based on
the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: CAD drawing
Page size: A2 (420.0 × 594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Line Drawing) in the E Print
Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View Settings.
Enhanced Printing Options 355
Other useful settings
6.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
7.
In A Page Size, click the size of the original as specied in the application software. In this case,
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
8.
9.
Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm).
10.
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
11.
12.
Select the D Watermark check box.
Click FILE COPY in the E Watermarks list.
Note
• To create your own, original watermark, click F Edit Watermark. Refer to the printer driver help for
instructions on modifying watermarks to create your own.
13.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
356 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation
You can specify the original orientation to match the orientation of the paper for printing.
Orientation
Paper is usually loaded in the printer in portrait orientation. When you have an original in landscape
orientation, you can specify the printing orientation so that the original is printed in landscape orientation.
Rotate 180 degrees
The original is rotated 180 degrees to print it upside down.
Mirror
A mirror image of the original is printed.
For instructions on specifying the original orientation before printing, refer to the following topics, as
appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows) (→P.358)
• Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS X) (→P.360)
Enhanced Printing Options 357
Other useful settings
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation (Windows)
This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation, based
on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: An original in landscape orientation
Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
358 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
7.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
8.
9.
10.
In H Orientation, click J Landscape.
Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm).
11.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
Enhanced Printing Options 359
Other useful settings
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation, based
on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: An original in landscape orientation
Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
8.
9.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In the C Paper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
In D Orientation, click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
360 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
11.
12.
Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 361
Other useful settings
13.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
14.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
362 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
Using Favorites
You can register print settings as Favorites to reuse settings from a particular job that met your expectations,
or settings for a particular page size that you will use repeatedly.
Favorites
Registering a favorite for later use. You can choose the settings you have registered from a list before printing,
and you can check the settings details.
Note
• You can also save the favorite settings as les. Using these les is a convenient way to print under the
same conditions on another computer. (In Windows.)
For instructions on using favorites to print, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer
and operating system.
• Using Favorites (Windows) (→P.364)
• Using Favorites (Mac OS X) (→P.366)
Enhanced Printing Options 363
Other useful settings
Using Favorites (Windows)
This topic describes how to register favorites and print using favorite settings.
Registering a favorite
Follow the steps below to save the current print settings as a favorite.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Choose Print in the application menu.
5.
6.
Click H Add to display the Add dialog box.
7.
Click OK to close the Add dialog box.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Complete the print settings.
Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.
Complete the following settings in the Add dialog box.
• Enter a desired name in Name, such as “Photos for Presentations” or “Monthly Report.”
• Choose a tting icon for these print settings in the Icon list.
• In Comment, enter a description of the favorite to be added, as desired.
The favorite you have added is now displayed in A Favorites.
Note
• To save a favorite as a le, click J Export and specify the le to save.
364 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
Printing using the favorite
Follow the steps below to print using the favorite you have registered.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
In the A Favorites, choose the favorite you registered.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.
Note
• To import a favorite, click I Import and specify the favorite le.
5.
6.
Click D Apply Favorite to replace the favorite settings with the current print settings.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
Enhanced Printing Options 365
Other useful settings
Using Favorites (Mac OS X)
You can use the Presets function in Mac OS X for favorite-based printing.
Note
• In the printing dialog box, click Save As in the Presets list to save the current print settings. This is a
standard feature of the operating system. For details, refer to the Mac OS documentation.
366 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing
Roll paper can be automatically cut after printing.
Note
• It may not be possible to cut certain types of paper, such as adhesive paper. For details on types of
paper that cannot be used with the auto cut feature, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)
Automatic Cutting
Roll paper is cut automatically after printing. If you prefer, you can print continuously without cutting the
roll, or you can print a cut line.
For instructions on cutting roll paper after printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
• Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows) (→P.368)
• Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X) (→P.369)
Enhanced Printing Options 367
Other useful settings
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows)
This topic describes how to cut roll paper automatically (using the auto cut function) after printing, as well as
how to print a cut line to cut the paper manually.
Note
• Auto cut function is activated on the printer by factory default and when the printer driver is installed.
Follow the steps below to reactivate the function after it is disabled, or to change the setting for printing a
cut line instead.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.
6.
To enable automatic cutting, click Yes in the A Automatic Cutting list. If you prefer to cut the
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Click N Auto Cut to display the Automatic Cutting Settingsdialog box.
paper later yourself, click Print Cut Guideline.
7.
8.
Click OK to close the Automatic Cutting Settings dialog box.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
Roll paper will be automatically cut after printing.
368 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to cut roll paper automatically (using the auto cut function) after printing, as well as how
to print a cut line to cut the paper manually.
Note
• The auto cut function is activated on the printer by factory default and when the printer driver is installed.
Follow the steps below to reactivate the function once disabled, or select the setting for printing a
cut guideline instead.
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.
Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Enhanced Printing Options 369
Other useful settings
8.
Access the Main pane.
9.
10.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
11.
To enable automatic cutting, click Printer Default in the H Automatic Cutting list. If you prefer
Click C Set to display the Paper Detailed Settingsdialog box.
to cut the paper later yourself, click Print Cut Guideline.
Important
• If the automatic cut function has been deactivated on the printer, change the auto cut setting on the
printer Control Panel.
12.
13.
Click OK to close the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box.
Conrm the print settings, and click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
370 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
Printing in Ideal Colors for Light in the Viewing
Environment
You can print in the colors that look best when viewed under the light where the printed image will be displayed.
There are two ways to adjust the color tone for the ambient light, as follows.
By selecting color tones on Charts before printing
On the printed Chart, note the number of the set of colors with the desired color tone and enter this number in
the printer driver before printing.
Important
•
•
•
•
This function requires that the Light Source Check Tool be installed.
You can install the Light Source Check Tool from the User Software CD-ROM.
This function is only supported in Windows and Mac OS X 10.4 or later.
The colors in this function may differ slightly depending on the system software used (Windows 32/64
bit or Macintosh).
For instructions on selecting color tones on Charts before printing, refer to the following topic:
• Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing (Windows) (→P.372)
• Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing (Mac OS X) (→P.376)
Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light
Measure the light level in the viewing environment and enter the results in the printer driver before printing.
Important
•
•
•
•
•
This function requires the i1 spectrophotometer. The Light Source Measure Tool must also be installed.
You can install the Light Source Measure Tool from the User Software CD-ROM.
For a list of supported i1 devices, refer to the manual provided with the Light Source Measure Tool.
This function is only supported in Windows and Mac OS X 10.4 or later.
The colors in this function may differ slightly depending on the system software used (Windows 32/64
bit or Macintosh).
For instructions on measuring light levels before printing, refer to the following topic:
• Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light (Windows) (→P.380)
• Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light (Mac OS X) (→P.383)
Enhanced Printing Options 371
Other useful settings
Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing
(Windows)
Print Charts, note the number of the chart with your desired color tone, and enter this number in the printer
driver before printing.
Important
• This function requires that the Light Source Check Tool be installed.
• You can install the Light Source Check Tool from the User Software CD-ROM.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded (for example, Glossy Photo
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Paper).
Important
• Ambient light matching may not be available, depending on the type of paper used. For more
information, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)
372 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
5.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
6.
In F Print Quality, click Highest or High.
Important
• Ambient Light Adjust is only available when the F Print Quality is set to Highest or High.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Click Color in the G Color Mode list.
Click H Color Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Click the Matching tab to display the Matching sheet.
Make sure Driver Matching Mode (Kyuanos) is selected in A Matching Mode.
Note
• To specify monitor matching, select Monitor Matching in B Matching Method. In this case,
select the same color space as when the le was opened in C Color Space and the monitor color
temperature in D Monitor White Point.
11.
Select E Use ambient light adjustment.
Enhanced Printing Options 373
Other useful settings
12.
Click F Ambient Light Adjust to display the Ambient Light Adjust dialog box.
13.
Conrm that By selecting a chart number is selected in A Setting Method.
If it is not selected already, select it.
14.
Click B Print Chart.
Light Source Check Tool now starts up.
374 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
15.
Check the settings and click Print.
The Chart is printed.
16.
In the viewing environment, determine the number of the set of images on the Chart in which all
four vertical images have the best overall color tone.
Note
• Choose the number of the set of images in which the people, the blue of the sky, and the red of
the strawberries look the most natural overall.
17.
In the Ambient Light Adjust dialog box, select the number of your preferred chart in C Chart
Number.
18.
If Matching Method is set to Monitor Matching on the Matching sheet, enter the D Color
Temperature and E Illuminance as measured during monitor calibration.
19.
20.
Click OK.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Enhanced Printing Options 375
Other useful settings
Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing (Mac
OS X)
Print Charts, note the number of the chart with your desired color tone, and enter this number in the printer
driver before printing.
Important
• This function requires that the Light Source Check Tool be installed.
• You can install the Light Source Check Tool from the User Software CD-ROM.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded (for example, Glossy Photo
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.454)
Make sure the Main panel is displayed.
Paper).
Important
• Ambient light matching may not be available, depending on the type of paper used. For more
information, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)
376 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
5.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
6.
In F Print Quality, click Highest or High.
Important
• Ambient Light Adjust is only available when the F Print Quality is set to Highest or High.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Click Color in the H Color Mode list.
Click I Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Click the Matching tab to display the Matching panel.
Make sure Driver Matching Mode (Kyuanos) is selected in A Matching Mode.
Note
• To specify monitor matching, select Monitor Matching in B Matching Method . In this case,
select the same color space as when the le was opened in C Color Space and the monitor color
temperature in D Monitor White Point.
Enhanced Printing Options 377
Other useful settings
11.
12.
Select E Use ambient light adjustment.
13.
Conrm that By selecting a chart number is selected in A Setting Method.
Click F Ambient Light Adjust to display the Ambient Light Adjust dialog box.
If it is not selected already, select it.
14.
Click B Print Chart.
Light Source Check Tool now starts up.
378 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
15.
Check the settings and click Print.
The Chart is printed.
16.
In the viewing environment, determine the number of the set of images on the Chart in which all
four vertical images have the best overall color tone.
Note
• Choose the number of the set of images in which the people, the blue of the sky, and the red of
the strawberries look the most natural overall.
17.
In the Ambient Light Adjust dialog box, select the number of your preferred chart in C Chart
Number.
18.
If Matching Method is set to Monitor Matching on the Matching panel, enter the D Color
Temperature and E Illuminance as measured during monitor calibration.
19.
20.
Click OK.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Enhanced Printing Options 379
Other useful settings
Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light
(Windows)
Measure the light level in the viewing environment and enter the results in the printer driver before printing.
Important
• This function requires the i1 spectrophotometer. The Light Source Measure Tool must also be installed.
• You can install the Light Source Measure Tool from the User Software CD-ROM.
• For a list of supported i1 devices, refer to the manual provided with the Light Source Measure Tool.
1.
Using the i1 spectrophotometer and the Light Source Measure Tool, determine the Lighting
Source Type, Color Temperature, and Illuminance in the viewing environment.
Note
• For detailed instructions on the i1 and Light Source Measure Tool, refer to the provided instructions.
2.
3.
4.
Choose Print in the application menu.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded (for example, Glossy Photo
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Paper).
Important
• Ambient light matching may not be available, depending on the type of paper used. For more
information, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)
380 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
6.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
7.
In F Print Quality, click Highest or High.
Important
• Ambient Light Adjust is only available when the F Print Quality is set to Highest or High.
8.
9.
10.
Click Color in the G Color Mode list.
11.
Make sure Driver Matching Mode (Kyuanos) is selected in A Matching Mode.
Click H Color Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Click the Matching tab to display the Matching sheet.
Note
• To specify monitor matching, select Monitor Matching in B Matching Method. In this case,
select the same color space as when the le was opened in C Color Space and the monitor color
temperature in D Monitor White Point.
12.
Select E Use ambient light adjustment.
Enhanced Printing Options 381
Other useful settings
13.
Click F Ambient Light Adjust to display the Ambient Light Adjust dialog box.
14.
15.
Select By entering values directly in A Setting Method.
Select the B Lighting Source Type and D Color Temperature determined in step 1.
If you have selected Monitor Matching in Matching Method on the Matching sheet, also
select E Illuminance.
Note
• If you will print repeatedly using the settings values you set this one time, we recommend completing
the settings by accessing the printer driver dialog box from the operating system menu. (→P.406)
16.
17.
Click OK.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
382 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light
(Mac OS X)
Measure the light level in the viewing environment and enter the results in the printer driver before printing.
Important
• This function requires the i1 spectrophotometer. The Light Source Measure Tool must also be installed.
• You can install the Light Source Measure Tool from the User Software CD-ROM.
• For a list of supported i1 devices, refer to the manual provided with the Light Source Measure Tool.
1.
Using the i1 spectrophotometer and the Light Source Measure Tool, determine the Lighting
Source Type, Color Temperature, and Illuminance in the viewing environment.
Note
• For detailed instructions on the i1 and Light Source Measure Tool, refer to the provided instructions.
2.
3.
4.
Choose Print in the application menu.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded (for example, Glossy Photo
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.454)
Make sure the Main panel is displayed.
Paper).
Important
• Ambient light matching may not be available, depending on the type of paper used. For more
information, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)
Enhanced Printing Options 383
Other useful settings
6.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
7.
In F Print Quality, click Highest or High.
Important
• Ambient Light Adjust is only available when the F Print Quality is set to Highest or High.
8.
9.
10.
Click Color in the H Color Mode list.
11.
Make sure Driver Matching Mode (Kyuanos) is selected in A Matching Mode.
Click I Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Click the Matching tab to display the Matching panel.
Note
• To specify monitor matching, select Monitor Matching in B Matching Method . In this case,
select the same color space as when the le was opened in C Color Space and the monitor color
temperature in D Monitor White Point.
384 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
12.
13.
Select E Use ambient light adjustment.
14.
15.
Select By entering values directly in A Setting Method.
Click F Ambient Light Adjust to display the Ambient Light Adjust dialog box.
Select the B Lighting Source Type and D Color Temperature determined in step 1.
If you have selected Monitor Matching in Matching Method on the Matching panel, also
select E Illuminance.
16.
17.
Click OK.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Enhanced Printing Options 385
Other useful settings
Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors
Adjusting the colors printed so that they more closely match the colors displayed on the monitor is called "monitor
matching." Using this mode requires adjustment or conguration of the settings of your monitor, the source
application, the le for printing, and the printer driver.
Important
• Monitor matching may not be applied, or these settings may not be congurable or adjustable,
depending on your monitor and the source application.
Note
• Printing in exactly the same colors as displayed on the monitor may not be possible due to differences in
the monitor and printer color gamuts.
• Calibrating your monitor requires a measuring device.
• Because colors appear different under sunlight at different times of day, we recommend following
this procedure in a room not exposed to sunlight.
386 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
Monitor Matching
The sequence in monitor matching is as follows.
1.
Calibrate the printer.
Calibration improves color consistency by compensating for slight differences in how color
appears due to individual variation among printheads or conditions in various printing
environments.
(→P.588)
2.
Calibrate the monitor.
Normally, you can use a colorimeter such as the i1-Display.
Set the white point to 6500 K or 5000 K, the gamma to 2.2, and the brightness to 120 cd, and
activate light source measurement.
The exact procedure varies depending on your monitor and measurement device.
3.
Open the le to print and congure settings in the source application.
Display the le in the sRGB or Adobe RGB color space.
Congure settings to prevent color conversion by the application.
In Photoshop CS3, for example, select Color Management in the Print dialog box, and then
select No Color Management in Color Handling.
4.
Congure and adjust printer driver settings.
Select Monitor Matching in Matching Method. Specify the Monitor White Point set during
monitor calibration and the Color Temperature and Illuminance measured in the ambient light.
In Color Space, select the color space used when displaying the le in the source application.
If you own an i1-Pro, using Light Source Measure Tool enables more precision measurement
of the ambient light.
Note
• If you will print repeatedly using the settings values you set this one time, we recommend completing
the settings by accessing the printer driver dialog box from the operating system menu. (→P.406)
For instructions on conguring printer driver settings for monitor matching, refer to the following topic, as
appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors (Windows) (→P.388)
• Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors (Mac OS X) (→P.391)
Enhanced Printing Options 387
Other useful settings
Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors (Windows)
By calibrating your monitor and conguring settings in the source application in advance, you can complete
settings to print in colors that are as close as possible to the colors displayed on the monitor.
Important
• Before using this feature, you must calibrate the monitor and congure settings in the source application.
(→P.386)
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded (for example, Glossy Photo
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Paper).
Important
• Ambient light matching may not be available, depending on the type of paper used. For more
information, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)
388 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
5.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
6.
In F Print Quality, click Highest or High.
Important
• Ambient Light Adjust is only available when the F Print Quality is set to Highest or High.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Click Color in the G Color Mode list.
Click H Color Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Click the Matching tab to display the Matching sheet.
Make sure Driver Matching Mode (Kyuanos) is selected in A Matching Mode.
In B Matching Method, select Monitor Matching.
In C Color Space, select the color space used when displaying the le in the source application.
Enhanced Printing Options 389
Other useful settings
13.
In D Monitor White Point, select the white point set on the monitor.
Note
• For greater precision in monitor matching, we recommend conguring the settings for ambient light
matching. (→P.371)
14.
15.
Click OK.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
390 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors (Mac OS X)
By calibrating your monitor and conguring settings in the source application in advance, you can complete
settings to print in colors that are as close as possible to the colors displayed on the monitor.
Important
• Before using this feature, you must calibrate the monitor and congure settings in the source application.
(→P.386)
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded (for example, Glossy Photo
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.454)
Make sure the Main panel is displayed.
Paper).
Important
• Ambient light matching may not be available, depending on the type of paper used. For more
information, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)
Enhanced Printing Options 391
Other useful settings
5.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
6.
In F Print Quality, click Highest or High.
Important
• Ambient Light Adjust is only available when the F Print Quality is set to Highest or High.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Click Color in the H Color Mode list.
Click I Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Click the Matching tab to display the Matching panel.
Make sure Driver Matching Mode (Kyuanos) is selected in A Matching Mode.
In B Matching Method , select Monitor Matching.
In C Color Space, select the color space used when displaying the le in the source application.
392 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
13.
In D Monitor White Point, select the white point set on the monitor.
Note
• For greater precision in monitor matching, we recommend conguring the settings for ambient light
matching. (→P.371)
14.
15.
Click OK.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Enhanced Printing Options 393
Printer Driver
Windows Software
Printer Driver
Printer Driver Settings (Windows)
For instructions on accessing the Windows printer driver, refer to the following topics.
• Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) (→P.404)
• Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows) (→P.406)
For information on the Windows printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.
• Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.408)
You can specify the type of paper, color processing, print quality, print preview, and other settings.
Choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or Advanced
Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows) (→P.412)
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Windows) (→P.413)
Color Adjustment Sheet: Color (Windows) (→P.414)
Matching Sheet (Windows) (→P.416)
Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome (Windows) (→P.420)
Gray Adjustment Sheet (Windows) (→P.422)
• Page Setup Sheet (Windows) (→P.423)
You can specify the page size of the original, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, the
orientation, the paper size and feed source, and automatic cutting.
• Paper Size Options Dialog Box (Windows) (→P.425)
• Layout Sheet (Windows) (→P.426)
You can specify the page layout, watermarks, the orientation, the number of copies, and print processing
options.
• Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows) (→P.429)
• Favorites Sheet (Windows) (→P.430)
Groups of print settings you select on each sheet can be saved as a favorite. Favorites you have added
can be edited or used at the time of printing as desired.
394 Windows Software
Printer Driver
• Utility Sheet (Windows) (→P.432)
You can specify settings related to maintenance for the Printhead and feed amount, as well as settings
for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.
• Support Sheet (Windows) (→P.433)
You can view support information and the user manual.
• Device Settings Sheet (Windows) (→P.434)
You can display settings for optional equipment installed on the printer and see the printer driver version.
imagePROGRAF Free Layout is a feature for freely arranging originals from various source applications on a
single page as desired before printing. For details, see Free Layout .
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy is a feature for automatic enlargement and printing of scanned
originals from a Color imageRUNNER. For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .
Windows Software 395
Printer Driver
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows)
If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.
Important
• Always specify the same type and size of paper in the printer menu and printer driver.
If the type and size do not match, an error message will be displayed and printing is not possible.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
6.
7.
In the A Page Size list, select the size of the original as specied in the application.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
In the L Paper Source list, select how paper is supplied.
396 Windows Software
Printer Driver
8.
If you have selected Roll Paper in L Paper Source, select the width of the loaded roll in M Roll
Paper Width.
Note
• A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P.394)
Windows Software 397
Printer Driver
Conrming Print Settings (Windows)
There are two ways to conrm the print settings, as follows.
• Checking a preview of the settings (→P.398)
• Checking a print preview (→P.399)
Checking a preview of the settings
A preview of the settings is displayed on the left side of the Main, Page Setup, and Layout sheets. By
checking illustrations and numerical values in the preview, you can conrm current settings for the page
size, orientation, paper source, layout, and so on.
Display Area
Information Displayed
P Top illustrations
Illustrations indicate the orientation, page layout, borderless printing
selection, color mode, and other settings information.
Q Middle, bordered area
The page size, paper size, and method and percentage of enlargement
or reduction are indicated.
R Bottom illustrations
Illustrations indicate the feed source, orientation, borderless printing
selection, and other settings information.
Note
• To conrm the Print Target specied in Easy Settings, click F View Settings on the Main sheet to
display the View Settings dialog box.
398 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Checking a print preview
You can check an image of the original just as it will be printed.
When you activate this feature, imagePROGRAF Preview or PageComposer is started before printing.
Conrming how documents will be printed this way helps prevent printing errors.
For details on print previews, see “Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing”. (→P.349)
Windows Software 399
Printer Driver
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
(Windows)
This topic describes how to preview images of print jobs before actually printing them.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
Select the L Open Preview When Print Job Starts check box.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
After you click OK, when you print a job, the imagePROGRAF Preview window will be displayed.
Note
• If PageComposer is running, access the Special Settings dialog box from the Layout sheet and
clear Enable Preview Switching.
400 Windows Software
Printer Driver
6.
7.
On the main window, you can check the layout and change settings as needed.
To print, click Start Printing in the File menu.
Note
• For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, see Preview .
Windows Software 401
Printer Driver
Using Favorites (Windows)
This topic describes how to register favorites and print using favorite settings.
Registering a favorite
Follow the steps below to save the current print settings as a favorite.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Choose Print in the application menu.
5.
6.
Click H Add to display the Add dialog box.
7.
Click OK to close the Add dialog box.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Complete the print settings.
Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.
Complete the following settings in the Add dialog box.
• Enter a desired name in Name, such as “Photos for Presentations” or “Monthly Report.”
• Choose a tting icon for these print settings in the Icon list.
• In Comment, enter a description of the favorite to be added, as desired.
The favorite you have added is now displayed in A Favorites.
Note
• To save a favorite as a le, click J Export and specify the le to save.
402 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Printing using the favorite
Follow the steps below to print using the favorite you have registered.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
In the A Favorites, choose the favorite you registered.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.
Note
• To import a favorite, click I Import and specify the favorite le.
5.
6.
Click D Apply Favorite to replace the favorite settings with the current print settings.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
Windows Software 403
Printer Driver
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from
Applications (Windows)
1.
2.
Choose Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.
Select the printer, and then display the printer driver dialog box.
Note
• The dialog box for specifying printing conditions varies depending on the source application. In some
cases, when you select the printer, a sheet for conguring the printer driver is added to the dialog box.
In the following case, click Preferences.
■Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application software
Six sheets of print settings are displayed by the printer driver: Main, Page Setup, Layout,
Favorites, Utility, and Support.
Note
• The titles of dialog boxes may vary depending on the application, and sheets other than these
six sheets may be displayed.
404 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Important
• If you access the printer driver dialog box from the source application, changes you make to the settings
will only apply temporarily to that application. Because these are sizes you specify temporarily in the
printer driver, the sizes will not be available after you exit the application.
• You can also access the printer driver dialog box from the Windows system menu.
see “Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows)”. (→P.406)
Windows Software 405
Printer Driver
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the
Operating System Menu (Windows)
1.
2.
Click start > Printers and Faxes (or Printers ).
3.
Click Printing Preferences to display the Printing Preferences dialog box, titled with the
Select the printer, and then display the printer properties dialog box.
name of this printer.
Note
• The Device Settings sheet is also an extension of the printer driver. (→P.434)
406 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Six sheets of print settings are displayed by the printer driver: Main, Page Setup, Layout,
Favorites, Utility, and Support.
Important
• If you access the printer driver dialog box from the operating system menu, changes you make to the
settings will apply to all applications you use for printing.
• You can also access the printer driver dialog box from applications.
see “Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows)”. (→P.404)
Windows Software 407
Printer Driver
Main Sheet (Windows)
The following settings are available on the Main sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer
driver help.
Note
• On the Main sheet, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the print target, or
switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.
Conguration using Easy Settings
Setting Item
A Media Type
Description
Select the paper type.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the
Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)
B Get Information
Click to display the Get Information dialog box, which shows media types
and sizes by media source, as specied on the printer. When you select a
media source, your selection is applied to the printer driver settings for the
media source, media type, and roll width.
C Advanced Settings
Click to display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box for ink drying time
and other detailed settings based on the paper type.
E Print Target
F View Settings
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
Printing Photos and Images (→P.165)
Printing Line Drawings and Text (→P.190)
Printing Ofce Documents (→P.196)
Depending on the Media Type setting, some Print Target options may
not be available.
Click to display the View Settings dialog box, which enables you to conrm
the settings for the selected item from the E Print Target list or change the
order of items listed in E Print Target.
L Open Preview When Print Activate this option to preview the print image before printing.
Job Starts
408 Windows Software
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (→P.349)
Printer Driver
Setting Item
Description
M Status Monitor
Click to start imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, which enables you to
conrm the status of the printer and print jobs.
You can also set up email notication if printer errors occur by completing
the Email Notice settings.
For details, refer to the Status Monitor help.
N About
Click to conrm version information for the printer driver.
S Defaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
Conguration using Advanced Settings
Setting Item
A Media Type
Description
Select the paper type.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the
Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)
B Get Information
Click to display the Get Information dialog box, which shows media types
and sizes by media source, as specied on the printer. When you select a
media source, your selection is applied to the printer driver settings for the
media source, media type, and roll width.
C Advanced Settings
Click to display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box for ink drying time
and other detailed settings based on the paper type.
E Print Priority
Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
(→P.216)
F Print Quality
Choose the level of print quality.
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
(→P.216)
G Color Mode
Choose the color mode.
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
(→P.216)
The available Color Mode options vary depending on the Media Type
setting.
H Color Settings
Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color
settings.
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver (→P.206)
Windows Software 409
Printer Driver
Setting Item
Description
I Thicken Fine Lines
Activate this option to print ne lines more distinctly.
J Unidirectional Printing
Although unidirectional printing is slower, it can help prevent misaligned
lines and ensure better results.
K High-Precision Printing
Select this option for printing at the highest level of quality. However, it
takes more time than regular printing.
L Open Preview When Print Activate this option to preview the print image before printing.
Job Starts
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (→P.349)
M Status Monitor
Click to start imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, which enables you to
conrm the status of the printer and print jobs.
You can also set up email notication if printer errors occur by completing
the Email Notice settings.
For details, refer to the Status Monitor help.
N About
Click to conrm version information for the printer driver.
S Defaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
410 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Windows)
On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and
congure printer driver settings for the paper source and media type.
Note
• To display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, on the Main sheet, click Get Information by
Media Type. (→P.408)
Setting Item
A Paper Source
Description
Shows the Paper Source supported by the printer, as well as information
about the loaded paper. To update the Paper Source and media type
settings in the printer driver, select the desired Paper Source option and
click OK.
Windows Software 411
Printer Driver
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows)
The Paper Detailed Settings dialog box offers the following settings. For details on settings items, refer to
the printer driver help.
Note
• To display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main sheet, click Settings by Media
Type. (→P.408)
Setting Item
Description
A Media Type
Select the paper type.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.108)
B Drying Time
Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry, as needed. The Drying
Time setting is only valid for rolls.
(→P.133)
C Between Pages
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a page until ejecting the
paper, as needed.
D Between Scans
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a line on the page until
printing the next line, as needed.
E Roll Paper Margin for
Safety
F Near End Margin
You can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to
ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held rmly against the Platen.
Specify the length of the Near End Margin (the leading edge margin) of the
roll, as needed.
G Cut Speed
Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. You can adjust this setting
if paper is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.
H Calibration Value
You can specify whether to apply the results of calibration performed on the
printer to image processing.
I Mirror
Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print
a version of the document or image with the left and right sides inverted.
412 Windows Software
Printer Driver
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application
(Windows)
In the View Settings dialog box, you can check details of the selected printing application.
Note
• To display the View Settings dialog box, on the Main sheet, click View Settings by Print Target.
(→P.408)
Setting Item
Description
A Print Target
Shows all Print Target options (settings items for the printing application).
B Name
Identies the item selected in Print Target by its name and an icon.
C Details
Here, you can conrm detailed settings values for each listed item for the
selected Print Target.
Windows Software 413
Printer Driver
Color Adjustment Sheet: Color (Windows)
If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment sheet.
Note
• To display the Color Adjustment sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in
Advanced Settings. (→P.408)
Setting Item
Description
A Sample Type
Choose a sample image from Standard, Portrait, Landscape, or
Graphics.
B View Color Pattern
Clicking to select this check box will display the color pattern.
C Apply to Sample
Clicking to select this check box will apply the revised settings to the
sample image.
D Cyan
Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of each color.
E Magenta
F Yellow
G Gray Tone
Adjust the color tone of grays as desired. Choose Cool Black (tinged with
blue) or Warm Black (tinged with red).
H Brightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the
brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original
image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic
as it appears on the computer screen).
I Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each
other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and
reducing the Contrast softens images.
J Saturation
Adjust the color intensity as desired. Increasing the Saturation setting
makes colors more vivid, and reducing the Saturation makes colors more
subdued.
414 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Setting Item
Description
K Object Adjustment
Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which
you can specify objects subject to color adjustment.
S Defaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.206)
Object Adjustment dialog box
In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If
an original comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.
Note
• To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment sheet.
Setting Item
Description
A Image
Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.
B Graphics
Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and
circles.
C Text
Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.
Windows Software 415
Printer Driver
Matching Sheet (Windows)
On the Matching sheet, you can specify color matching to compensate for differences in the appearance of
colors on various devices.
Driver Matching Mode (Kyuanos)
The following options are available when you select Driver Matching Mode (Kyuanos) in the Matching
Mode list.
Setting Item
Description
A Matching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.
Normally, select Driver Matching Mode. For color matching based on
ICC proles, select ICC Matching Mode, Driver ICM Mode, or Host ICM
Mode, depending on your color matching system. If you prefer not to use
color matching based on the printer driver, select Off.
B Matching Method
Select the color matching method that suits the document to be printed.
Various Matching Method options are available depending on your
selection in Matching.
C Color Space
Select the applicable color space as desired.
D Monitor White Point
Enter the color temperature set on the monitor.
Displayed when the Matching Method is set to Monitor Matching.
E Use ambient light
Select this option for adjustment of colors to suit the ambient light in the
viewing environment.
adjustment
F Ambient Light Adjust
Click to display the Ambient Light Adjust dialog box, which enables you
to complete settings for printing to match the ambient light.
Note
• To display the Matching sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced
Settings, and then click the Matching sheet. (→P.408)
416 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Ambient Light Adjust
When you select By selecting a chart number in Setting Method
Setting Item
Description
A Setting Method
You can choose conguration based on the printed Chart or based on
using the i1 colorimeter.
B Print Chart
Click to start the Light Source Check Tool, for printing Charts. The Light
Source Check Tool must be installed to use this function.
C Chart Number
In Chart, select the number of the pattern with your desired colors.
D Color Temperature
Enter the Color Temperature measured during monitor calibration.
Displayed when the Matching Method is set to Monitor Matching on
the Matching sheet.
E Illuminance
Enter the Illuminance measured during monitor calibration. Displayed
when the Matching Method is set to Monitor Matching on the Matching
sheet.
When you select By entering values directly in Setting Method
Setting Item
Description
A Setting Method
You can choose conguration based on the printed Chart or based on
using the i1 colorimeter.
B Lighting Source Type
Select the light source measured using the i1 colorimeter.
D Color Temperature
Enter the Color Temperature measured using the i1 colorimeter.
E Illuminance
Enter the Illuminance measured using the i1 colorimeter.
Displayed when the Matching Method is set to Monitor Matching on
the Matching sheet.
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.206)
Windows Software 417
Printer Driver
Light Source Check Tool
The Light Source Check Tool enables you to print Chart.
Setting Item
Description
A Printer Name
The printer name is displayed here.
B Media Type
Select the paper type. For information on the types of paper compatible
with Driver Matching Mode (Kyuanos), refer to the Paper Reference
Guide. (→P.108)
C Paper Source
Choose the paper source, as desired.
Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in Media Type
in the Main sheet.
D Print
Click to print the Chart.
418 Windows Software
Printer Driver
ICC Matching Mode, Driver ICM Mode and Host ICM Mode
The following options are available when you select ICC Matching Mode, Driver ICM Mode, or Host ICM
Mode in the Matching Mode list.
Note
• To display the Matching sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced
Settings, and then click the Matching sheet. (→P.408)
Setting Item
Description
A Matching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.
B Input Prole Settings
You can select Image, Graphics, or Text. You can choose Matching
Method and Input Prole.
Various options are available depending on your selected Matching Mode.
To apply the same input prole automatically for Graphics and Text, select
Use the Same Prole for All Objects. To apply separate input proles
to Graphics and Text, clear Use the Same Prole for All Objects and
specify the individual settings.
C Printer Prole Settings
Specify the printer prole as desired. Normally, select Auto Settings.
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.206)
Windows Software 419
Printer Driver
Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome (Windows)
On the Color Adjustment sheet for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.
Note
• To display the Color Adjustment sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in
Advanced Settings. (→P.408)
Setting Item
Description
A Sample Type
Choose a sample image from Standard, Portrait, Landscape, or Graphics.
B View Color
Clicking to select this check box will display the color pattern.
Pattern
C Apply to Sample Clicking to select this check box will apply the revised settings to the sample image.
D Cyan
Not available.
E Magenta
F Yellow
G Gray Tone
Not available.
H Brightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the
printed document is lighter or darker than the original image (that is, the original
photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer screen).
I Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as
desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and reducing the Contrast
softens images.
J Saturation
Not available.
K Object
Adjustment
Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which you can
specify objects subject to color adjustment.
S Defaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.206)
420 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Object Adjustment dialog box
In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If
an original comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.
Note
• To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment sheet.
Setting Item
Description
A Image
Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.
B Graphics
Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and
circles.
C Text
Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.
Windows Software 421
Printer Driver
Gray Adjustment Sheet (Windows)
The following settings are available on the Gray Adjustment sheet.
Gray Adjustment
On the Gray Adjustment sheet, you can adjust the color balance, brightness, contrast, and other image
qualities.
Note
• To display the Gray Adjustment sheet, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.408) , select Monochrome
(Photo) by Color Mode in Advanced Settings, and then click Color Settings.
• Monochrome (Photo) is not available for all types of paper.
Setting Item
Description
A Sample
The image at left is updated to reect any changes you make to setting
items on the sheet, enabling you to check the results of adjustment.
B Sample List
Select a sample image, as desired.
C Color Balance
Click the list to select a color balance that suits the printing application.
DX
Adjust the color balance as you check the color tone in the adjustment area.
You can adjust the square area in the center by clicking or dragging it.
Drag the vertical or horizontal scroll bars for adjustment, as desired.
You can click the arrows by the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) boxes or
enter the values directly.
EY
F Brightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the
brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original
image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic
as it appears on the computer screen).
G Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each
other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and
reducing the Contrast softens images.
H Highlight
Adjust the brightness of the lightest portion.
I Shadow
Adjust the brightness of the darkest portion.
K Defaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
422 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Page Setup Sheet (Windows)
The following settings are available on the Page Setup sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the
printer driver help.
Setting Item
Description
A Page Size
Select the page size as specied in the source application.
For details on available page sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.113)
B Borderless Printing
Borderless printing is available if Roll Paper is selected in the L Paper
Source list. Choose from the following options when this setting is
activated.
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size (→P.270)
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.277)
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (→P.263)
D Fit Paper Size
Scales the document image to match the paper size.
E Scale to t Roll Paper Scales the document image to match the roll width.
Width
F Print Image with
Actual Size
Prints documents at their actual size. This function is available, when you
have selected the size same as the width of Roll Paper for either length or
width of the document from the A Page Size list.
G Paper Size
Choose the size of the paper you will print on.
Available when Fit Paper For details on available paper sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.113)
Paper sizes compatible with borderless printing are shown in the list.
Size is selected.
C Enlarged/Reduced Printing Choose from the following options when this setting is activated.
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (→P.233)
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.239)
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (→P.245)
D Fit Paper Size
Scales the document image to match the paper size.
E Fit Roll Paper Width
Scales the document image to match the roll width.
F Scaling
Resizes the document image based on a specied scaling value. Enter a
value in a range of “5-600.”
G Paper Size
Choose the size of the paper you will print on.
For details on available paper sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.113)
Windows Software 423
Printer Driver
Setting Item
Description
H Orientation
Choose the printing orientation.
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (→P.357)
K Rotate Page 90 degrees
Activate this setting to rotate the document image by 90 degrees before
printing.
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (→P.337)
(Conserve Paper)
L Paper Source
Choose the media source, as desired.
Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in Media Type
in the Main sheet.
M Roll Paper Width
Choose the roll width.
For details on available roll widths, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.113)
N Auto Cut
You can activate or deactivate automatic cutting and printing of cut lines, as
desired. Click to display the Automatic Cutting Settings dialog box.
Under A Automatic Cutting, you can specify Yes or No and Print Cut
Guideline.
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (→P.367)
P Output Method
Click to display the Output Method dialog box, which enables you to
complete the Output Method and Name of data to be saved settings.
O Size Options
Click to display the Paper Size Options dialog box, which enables you to
register additional paper sizes or select the size system for use.
S Defaults
Restores all settings on the sheet to the default values.
424 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Paper Size Options Dialog Box (Windows)
In the Paper Size Options dialog box, you can create and register your own Custom Paper Size. The sizes
you dene are listed with standard paper sizes for selection later as needed.
Note
• To display the Paper Size Options dialog box, on the Page Setup sheet, click Paper Size Options.
(→P.423)
Setting Item
Description
A Paper Size List
Shows the names and sizes of paper that can be used with the printer
driver.
B Delete
Custom paper sizes created by users can be deleted from the Paper Size
List, as needed.
However, they cannot be deleted in the following situations.
• If a standard paper size of the printer driver is selected.
• If an oversized paper size is selected.
• If a paper size in a red box is selected.
C Custom Paper Size Name
You can name Custom Paper Size as desired.
D Units
Specify the desired unit of measure for the Custom Paper Size height
and width.
E Paper Size
Specify the desired Width and Height. You can make your selection
from sizes that are compatible with Borderless Printing by selecting
Borderless Printing Size. To maintain the aspect ratio of the Width and
Height as you resize the paper, select Fix the Ratio of the Width to
Height.
F Add
Enables you to register the custom paper size you have specied or
overwrite an existing custom paper size.
G Display Series
You can limit the number of options shown in Page Size, Paper Size, and
Paper Size List.
Windows Software 425
Printer Driver
Layout Sheet (Windows)
The following settings are available on the Layout sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer
driver help le.
Setting Item
A Page Layout
C Set
D Watermark
Description
Activate this setting to select a particular page layout.
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (→P.317)
Printing Posters in Sections (→P.323)
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (→P.307)
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals (→P.441)
Click to display one of the following dialog boxes depending on the selection
in A Page Layout. In these dialog boxes, you can specify layout details and
which pages to print, as well as other settings.
• Page Layout Printing
• Pages to Print
• Free Layout Settings
Activating this option makes two settings available, E Watermarks and F
Edit Watermark.
Printing With Watermarks (→P.354)
E Watermarks
Lists the provided watermarks. Choose the watermark to print.
F Edit Watermark
Click to display the Edit Watermark dialog box for creating your own, original
watermark.
G Print Centered
Activate this setting to print document images in the center of the paper.
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (→P.326)
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (→P.332)
H Rotate 180 degrees
Activate this option to rotate document images by 180 degrees before printing.
I No Spaces at Top or
Activate this setting to print the next image skipping blank areas above and
below printable data in documents, which enables you to conserve the paper.
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins
(→P.343)
Bottom (Conserve Paper)
J Copies
Reverse Order
426 Windows Software
Enter the number of copies to print, in a range of “1-999.”
Activate this option to print pages in reverse order.
Printer Driver
Setting Item
Description
K Page Options
Click to display the Page Options dialog box, which enables you to complete
settings for printing the user name, date, or page number in the header or
footer.
M Special Settings
If the printing results are not as you expected, click this option to change how
printing is processed.
S Defaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
Windows Software 427
Printer Driver
Page Options Dialog Box (Windows)
The Page Options dialog box offers the following settings.
Note
• To display the Page Options dialog box, on the Layout sheet, click Page Options. (→P.426)
Setting Item
Description
A Print Date
Select where the date is printed, as desired. To print the time as well, select
B Print Time Also.
C Print User Name
Select where the user name is printed, as desired.
D Print Page Number
Select where the page number is printed, as desired.
E Format Settings
Click to display the Format Settings dialog box, which enables you to
complete format-related settings.
Note
• If you specify the same position for multiple items, the items are printed from left to right in this order:
date, user name, and page number.
• When you print multiple pages per sheet using Page Layout Printing or similar functions, these items
will be printed for each page.
428 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows)
If the printing results are not as you expected, you can change how printing is processed in the Special
Settings dialog box.
Note
• To display the Special Settings dialog box, on the Layout sheet, click Special Settings. (→P.426)
Setting Item
A FineZoom Settings
Description
This function is used in large-format printing. Normally, choose Auto. If
documents are not printed correctly on large-format media, it may help to
select Yes, and if ne lines are not visible or if images are distorted when
printed, it may help to select No.
B Application Color Matching You can give applications priority in color management.
Priority
C Enable Preview Switching Selecting this option will start PageComposer if you print when Open
Preview When Print Job Starts is selected on the Main sheet.
D Fast Graphic Process
If image colors are inconsistent in printed documents or if lines are printed
in varying thicknesses, clearing this option may help produce the expected
results.
Windows Software 429
Printer Driver
Favorites Sheet (Windows)
The following settings are available on the Favorites sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer
driver help.
Setting Item
Description
A Favorites
Printing favorites you have created are listed with Default Settings
favorites.
Using Favorites (→P.363)
B Settings Details
Displays details of the favorite selected in the A Favorites.
C Comment
Displays notes registered in the favorite.
D Apply Favorite
Click to change the current print settings to those of the favorite
selected in the A Favorites.
E Application Settings Priority
Activate this setting to use settings values specied in the source
application in preference to favorite settings selected in the A
Favorites, when clicking D Apply Favorite. For details on the settings
items used in preference, refer to the printer driver help.
F Delete
Click to delete the selected favorite from the A Favorites list.
G Edit
Click to display the Edit dialog box, which enables you to change the
name and icon for the favorite selected in the A Favorites list.
H Add
Click to display the Add dialog box, which enables you to add the
current print settings as a favorite.
I Import
Click to display the Open dialog box, which enables you to import
favorite settings saved as a le.
J Export
Click to display the Save As dialog box, which enables you to save the
favorite settings as a le.
430 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Setting Item
Description
K Up
Click to move the selected favorite up in the A Favorites list.
L Down
Click to move the selected favorite down in the A Favorites list.
Windows Software 431
Printer Driver
Utility Sheet (Windows)
The following settings are available on the Utility sheet. For details on the utilities, refer to the relevant
utility help.
Corresponding Utility
Button
A Maintenance
Click to start the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor,
which offers the following maintenance for the
printer.
• Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) check
• Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) cleaning
• Head alignment adjustment
• Feed amount adjustment
B Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Click to launch Color imageRUNNER Enlargement
Copy (*1) (iR enlargement copy), which enables
you to create hot folders used for Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy and assign
print settings to hot folders.
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a
Color imageRUNNER (Windows) (→P.201)
*1: For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .
432 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Support Sheet (Windows)
On the Support sheet, you can view support information and the user’s manual.
Button
Corresponding Utility
A Support Information
Click to access the Canon support webpage, where you can nd the
latest information on the printer and consumables, check for printer driver
updates, and browse other information.
B User Manual
Click to view the printer user’s manual. This function requires the user’s
manual to be installed on your computer.
C Settings Summaries
Click to display the View Settings dialog box, which enables you to conrm
the settings for the Main, Page Setup, Layout, and Favorites sheets.
Windows Software 433
Printer Driver
Device Settings Sheet (Windows)
Many settings items on the printer properties sheets are controlled by Windows applications. However, the
Device Settings sheet is for conguring the printer, and it is an extension of the printer driver.
The following settings are available on the Device Settings sheet.
Setting Item
A About
434 Windows Software
Description
You can display version information for the printer driver.
Printer Driver
Settings Summaries Dialog Box (Windows)
The Settings Summaries dialog box enables you to conrm the settings for the Main, Page Setup, Layout,
and Favorites sheets.
Button
A Copy
Corresponding Utility
Click to copy the settings information to the clipboard. You can paste
the settings information into a le created with a text editor or similar
application.
Windows Software 435
Printer Driver
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Windows)
This topic describes how to print Adobe RGB images based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Adobe RGB image created in Photoshop
Page Size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Glossy Photo Paper
Roll Paper Width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
Important
• In Photoshop, select no color-matching.
• In the printer driver settings, select Driver Matching Mode and choose Adobe RGB in Color Space.
1.
In Photoshop, create an image in the Adobe RGB color space.
Note
• The following procedures are based on the example of Photoshop CS2.
• For instructions on creating Adobe RGB images, refer to the Photoshop documentation.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Choose Print with Preview from the File menu to display the Print dialog box.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy
Make sure the setting mode is Color Management.
In the Color Handling list in Options, click No Color Management.
Click Print to display the Print dialog box.
Select the printer and click Properties to display the printer driver dialog box.
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Photo Paper.
436 Windows Software
Printer Driver
9.
10.
11.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
Click Image in the E Print Priority list.
Select the print quality in the F Print Quality list.
Note
• Options displayed in the F Print Quality list vary depending on the paper type.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Click Color in the G Color Mode list.
19.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the source application.
Click H Color Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Click the Matching tab to display the Matching sheet.
In Matching Mode, click Driver Matching Mode.
In Color Space, click Adobe RGB.
Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
In this case, click 10"x12".
20.
Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.
Windows Software 437
Printer Driver
21.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 10-in. Roll
(254.0mm), and then click OK.
22.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.398)
438 Windows Software
Status Monitor
Status Monitor
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor is a utility for checking the printer status and managing print jobs.
Two screens are available in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor : “Printer List” shows a list of printers, and
“Status Monitor” shows details for each printer.
• You can view a list of the printers for which printer drivers have been installed on your computer, printers
connected to your computer, and printers found on the network.
• Printer status can be checked in real time on a computer monitor.
• If a printer error occurs, you can investigate the corrective action immediately.
• Images of Ink Tanks are shown, with different images for various types of ink. An icon and warning
message will notify you when ink levels are low.
• The type of paper loaded in each media source is identied. You can also check to see if paper has
run out.
• This way, the utility enables you to check printer information and take care of printer maintenance
for optimal printing results.
• You can also set up automatic email notication of any printer problems or errors to email addresses you
designate in advance.
Note
• For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.
Windows Software 439
Digital Photo Front-Access
Digital Photo Front-Access
Digital Photo Front-Access
Digital Photo Front-Access is an application that links photos from Canon digital cameras and other image
les on your computer with various other applications.
• Simply select an image and click the icon of the application you want to start to launch the application.
• You can also print from Digital Photo Front-Access. In short, Digital Photo Front-Access can help you
manage images in many ways from editing to printing as an effective way to work with other applications.
• Digital Photo Front-Access also enables image retouching. For automatic retouching, select an image
for retouching and click Image Adjustment.
• Because this application automates the workow from retouching to display for all of your images, it
can save time and work in retouching.
Note
• For details, refer to the Digital Photo Front-Access help.
440 Windows Software
PosterArtist
PosterArtist
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals
You can print a variety of source documents from word-processing or spreadsheet programs or screen shots
from web browsers after composing an original with them using PosterArtist.
Important
• PosterArtist (sold separately) must be installed to use this function.
Edit Using PosterArtist
PosterArtist offers a wide range of features, including features to insert source documents in posters and
compose an original with them.
Important
• This function is only supported in Windows.
For detailed instructions on editing with PosterArtist, refer to the following topic:
• Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals (Windows) (→P.442)
Windows Software 441
PosterArtist
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals (Windows)
This topic describes how to use PosterArtist to compose originals from multiple applications, creating a poster
layout for printing.
Important
• PosterArtist (sold separately) must be installed to use this function.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
5.
6.
7.
Select the A Page Layout check box.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click in the Edit Using PosterArtist in the B Page Layout list.
When you attempt to print, PosterArtist starts up and the PageCapture window is displayed. (At
this point, the document will not be printed yet.)
8.
Choose the page to load in PosterArtist.
442 Windows Software
PosterArtist
9.
Edit and rearrange the image in the PosterArtist window as desired.
Important
• Without closing the PosterArtist window, repeat steps 1-8 to arrange originals from multiple
applications on the same page.
Note
• For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the PosterArtist Manual.
10.
Print from the PosterArtist menu.
Windows Software 443
Device Setup Utility
Device Setup Utility
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility is a utility to establish communication between the printer and
your computer by completing relevant settings. After the printer is installed, for example, you can use
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility to complete the network settings initially.
• Starting imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility will show a list of printers found on the network. In this
list, select the printer (specically, the printer’s MAC address) that you want to set up, and then congure
the basic settings from your computer, such as the printer’s IP address and the network frame type.
• You can see which printers are online in the network by checking the printer list. Communication
between your computer and these printers is possible.
Note
• We recommend that your network or printer administrator complete the setup work using
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
• For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility help.
444 Windows Software
Device Setup Utility
Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
Install imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer
as follows:
Important
• In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows Vista, you must log on with
administrative rights equivalent to the “Administrator” account.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Insert the User Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.
On the Setup Menu window, click Install Individual Software.
Click Install in imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Follow the instructions on the screen to proceed with the installation.
Windows Software 445
Device Setup Utility
Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility
From a computer running Windows, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility provided with the
printer to congure the printer’s IP address. This topic describes how to congure the IP address using
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Important
• To congure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as “Administrator”
account. We recommend that your network administrator congure the network settings.
• For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, see “Installing imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility”. (→P.445)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.
In the list of printers, select the printer to congure.
Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.
In the Setting IP Address list, choose Manual.
Enter the IP address assigned to the printer and click the Set button.
Click OK after the Conrmation message dialog box is displayed.
Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Note
• To congure the IP address automatically, choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select
DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP.
• You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway.
446 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)
For instructions on accessing the Mac OS X printer driver, refer to the following topics.
• Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Mac OS X) (→P.454)
For information on the Mac OS X printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.
• Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.455)
You can specify the media type, color processing, print quality, print preview, and other settings. Choose
Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or Advanced Settings
to complete more detailed settings as desired.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X) (→P.459)
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Mac OS X) (→P.460)
Color Settings Pane: Color (→P.461)
Matching Pane (→P.463)
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X) (→P.468)
Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.469)
• Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.470)
You can specify the page size of the original, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, the
orientation, the paper size and source, and automatic cutting.
• Utility Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.472)
You can specify settings related to maintenance for the Printhead and feed amount, as well as settings
for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.
• Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.473)
You can specify settings for how print jobs are sent to the printer.
• Support Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.474)
You can view support information and the user’s manual.
With the imagePROGRAF Free Layout feature, you can arrange originals from various source applications
on a single page before printing. For details, see the Free Layout Guide .
With the imagePROGRAF Preview feature, you can check the layout before printing and adjust layout or size
settings while viewing a preview screen. For details, see the imagePROGRAF Preview Guide .
With the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy feature, you can automatically enlarge and print scanned
originals from a Color imageRUNNER. For details, see the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Guide .
Mac OS X Software 447
Printer Driver
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X)
If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
448 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
8.
9.
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
In the A Paper Source list, select how paper is supplied.
If you have selected Cut Sheet or Manual in A Paper Source, make sure the size as selected in
Page Setup is displayed in C Page Size. If you have selected Roll Paper in A Paper Source,
make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Paper Width.
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
Note
• A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.447)
Mac OS X Software 449
Printer Driver
Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)
There are two ways to conrm what printing conditions have been specied, as follows.
• Checking a preview of the settings (→P.450)
• Checking a print preview (→P.451)
Checking a preview of the settings
A preview of the settings is displayed on the left side of the Main, Page Setup, Utility, and Additional
Settings panes.By checking images and numerical values in the preview, you can conrm current settings for
the page size, orientation, paper source, and so on.
Display Area
Information Displayed
Pane displayed when the H Images tab
is clicked
On top, illustrations indicate the page size of the original, the
paper size, orientation, layout, borderless printing selection,
color mode, and other settings information.
Under this, the page size, paper size, and method and
percentage of enlargement or reduction is displayed.
Pane displayed when the I Size tab is
clicked
Paper size details are indicated numerically.
Pane with printer and paper illustrations
Illustrations indicate the paper source, orientation, borderless
printing selection, and other settings information.
450 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Note
• To conrm the Print Target specied in Easy Settings, click F View set. on the Main pane to display
the View settings dialog box.
Checking a print preview
You can check an image of the original just as it will be printed.
Conrming the image of print jobs beforehand helps prevent printing errors.
For details on print previews, see “Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing”. (→P.349)
Mac OS X Software 451
Printer Driver
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Mac
OS X)
This topic describes how to check the layout before printing using the Preview function.
1.
2.
Choose Print in the application menu.
3.
The Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window is displayed.
4.
5.
Check the layout and adjust settings in the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window as desired.
Click PDF and select Canon imagePROGRAF Preview.
Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview menu.
Note
• For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, refer to imagePROGRAF Preview Guide .
452 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Using Favorites (Mac OS X)
You can use the Presets function in Mac OS X for favorite-based printing.
Note
• In the printing dialog box, click Save As in the Presets list to save the current print settings. This is a
standard feature of the operating system. For details, refer to the Mac OS documentation.
Mac OS X Software 453
Printer Driver
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from
Applications (Mac OS X)
1.
In the application software, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing
conditions.
Note
• This dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the
range of pages, number of copies, and so on.
2.
Select the printer in the Printer list.
3.
Click Print to start printing.
As shown in the following illustration, you can switch to other panes in this dialog box to complete
settings for various methods of printing, including enlarged and reduced printing, borderless
printing, and so on.
454 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Main Pane (Mac OS X)
The following settings are available on the Main pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer
driver help le.
Note
• On the Main pane, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the print target, or
switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.
Conguration using Easy Settings
Setting Item
A Media Type
Description
Select the type of paper.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.108)
B Get Information
Click to display the Get Information dialog box, which shows the types of
paper specied on the printer for each feed source. When you select a
feed source, your selection is applied to the printer driver settings for the
feed source and type of paper.
C Set
Click to display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box for ink drying time
and other detailed settings based on the type of paper.
E Print Target
F View set.
L Printer
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
Printing Photos and Images (→P.165)
Printing Line Drawings and Text (→P.190)
Printing Ofce Documents (→P.196)
Click to display the View settings dialog box, which enables you to conrm
the settings for the selected item from the E Print Target list or change the
order of items listed in E Print Target.
Click to display the Printer dialog box, which indicates the ink levels and
gives other information about the printer.
Mac OS X Software 455
Printer Driver
Conguration using Advanced Settings
Using Mac OS X 10.5
Setting Item
A Media Type
Description
Select the type of paper.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.108)
B Get Information
Click to display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, which shows
the types of paper specied on the printer for each feed source. When you
select a feed source, your selection is applied to the printer driver settings
for the feed source and type of paper.
C Set
Click to display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box for ink drying time
and other detailed settings based on the type of paper.
E Print Priority
Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
(→P.216)
F Print Quality
Choose the level of print quality.
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
(→P.216)
H Color Mode
Choose the color mode.
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
(→P.216)
456 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Setting Item
Description
N Input Bit Depth
Choose the levels of gradation in print data, either 8-bit or 16-bit. Optimal
results when printing data with rich gradation are possible by choosing
16-bit. For example, this option is particularly suited to printing images
created after specifying 16 bits per channel in Photoshop.
(Only supported in Mac OS X 10.5)
O Fast Graphic Process
Select this option to print faster than usual, when possible.
(Only supported in Mac OS X 10.5)
I Set
Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color
settings.
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver (→P.206)
J Unidirectional Printing
Although unidirectional printing is slower, it can help prevent misaligned
lines and ensure better results.
P Thicken Fine Lines
Activate this option to print ne lines more distinctly.
(Only supported in Mac OS X 10.5)
K High-Precision Printing
Select this option for printing at the highest level of quality. However, this
takes more time than regular printing.
L Printer
Click to display the Printer dialog box, which indicates the ink levels and
gives other information about the printer.
Mac OS X Software 457
Printer Driver
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Mac OS X)
On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and
congure printer driver media type setting.
Note
• To display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, on the Main pane, click Get Information by
Media Type. (→P.455)
Setting Item
A Paper Source
458 Mac OS X Software
Description
Shows the Paper Source supported by the printer, as well as the type of
paper loaded. To update the media type setting in the printer driver, select
the desired Paper Source option and click OK.
Printer Driver
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X)
The Paper Detailed Settings dialog box offers the following settings. For details on settings items, refer to
the printer driver help.
Note
• To display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main pane, click Settings by Media
Type. (→P.455)
Setting Item
Description
A Media Type
Select the paper type.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.108)
B Drying Time
Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry, as needed. The Drying
Time setting is only valid for rolls.
(→P.133)
C Between Pages
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a page until ejecting the
paper, as needed.
D Between Scans
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a line on the page until
printing the next line, as needed.
E Roll Paper Margin for
Safety
F Near End Margin
You can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to
ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held rmly against the Platen.
Specify the length of the Near End Margin (the leading edge margin) of the
roll, as needed.
G Cut Speed
Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. You can adjust this setting
if paper is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.
H Automatic Cutting
You can activate or deactivate Automatic Cutting and printing of cut lines,
as desired. In this list, specify Yes, No, or Print Cut Guideline.
I Calibration Value
You can specify whether to apply the results of calibration performed on the
printer to image processing.
J Mirror
Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print
a version of the document or image with the left and right sides inverted.
Mac OS X Software 459
Printer Driver
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application
(Mac OS X)
In the View Settings dialog box, you can check details of the selected printing application.
Note
• To display the View Settings dialog box, on the Main pane, click View Settings by Print Target.
(→P.455)
Setting Item
Description
A Print Target
Shows all Print Target options (settings items for the printing application).
B Name
Identies the item selected in Print Target by its name and an icon.
C Details
Here, you can conrm detailed settings values for each item selected in
the Print Target list.
460 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Color Settings Pane: Color
If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment pane.
Note
• To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main pane click Color Settings by Color Mode in
Advanced Settings. (→P.455)
Setting Item
Description
A Sample Type
Choose a sample image from Standard, Portrait, Landscape, or
Graphics.
B View Color Pattern
Clicking to select this check box will display the color pattern.
C Apply to Sample
Clicking to select this check box will apply the revised settings to the
sample image.
D Cyan
Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of each color.
E Magenta
F Yellow
G Gray Tone
Adjust the color tone of grays as desired. Choose Cool Black (tinged with
blue) or Warm Black (tinged with red).
H Brightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the
brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original
image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic
as it appears on the computer screen).
I Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each
other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and
reducing the Contrast softens images.
J Saturation
Adjust the color intensity as desired. Increasing the Saturation setting
makes colors more vivid, and reducing the Saturation makes colors more
subdued.
K Object Adjustment
Choose Images, Graphics, or Text as the object of adjustment.
Mac OS X Software 461
Printer Driver
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.206)
Object Adjustment dialog box
In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If
an original comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.
Note
• To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment panel.
Setting Item
Description
A Images
Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.
B Graphics
Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and
circles.
C Text
Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.
462 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Matching Pane
On the Matching pane, you can specify color matching to compensate for differences in the appearance of
colors on various devices.
Driver Matching Mode (Using Mac OS X 10.2.8 - 10.3.9)
Setting Item
Description
A Matching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.
B Matching Method
Select the color matching method that suits the document to be printed.
Various Matching Method options are available depending on your
selection in Matching.
C Color Space
Select the applicable color space as desired.
Mac OS X Software 463
Printer Driver
Driver Matching Mode (Kyuanos) (Using Mac OS X 10.4 or later)
The following options are available when you select Driver Matching Mode (Kyuanos) in the Matching
Mode list.
Setting Item
Description
A Matching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.
Normally, select Driver Matching Mode. For color matching based on ICC
proles, select ICC Matching Mode depending on your color matching
system. If you prefer not to use color matching based on the printer driver,
select No Correction.
B Matching Method
Select the color matching method that suits the document to be printed.
Various Matching Method options are available depending on your
selection in Matching.
C Color Space
Select the applicable color space as desired.
D Monitor White Point
Enter the color temperature set on the monitor.
Displayed when the Matching Method is set to Monitor Matching.
E Use ambient light
Select this option for adjustment of colors to suit the ambient light in the
viewing environment.
adjustment
F Ambient Light Adjust
Click to display the Ambient Light Adjust dialog box, which enables you
to complete settings for printing to match the ambient light.
Note
• To display the Matching pane, on the Main pane, click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced
Settings, and then click the Matching pane. (→P.455)
464 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Ambient Light Adjust
When you select By selecting a chart number in Setting Method
Setting Item
Description
A Setting Method
You can choose conguration based on the printed Chart or based on using
the i1 colorimeter.
B Print Chart
Click to start the Light Source Check Tool, for printing Chart. The Light
Source Check Tool must be installed to use this function.
C Chart Number
In Chart, select the number of the pattern with your desired colors.
D Color Temperature
Enter the Color Temperature measured during monitor calibration. Displayed
when the Matching Method is set to Monitor Matching on the Matching pane.
E Illuminance
Enter the Illuminance measured during monitor calibration. Displayed when
the Matching Method is set to Monitor Matching on the Matching pane.
When you select By entering values directly in Setting Method
Setting Item
A Setting Method
Description
You can choose conguration based on the printed Chart or based on using
the i1 colorimeter.
B Lighting Source Type Select the light source measured using the i1 colorimeter.
D Color Temperature
Enter the Color Temperature measured using the i1 colorimeter.
E Illuminance
Enter the Illuminance measured using the i1 colorimeter.
Displayed when the Matching Method is set to Monitor Matching on the
Matching pane.
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.206)
Mac OS X Software 465
Printer Driver
Light Source Check Tool
The Light Source Check Tool enables you to print Chart.
Setting Item
Description
A Printer Name
The printer name is displayed here.
B Media Type
Select the paper type. For information on the types of paper compatible
with Driver Matching Mode (Kyuanos), refer to the Paper Reference
Guide. (→P.108)
C Paper Source
Choose the paper source, as desired.
Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in Media Type
in the Main pane.
D Print
Click to print the Chart.
466 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
ICC Matching Mode
The following options are available when you select ICC Matching Mode, in the Matching Mode list.
Note
• To display the Matching pane, on the Main pane, click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced
Settings, and then click the Matching pane. (→P.455)
Setting Item
Description
A Matching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.
B Input Prole Settings
You can choose Input Prole.
Various options are available depending on your selected Matching Mode.
C Matching Method
You can choose Matching Method .
Various options are available depending on your selected Matching Mode.
D Printer Prole Settings
Specify the printer prole as desired.
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.206)
Mac OS X Software 467
Printer Driver
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X)
The following settings are available on the Color Settings pane for monochrome printing.
Color Adjustment pane: Monochrome
On the Color Adjustment pane for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.
Note
• To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main pane, click Color Settings in Advanced Settings.
(→P.455)
Setting Item
Description
A Sample Type
Choose a sample image from Standard, Portrait, Landscape, or Graphics.
B View Color Pattern
Clicking to select this check box will display the color pattern.
C Apply to Sample
Clicking to select this check box will apply the revised settings to the sample
image.
D Cyan
Not available.
E Magenta
F Yellow
G Gray Tone
H Brightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness
if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image (that is, the
original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the
computer screen).
I Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other,
as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and reducing the
Contrast softens images.
J Saturation
Not available.
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.206)
468 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS X)
The following settings are available on the Gray Adjustment pane.
Gray Adjustment
On the Gray Adjustment pane, you can adjust the color balance, brightness, contrast, and other image
qualities.
Note
• To display the Gray Adjustment pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.455) , select Monochrome
(Photo) by Color Mode in Advanced Settings, and then click Color Settings.
• Monochrome (Photo) is not available for all types of paper.
Setting Item
Description
A Sample
The image at left is updated to reect any changes you make to setting
items on the sheet, enabling you to check the results of adjustment.
B Sample List
Select a sample image, as desired.
C Color Balance
Click the list to select a color balance that suits the printing application.
DX
Adjust the color balance as you check the color tone in the adjustment area.
You can adjust the square area in the center by clicking or dragging it.
Drag the vertical or horizontal scroll bars for adjustment, as desired.
You can click the arrows by the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) boxes or
enter the values directly.
EY
F Brightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the
brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original
image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic
as it appears on the computer screen).
G Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each
other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and
reducing the Contrast softens images.
H Highlight
Adjust the brightness of the lightest portion.
I Shadow
Adjust the brightness of the darkest portion.
Mac OS X Software 469
Printer Driver
Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X)
The following settings are available on the Page Setup pane. For details on settings items, refer to the
printer driver help.
Setting Item
Description
A Paper Source
Choose how paper is supplied.
Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in A Media
Type in the Main pane.
B Roll Paper Width
Displays the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer. Unknown is
displayed if the printer cannot detect the roll paper width.
C Page Size
Displays the size of the original, as specied in the page settings of the
application.
For details on page sizes available in the application.see “Paper Sizes”.
(→P.113)
D Enlarged/Reduced Printing Choose from the following options when this setting is activated.
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (→P.233)
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.239)
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (→P.245)
E Fit Paper Size
Resizes the document image to match the paper size.
F Fit Roll Paper Width
Resizes the document image to match the roll width.
G Scaling
Resizes the document image based on a specied scaling value. Enter a
value in a range of “5-600.”
H Borderless Printing
Borderless printing is available if Roll Paper is selected in the A Paper
Source list.
Activate this setting for borderless printing to match the size and width
of the paper.
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size (→P.270)
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.277)
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (→P.263)
I Paper Size
Choose the size of the paper you will print on.
Click Display all selections for Paper Size to list available sizes.
For details on available paper sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.113)
470 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Setting Item
Description
J Print Centered
Activate this setting to print document images in the center of the paper.
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (→P.326)
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (→P.332)
K No Spaces at Top or
Activate this setting to print the next image skipping blank areas above
and below printable data in documents, which enables you to conserve
the paper.
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom
Margins (→P.343)
Bottom
L Rotate Page 90 degrees
Activate this setting to rotate the original 90 degrees before printing.
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (→P.337)
Mac OS X Software 471
Printer Driver
Utility Pane (Mac OS X)
The following settings are available on the Utilitypane.
Setting Item
Description
A Set
Click to display the Printer dialog box, which offers the following
maintenance for the printer.
• Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) cleaning
• Head alignment adjustment
• Feed amount adjustment
B View
Click to start imagePROGRAF Printmonitor, which enables you to view
the status of print jobs.
C Set
Click to complete the settings for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
(iR enlargement copy).
*1: For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .
472 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X)
The following settings are available on the Additional Settings pane.
Setting Item
Description
A Data Send Method
Choose how print data is sent to the printer.
• B Send Print Data Immediately to Printer
• C Send All Print Data as Batch to Printer
D Send job to
Click to display the Send job to dialog box, which enables you to specify
how print jobs are stored on the printer’s hard disk.
• E Print
• F Print (auto delete)
• G Save in mail box
H Save data before printing
Jobs are printed after they are saved on the hard disk.
Mac OS X Software 473
Printer Driver
Support Pane (Mac OS X)
On the Support pane, you can view support information and the user’s manual.
Button
Corresponding Utility
A Support Information
Click to access the Canon support webpage, where you can nd the
latest information on the printer and consumables, check for printer driver
updates, and browse other information.
B User Manual
Click to view the printer user’s manual. This function requires the user’s
manual to be installed on your computer.
C Settings
The settings can be saved as a le. Click to display the Export dialog box,
which enables you to specify where to save the le.
D About
You can display version information for the printer driver.
474 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print Adobe RGB images based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Adobe RGB image created in Photoshop
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Glossy Photo Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
Important
• In Photoshop, select no color-matching.
• In the printer driver settings, select Driver Matching Mode and choose Adobe RGB in Color Space.
1.
In Photoshop, create an image in the Adobe RGB color space.
Note
• The following procedures are based on the example of Photoshop CS2.
• For instructions on creating Adobe RGB images, refer to the Photoshop documentation.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Choose Print with Preview from the Photoshop menu to display the Print dialog box.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy
Make sure the setting mode is Color Management.
In the Color Handling list in Options, click No Color Management.
Click Print.
Access the Main pane.
Photo Paper.
Mac OS X Software 475
Printer Driver
8.
9.
10.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
Click Image in the E Print Priority list.
Select the print quality in the F Print Quality list.
Note
• Options displayed in the F Print Quality list vary depending on the type of paper.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Click Color in the H Color Mode list.
Click I Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Click Matching to display the Matching pane.
In Matching Mode, click Driver Matching Mode.
In Color Space, click Adobe RGB.
Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.
Access the Page Setup pane.
476 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
18.
19.
Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll paper is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-here,
10-in. Roll (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
20.
Make sure C Page Size in the Page Setup pane matches the size of the original as specied in
Photoshop-in this case, 10"x12".
21.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.450)
Mac OS X Software 477
Printmonitor
Printmonitor
imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)
imagePROGRAF Printmonitor is a utility for checking the printer status and managing print jobs.
•
•
•
•
Printer status can be checked in real time on a computer monitor.
You can check the status of print jobs, cancel jobs, and manage them as needed.
If a printer error occurs, you can investigate the corrective action immediately.
You can also set up automatic email notication of any printer problems or errors to email addresses you
designate in advance.
Note
• If the status of the desired printer is not shown in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor, select the printer
again as follows.
1. Make sure the printer is on and connected to the network or to a local port.
2. In the Printer menu, select the name of the desired printer.
After the printer is detected, the printer status is shown.
3. If information about the printer is not shown in step 2, choose Search Printer in the Printer menu.
4. Select the zone to search (or select *(My Zone) if no zones have been set up) and click the
Search button.
Printer names listed in the Printer menu are updated with the printers that are now detected.
5. In the Printer menu, select the name of the desired printer.
After the printer is detected, the printer status is shown.
478 Mac OS X Software
Network Setting
Network Setting
Network Setting
Network Environment
System requirements
The system requirements, which vary depending on your network, are as follows.
• Printing over a TCP/IP network
• Compatible operating systems
• Windows 2000 (Professional or Server)
• Windows XP (Home Edition or Professional)
• Windows Server 2003 (Standard Edition)
• Windows Vista (Home Basic/Business/Ultimate)
• Mac OS X 10.2.8 or later
• Compatible computer
• A computer that runs one of the above operating systems
• Printing over an AppleTalk network
• Compatible operating systems
• Mac OS X 10.2.8 or later
• Compatible computer
• A computer that runs one of the above operating systems
Note
• The printer cannot be used over a LocalTalk network.
• Compatible with EtherTalk Phase 2.
• Printing over a NetWare network
• Compatible servers
• Novell NetWare 4.2/5.1/6.0
• Compatible clients
• Windows 2000 (Professional or Server)
• Windows XP (Professional)
• Compatible computer
• A computer that runs one of the above operating systems
Note
• In NetWare 6.0, iPrint is not supported.
Network Setting 479
Network Setting
Network environment
After conrming what type of network environment you will connect the printer to, set up the printer and
computers as needed.
• Example of a Windows network
In Windows networks, print over TCP/IP.
Note
• NetBIOS is not supported.
• Example of a Macintosh network
In Macintosh networks, print over AppleTalk (EtherTalk) or TCP/IP, using Bonjour(Zeroconf) functions.
• Example of a NetWare network
Note
• Even if there is a NetWare server in your network environment, you can use both TCP/IP and AppleTalk.
In this case, complete the settings for each protocol you will use.
480 Network Setting
Network Setting
Conguring the IP Address on the Printer
You must congure the printer’s IP address before using the printer in a TCP/IP network.
The printer’s IP address is congured automatically when you install the printer driver following the instructions
in the Quick Start Guide.
Congure the IP address by using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, the printer Control Panel, or ARP or
PING commands, if the IP address is changed, or if you change the printer connection mode to a network
connection. For details on conguring the IP address, refer to the following topics.
• Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility (→P.482)
• Conguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel (→P.483)
• Conguring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands (→P.484)
Important
• If you use a DHCP server for automatic assignment of the printer’s IP address, printing may no longer
be possible after the printer is turned off and on. This is because an IP address different from before
has been assigned. Thus, when using DHCP server functions, consult your network administrator and
congure the settings in one of the following ways.
• Congure the setting for dynamic DNS updating
In RemoteUI, activate the setting Enable DNS Dynamic Update. (→P.487)
• Congure the setting for assignment of the same IP address each time the printer starts up
Note
• We recommend conguring the printer’s IP address even if you will use the printer in networks other
than TCP/IP networks. Conguring the printer’s IP address enables you to use RemoteUI to congure
the network settings and manage the printer with a web browser.
For details on RemoteUI, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.486)
Network Setting 481
Network Setting
Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility
From a computer running Windows, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility provided with the
printer to congure the printer’s IP address. This topic describes how to congure the IP address using
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Important
• To congure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as “Administrator”
account. We recommend that your network administrator congure the network settings.
• For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, see “Installing imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility”. (→P.445)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.
In the list of printers, select the printer to congure.
Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.
In the Setting IP Address list, choose Manual.
Enter the IP address assigned to the printer and click the Set button.
Click OK after the Conrmation message dialog box is displayed.
Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Note
• To congure the IP address automatically, choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select
DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP.
• You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway.
482 Network Setting
Network Setting
Conguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control
Panel
This topic describes how to congure the printer’s IP address on the Control Panel.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select TCP/IP, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Setting, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Address, and then press the ► button.
After pressing ◄ or ► to select the input eld, press the OK button to enable numerical input.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the number, and then press the OK button.
Note
• Pressing the ▲ button increases the number by 1. The maximum value is “255,” after which “0” is
displayed.
• Pressing the ▼ button decreases the number by 1. The minimum value is “0,” after which “255” is
displayed.
• Hold down ▲ or ▼ to increase or decrease the value continuously.
8.
9.
Repeat steps 6-7 to enter the IP address assigned to the printer.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
If any of the settings are changed, a message for conrmation is displayed. In this case, press
the OK button.
Important
• Be sure to complete step 9. This will activate the values you have entered.
• You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway on the Control Panel.
Note
• If an error message is displayed, check the settings and correct any invalid values.
• To cancel the setup process, hold down the Stop button for a second or more.
Network Setting 483
Network Setting
Conguring the IP Address Using ARP and PING
Commands
This topic describes how to congure the IP address using ARP and PING commands.
To use the ARP and PING commands, you will need to know the printer’s MAC address. You can conrm
the MAC address on the Control Panel.
1.
Check the printer’s MAC address.
You can conrm the MAC address on the Control Panel as follows:
1. Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Ethernet Driver, and then press the ► button.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select MAC Address, and then press the ► button.
You can also print information on the printer status, which includes the MAC address, as follows:
1. Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Test Print, and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Status Print, and then press the ► button.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
The MAC address is indicated in the printer status information in the following location.
2.
3.
In Windows, open a command prompt or MS-DOS prompt, or in Mac OS X, start Terminal.
Execute the following command to add entries to the ARP table for managing IP addresses
and corresponding MAC addresses.
arp -s [IP address] [the printer’s MAC address you have veried]
Example: arp -s xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 00-00-85-xx-xx-xx
Note
• In Mac OS X when using Terminal, enter the arp command in the format “arp -s xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
00:00:85:xx:xx:xx”. For details, refer to the help le for the command line.
484 Network Setting
Network Setting
4.
Execute the following command to send the IP address to the printer and congure it.
ping [IP address as specied in the ARP command] -l 479
Example: ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx -l 479
Note
• In “-l,” the “l” is the letter “l”.
• In Mac OS X when using Terminal, enter the ping command in the format “ping -s 479
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. For details, refer to the help le for the command line.
Note
• The subnet mask and default gateway will be set to “0.0.0.0”. Use RemoteUI to change the subnet mask
and default gateway to match your network settings.
For details on RemoteUI, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.486)
Network Setting 485
Network Setting
Using RemoteUI
Enter the printer’s IP address in a web browser to display the RemoteUI page. After you log on to RemoteUI
from the page, you can check and change the status of the printer and print jobs, and congure network
settings.
For details on conguring printer settings for networks, refer to the following topics.
•
•
•
•
Conguring the Printer’s TCP/IP Network Settings (→P.487)
Conguring the Printer’s AppleTalk Network Settings (→P.489)
Conguring the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings (→P.490)
Specifying Printer-Related Information (→P.492)
Note
• RemoteUI also offers many other features. You can display the ink levels, check error messages and
other status information, and cancel print jobs.
• By factory default, the English screen is displayed. You can change the display language after logging
on in Administrator Mode by choosing the desired language in the Language list.
Important
• Use Netscape Navigator/Communicator 6.0 or later, Internet Explorer 5.01 or later, or Firefox 1.5 or later
as a web browser. In Mac OS X, you can also use Safari 1.32 or later or Safari 2.03 or later.
• Access is not possible via a proxy server. In environments where a proxy server is used, add the
printer’s IP address to Exceptions (addresses accessed without a proxy server) in the web browser
proxy server settings. (Settings may vary depending on the network environment.)
• Enable JavaScript and cookies in the web browser.
• If you access RemoteUI with the printer name instead of its IP address, make sure the DNS settings are
correctly congured.
486 Network Setting
Network Setting
Conguring the Printer’s TCP/IP Network Settings
Follow the steps below to congure the TCP/IP network settings.
1.
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http://“printer IP address or name”/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the TCP/IP group to display the Edit TCP/IP Protocol
Settings page.
6.
Refer to the TCP/IP Settings Items table to complete the settings.
TCP/IP Settings Items
Item
Default Setting
Details
Use DHCP
Activate this setting to use DHCP Off
for conguring the IP address.
Use BOOTP
Activate this setting to use
BOOTP for conguring the IP
address.
Use RARP
Activate this setting to use RARP Off
for conguring the IP address.
RAW Mode Bi-direction
Activate this setting to use
Raw mode bidirectional
communication.
Off
Enable DNS Dynamic Update
Activate this setting to perform
DNS server registration
automatically.
Off
Use Zeroconf Function
Activate this setting to use
Bonjour.
On
IP Address
Specify the printer’s IP address.
0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask
Specify the printer’s subnet mask. 0.0.0.0
Gateway Address
Specify the printer’s default
gateway.
0.0.0.0
LPD Printing
Activate this setting to use LDP
Printing.
On
IPP Printing
Activate this setting to use IPP
Printing.
On
IPP Printer URI
Specify the URI of the printer used printer
for IPP printing using up to 252
characters (1-252 characters).
When using a standard Windows
port for IPP printing, enter an
URL less than 255 bytes for
all characters for “http://<IP
address/IPP-URI”.
Off
Network Setting 487
Network Setting
Item
7.
Default Setting
Details
RAW Printing
Activate this setting to use Raw
Printing.
On
SMTP Server Address
Specify the SMTP server’s IP
address.
0.0.0.0
Primary DNS Server Address
Specify the IP address of the
primary DNS server.
0.0.0.0
Secondary DNS Server Address Specify the IP address of the
secondary DNS server.
0.0.0.0
DNS Host Name
Specify the printer host name,
up to 63 characters (1-63
characters). Use single-byte
letters, numbers, and “-”
(hyphens). Do not use numbers
or “-” for the rst character or “-”
for the last character.
NB-17FBxxxxxxxxxxxx
DNS Domain Name
Specify the printer domain
(Blank)
name, up to 63 characters. Use
single-byte letters, numbers, “-”
(hyphens), and “”. (periods). Do
not use numbers, “-”, or “”. for the
rst character, or “-” or “”. for the
last character.
Multicast DNS Service Name
Specify the printer’s Multicast
Canon iPFxxxx (xxxxxx)
DNS service name, up to 63
characters. (1-63 characters)
This name will be displayed when
Bonjour functions are used.
Click OK to display the Network page.
Note
• If you specify to congure the IP address using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, there must be a server that
supports such protocol running in the network.
• If you specify to congure the IP address using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, the IP address obtained by this
method is used rst. If you cannot obtain the IP address, the address specied in IP Address is used.
• It takes a minute or two to determine whether DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP are available. We recommend
clearing check boxes of options you will not use.
• If you are using a DNS server, select Enable DNS Dynamic Update and enter the IP Address for DNS
servers, DNS host name, and DNS domain name in Primary DNS Server Address, Secondary DNS
Server Address, DNS Host Name, and DNS Domain Name, respectively.
488 Network Setting
Network Setting
Conguring the Printer’s AppleTalk Network Settings
Follow the steps below to congure the AppleTalk network settings.
1.
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http://“printer IP address or name”/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the AppleTalk group to display the Edit AppleTalk
Protocol Settings page.
6.
Refer to the AppleTalk Settings Items table to complete the settings.
AppleTalk Settings Items
Item
Details
Default Setting
Phase Type
Specify whether to use AppleTalk. Disabled
If you will use AppleTalk, choose
Phase 2.
If you will not use AppleTalk,
choose Disabled.
Name (*1)
Specify the object name used by Canon NB-17FB (xxxxxx)
AppleTalk (in up to 31 single-byte
or 15 double-byte characters).
However, do not use the following
single-byte characters: @ * : =
Zone (*2)
Specify the printer zone name, up *
to 31 single-byte characters.
However, do not use the following
single-byte characters: @ : = Also
avoid using “*” (which represents
the default zone) in the middle of
a string.
*1:The object name you have specied in Name is displayed in Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center)
in Mac OS X. If you use multiple printers in the same zone, assign a unique name to each printer.
By default, the network interface name is “Canon NB-17FB (xxxxxx)”. (Here, xxxxxx is the last six
digits of the printer’s MAC address.)
*2: If zones have been created on the network, enter the name of the printer’s zone. If there are
no zones, leave the asterisk “*” entry (for the default zone) as it is. If you enter a network zone
name that does not match created zones, the printer will not be detected by Macintosh computers.
Consult your network administrator for information on zone names.
7.
Click OK to display the Network page.
Network Setting 489
Network Setting
Conguring the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings
Follow the steps below to congure the NetWare network settings.
1.
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http://“printer IP address or name”/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the NetWare group to display the Edit NetWare Protocol
Settings page.
6.
Refer to the NetWare Settings Items table to complete the settings.
NetWare Settings Items
Item
Default Setting
Details
Frame Type
Specify the type of frame to
use in NetWare.
NCP Burst Mode
Activate this setting to use
On
NCP Burst Mode.
This mode supports fast data
transfer when printing in queue
server mode. Normally, leave
the setting On.
Print Application
Choose the print service.
• Bindery PServer
• RPrinter
• NDS PServer
• NPrinter
Packet Signature
Select If Requested by Server If Requested by Server
to use packet signature.
Bindery
PServer
File Server Name
Specify the name of a le
server that has a NetWare print
server, up to 47 characters.
Print Server Name
Specify the name of a
NetWare print server, up
to 47 characters.
-
Print Server Password
Set a password for the print
server, up to 20 characters.
-
Polling Interval
Specify the interval to conrm
jobs.
(1-15 seconds)
5
Print Server Name
Specify the name of a
NetWare print server, up
to 47 characters.
-
RPrinter
490 Network Setting
Disabled
NDS PServer
Network Setting
Item
NDS
PServer
NPrinter
7.
Default Setting
Details
Printer Number
Specify the number of the
printer connected to the
NetWare print server.
(0-5)
0
Tree Name
Specify the name of an NDS
tree that has a NetWare print
server, up to 32 characters.
-
Context Name
Specify the name of a context
that has a NetWare print
server, up to 255 characters.
-
Print Server Name
Specify the name of a
NetWare print server, up
to 64 characters.
-
Print Server Password
Set a password for the print
server, up to 20 characters.
-
Polling Interval
Specify the interval to conrm
jobs.
(1-255 seconds)
5
Print Server Name
Specify the name of a
NetWare print server, up
to 47 characters.
Enter the advertising name
of the print server designated
by the NetWare print service.
Usually, the advertising name
is the same as the name of the
print server.
Printer Number
Specify the number of the
printer connected to the
NetWare print server.
(0-254)
Enter the printer number
designated by the NetWare
print service.
0
Click OK to display the Network page.
Network Setting 491
Network Setting
Specifying Printer-Related Information
Follow the steps below to specify device information and security settings.
1.
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http://“printer IP address or name”/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
Click Information in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Information page.
To display the relevant settings page, click Edit in the upper-right corner of Device Information
or Security, depending on what information you want to specify.
6.
Refer to the tables of settings items for device information and security settings to complete
the settings.
Device information settings items
Item
Details
Default Setting
Device Name
Specify the device name.
(0-32 characters)
(Blank)
Location
Specify where the device is installed.
(0-32 characters)
(Blank)
Administrator
Identify the administrator.
(0-32 characters)
(Blank)
Phone
Specify the device administrator’s contact
information.
(0-32 characters)
(Blank)
Comments(E-mail)
Enter any notes from the device administrator.
(0-32 characters)
(Blank)
Security settings items
Item
Details
Default Setting
Old Password
Enter the current device password.
(0-15 characters)
(Blank)
New Password
Enter a new password.
(0-15 characters)
(Blank)
Conrm
Enter the new password again to conrm it.
(0-15 characters)
(Blank)
Besides entering a password, you can specify other security-related information, such as IP
address-based SNMP or TCP usage restrictions, MAC address-based access restrictions, or
IPP authentication settings.
7.
Click OK to activate the settings.
492 Network Setting
Network Setting
Email Notication When Printing is Finished or Errors
Occur
The printer can notify you of the printer status by email. Even when you are away from the printer, you can
know when printing is nished or if errors occur. Receive notication via email on your mobile phone or
at your computer.
Use the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows) function to set up email recipients and message timing.
Besides being informed of nished print jobs or errors, you can also complete settings for email notication
when service is needed or it’s time to replace consumables. For detailed instructions,see “Specifying
Printer-Related Information”. (→P.492)
Note
• For details on email notication using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (in Windows), refer to the
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.
Network Setting 493
Network Setting
Initializing the Network Settings
Use RemoteUI to restore the network settings to the default values as follows.
Important
• Initializing the network settings will also restore the default value of the printer’s IP address. As a result,
the RemoteUI page cannot be displayed in the web browser after this procedure.
• For instructions on reconguring the IP address, see “Conguring the IP Address on the Printer”.
(→P.481)
• For details on RemoteUI, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.486)
1.
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http://“printer IP address or name”/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
Click Reset to Default settings in the lower-right corner of the Network Interface group.
After conrming the message, click OK to restore the network settings to the default values.
Note
• You can also use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility or the Control Panel to restore the default
network settings.
• If you use the Control Panel to initialize the network settings, press the Menu button to display MAIN
MENU, and then press ▲, ▼, and ► to select Interface Setup → Ethernet Driver → Init. Settings →
Yes (in this order), and nally press the OK button.
494 Network Setting
Network Setting (Windows)
Network Setting (Windows)
Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows)
This topic describes how to specify the printer driver destination if the printer’s IP address is changed, or if you
will use the printer over a network connection instead of via USB connection.
The procedure described below is the conguration based on the LPR or RAW protocol using the standard
TCP/IP port in Windows ( Standard TCP/IP Port).
Important
• If you use the printer on a TCP/IP network, make sure the printer’s IP address is congured correctly.
• Conguring the IP Address on the Printer (→P.481)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Open the Printers and Faxes (or Printers) window.
Right-click the icon of this printer and choose Properties to open the printer properties window.
Click the Port tab to display the Port sheet.
Click Add Port to display the Printer Ports dialog box.
In the Available Port list, select Standard TCP/IP Port.
Click New Port.
After the wizard starts, a window is displayed for the Welcome to the Add Standard TCP/IP
Printer Port Wizard.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Click Next.
In Printer Name or IP Address, enter the printer’s IP address.
Follow the instructions on the screen to add a printer port.
Click Close to close the Printer Ports dialog box.
Make sure the printer port you added is displayed under Ports, and that the port is selected.
Click OK to close the printer properties window.
Network Setting 495
Network Setting (Windows)
Sharing the Printer in Windows
If you set up a computer as a print server in Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003, the
computer can receive print jobs sent from other computers (clients) connected to it for printing. This topic
describes how to share the printer in Windows.
Important
• We recommend that your network administrator congure your network for printer sharing.
1.
Open the Printers and Faxes (or Printers) window.
2.
Right-click the icon of this printer and choose Sharing to open the printer properties window.
496 Network Setting
Network Setting (Windows)
3.
On the Sharing sheet, click Share this printer and enter the shared name.
4.
To print jobs from clients running other versions of Windows, click Additional Drivers and follow
the instructions to install the printer driver of the corresponding version.
If you are prompted to choose the location of the printer driver le, insert the provided User
Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive and specify the folder where the printer driver is located.
5.
Click OK.
Important
• When installing the printer driver on client computers, select "Network Printer" on the connection type
screen in the printer wizard, and then select the printer shared from the computer set up as the print
server.
Network Setting 497
Network Setting (Windows)
Conguring the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings
Follow the steps below to congure the NetWare network settings.
1.
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http://“printer IP address or name”/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the NetWare group to display the Edit NetWare Protocol
Settings page.
6.
Refer to the NetWare Settings Items table to complete the settings.
NetWare Settings Items
Item
Default Setting
Details
Frame Type
Specify the type of frame to
use in NetWare.
NCP Burst Mode
Activate this setting to use
On
NCP Burst Mode.
This mode supports fast data
transfer when printing in queue
server mode. Normally, leave
the setting On.
Print Application
Choose the print service.
• Bindery PServer
• RPrinter
• NDS PServer
• NPrinter
Packet Signature
Select If Requested by Server If Requested by Server
to use packet signature.
Bindery
PServer
File Server Name
Specify the name of a le
server that has a NetWare print
server, up to 47 characters.
Print Server Name
Specify the name of a
NetWare print server, up
to 47 characters.
-
Print Server Password
Set a password for the print
server, up to 20 characters.
-
Polling Interval
Specify the interval to conrm
jobs.
(1-15 seconds)
5
Print Server Name
Specify the name of a
NetWare print server, up
to 47 characters.
-
RPrinter
498 Network Setting
Disabled
NDS PServer
Network Setting (Windows)
Item
NDS
PServer
NPrinter
7.
Default Setting
Details
Printer Number
Specify the number of the
printer connected to the
NetWare print server.
(0-5)
0
Tree Name
Specify the name of an NDS
tree that has a NetWare print
server, up to 32 characters.
-
Context Name
Specify the name of a context
that has a NetWare print
server, up to 255 characters.
-
Print Server Name
Specify the name of a
NetWare print server, up
to 64 characters.
-
Print Server Password
Set a password for the print
server, up to 20 characters.
-
Polling Interval
Specify the interval to conrm
jobs.
(1-255 seconds)
5
Print Server Name
Specify the name of a
NetWare print server, up
to 47 characters.
Enter the advertising name
of the print server designated
by the NetWare print service.
Usually, the advertising name
is the same as the name of the
print server.
Printer Number
Specify the number of the
printer connected to the
NetWare print server.
(0-254)
Enter the printer number
designated by the NetWare
print service.
0
Click OK to display the Network page.
Network Setting 499
Network Setting (Windows)
Specifying the Printer’s Frame Type
To enable communication between the printer and computers on your network, specify the Ethernet frame
type in your NetWare environment.
Follow the steps below to specify the frame type by using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility or the
printer Control Panel.
Note
• You can specify the frame type by using RemoteUI if the printer’s IP address is congured.
Important
• Before specifying the frame type, make sure the printer is on and connected to the network.
• For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, see “Installing imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility”. (→P.445)
Specifying the frame type using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
In the list of printers, select the printer to congure.
Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.
In the NetWare Frame Type list, select the frame type.
Make sure ETHERNET II is selected under Frame Type in TCP/IP.
In IP Address, enter the IP address assigned to the printer, and then enter the subnet mask in
Subnet Mask and the default gateway in Gateway Address.
Important
• You must specify the IP address here to be able to congure NetWare protocol settings using
RemoteUI.
7.
8.
9.
Click Set.
Click OK after the Conrmation message dialog box is displayed.
Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
500 Network Setting
Network Setting (Windows)
Specifying the frame type using the printer Control Panel
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select NetWare, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select NetWare, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select On, and then press the OK button.
Return to the NetWare menu.
6.
7.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Frame Type, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the frame type to use, and then press the OK button.
Return to the NetWare menu.
8.
9.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Service, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired print service, and then press the OK button.
Return to the NetWare menu.
10.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
If any of the settings is changed, a message for conrmation is displayed. In this case, press
the OK button.
Important
• Be sure to complete step 10. This will activate the values you have entered.
Note
• If an error message is displayed, check the settings and correct any invalid values.
• To cancel the setup process, hold down the Stop button for a second or more.
Network Setting 501
Network Setting (Windows)
Specifying NetWare Print Services
Before printing in a NetWare network, you must congure print services such as print servers, print queues,
and so on. You can congure the print service settings from a computer using any of the following software.
• NWADMIN
• PCONSOLE
(from Novell, provided with NetWare)
Important
• If you use NWADMIN to congure the print service settings, Novell Client (the Novell NetWare client
software) must be installed as the client software application.
• NetWare networking is unsupported in Windows Vista.
This topic gives instructions for conguring NetWare print services. The order of this procedure may vary
depending on the environment.
Choosing the type of print services
Before completing print service settings, choose the type of print service. Refer to the following descriptions
as needed.
Note
• In NetWare 5.1/6.0/6.5, NDPS may also be used as the print service. If you use NDPS, use the
Novell printer gateway included with NetWare. For details on conguring NDPS, refer to the NetWare
documentation.
• NDS (Novell Directory Service) and Bindery
NDS and bindery are both supported. Use the mode that is compatible with your network environment.
• Queue Server Mode and Remote Printer Mode
Queue server mode and remote printer mode are both supported.
• Queue Server Mode
When using queue server mode, all print server functions are supported, so there is no need for
other print server software or hardware. In NDS queue server mode (NDS PServer), the NDS
print server is used for printing. In bindery queue server mode (Bindery PServer), the bindery print
server is used for printing. Note that if you use queue server mode, a NetWare user license is
required for each network interface.
• Remote Printer Mode
In remote printer mode, the printer is controlled by the NetWare print server. Thus, a NetWare
print server is required. In NDS remote printer mode (NPrinter), the NDS print server is used for
printing, and in bindery remote printer mode (RPrinter), the bindery print server is used for printing.
502 Network Setting
Network Setting (Windows)
Using NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to set up the print server
Use NWADMIN to set up the print server if NDS queue server mode or remote printer mode is used.
1.
2.
Log into NetWare as Administrator or with equivalent rights, and then start NWADMIN.
Run Quick Setup.
1. Choose Print Services Quick Setup in the Tools menu.
2. Enter a desired name in Print Server Name. To use an existing print server, click the button at right
and choose the name from the list.
3. Enter a desired printer name in Name.
4. To use the printer in queue server mode, choose Other/Unknown in Type. To use the printer in
remote printer mode, choose Parallel in Type, click Communications, and set Ports to LPT1 and
Connection Type to Manual Load.
5. Enter a desired queue name in Name.
6. In Volume, enter the volume object (that is, the object representing the physical volume on the
network) where the print queue will be created. Click the button at right to choose from a list.
7. Complete other settings as needed and click OK.
Note
• The print server name will be required when conguring the printer’s network settings. Note the
print server name for future reference.
• When running Quick Setup, the printer is assigned printer number “0”. When using the printer in
queue server mode, do not change the printer number from “0”.
3.
Set a password.
1. Right-click the print server created in step 2 and choose Details.
2. Click Change Password to open the password input dialog box. Enter the password.
3. Click OK to close the password input dialog box.
4. Click OK or Cancel to close the details dialog box.
4.
To use the printer in remote printer mode, start the print server.
To use the NetWare le server as the print server, enter “LOAD PSERVER.NLM” at the le
server and press the Enter key.
Note
• This procedure is not required when using queue server mode.
Network Setting 503
Network Setting (Windows)
Use PCONSOLE to set up the print server if bindery queue server mode or remote printer mode is used.
1.
2.
3.
Log into NetWare as Supervisor and start PCONSOLE.
Switch to bindery mode.
If the print server has not been created, create it.
1. In Available Options, select Quick Setup and press the Enter key.
2. Enter the name of the new print server, the new printer, and the queue.
Note
• The print server name will be required when conguring the printer’s protocol settings. Note down
the print server name for future reference.
4.
Specify the printer type.
1. To use the printer in queue server mode, choose Other/Unknown in Type. To use remote printer
mode, set Printer Type to Parallel and Position to Manual Load.
2. Press the Esc key.
3. After the conrmation message is displayed, choose Yes and press the Enter key.
5.
Set a password.
1. In Available Options, select Print Servers and press the Enter key.
2. Select the print server created in step 2 and press the Enter key.
3. Select Password, and press the Enter key to display the password input dialog box.
4. Enter the password and press the Enter key.
6.
Press the Esc key several times to display the dialog box for conrming that PCONSOLE
is nished.
7.
Click Yes to exit PCONSOLE.
504 Network Setting
Network Setting (Windows)
Specifying NetWare Protocols
Follow the steps below to congure NetWare protocol settings other than the frame type by using RemoteUI.
Note
• For details on RemoteUI, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.486)
1.
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http://“printer IP address or name”/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the NetWare group to display the Edit NetWare Protocol
Settings page.
6.
7.
Make sure the Frame Type indicates the frame type used on the NetWare network.
To use burst mode, choose On for NCP Burst Mode.
Note
• Burst mode supports fast data transfer when printing in queue server mode. Normally, choose On.
8.
In Print Application, click the print service to be used.
Note
• Only one print service selected here will be enabled. Multiple print services are not available at
the same time.
9.
10.
For packet signature, click If Requested by Server in Packet Signature.
Complete the following settings based on the selected service.
• If you have selected Bindery PServer: Queue Server Mode (Using a Bindery Print Server)
1. In File Server Name, enter the le server name.
2. In Print Server Name, enter the name of the print server created in "Specifying NetWare
Print Services. (→P.502)"
3. In Print Server Password, enter the password of the print server created in "Specifying
NetWare Print Services (→P.502) ".
4. In Polling Interval, specify the interval at which the printer checks the NetWare print queue.
• If you have selected RPrinter: Remote Printer Mode (Using a Bindery Print Server)
1. In Print Server Name, enter the advertising name of the print server created in "Specifying
NetWare Print Services (→P.502) ".
2. In Printer Number, enter the same printer number specied in "Specifying NetWare Print
Services (→P.502) ".
Network Setting 505
Network Setting (Windows)
• If you have selected NDS PServer: Queue Server Mode (Using an NDS Print Server)
1. In Tree Name and Context Name, enter the tree and context name of the print server. Do not
exceed 255 characters for the context name.
2. In Print Server Name, enter the name of the print server created in "Specifying NetWare
Print Services (→P.502) ".
3. In Print Server Password, enter the password of the print server created in "Specifying
NetWare Print Services (→P.502) ".
4. In Polling Interval, specify the interval at which the printer checks the NetWare print queue.
• If you have selected NPrinter: Remote Printer Mode (Using a NDS Print Server)
1. In Print Server Name, enter the advertising name of the print server created in "Specifying
NetWare Print Services (→P.502) ". Usually, the advertising name is the same as the name of
the print server.
2. In Printer Number, enter the same printer number specied in "Specifying NetWare Print
Services (→P.502) ".
11.
12.
Click OK to display the Network page.
Click Reset to activate the settings.
For a list of NetWare protocol settings items, see “Conguring the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings”.
(→P.490)
Note
• If you use RemoteUI to display the print log in RPrinter or NPrinter mode, the document and user
information cannot be obtained. Thus, Document Name only indicates Unknown, and the User Name
information is identied as RPRINTER/NPRINTER.
506 Network Setting
Network Setting (Windows)
Conguring NetWare Network Settings
To print over a NetWare network, congure the network environment as follows.
Important
• To congure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as “Administrator”
account. We recommend that your network administrator congure the network settings.
1.
Specify the Ethernet frame type for communication between the printer and computers.
For instructions, see “Specifying the Printer’s Frame Type”. (→P.500)
2.
Specify the NetWare print services, including the print server and queue.
For instructions, see “Specifying NetWare Print Services”. (→P.502)
3.
Specify NetWare protocol details besides the frame type.
For instructions, see “Specifying NetWare Protocols”. (→P.505)
After you have completed the steps above, congure each computer for printing over the
NetWare network.
4.
Connect to the NetWare network.
Install NetWare client software on each computer to be used for printing over the network, and
log in to the NetWare server or tree. For instructions on connection, refer to the NetWare and
operating system documentation.
5.
Install the printer driver.
Follow the instructions of your network administrator to install the printer driver on each computer
to be used for printing. When installing the printer driver, choose Network Printer as the printer
destination, and then choose the print queue created from the NetWare print service settings.
6.
Follow these steps to congure the printer port. This step is not necessary if you specied the
printer destination during installation of the printer driver.
1. Open the Printers and Faxes (or Printers) window.
2. Right-click the printer icon and choose Properties.
3. Click the Port (or Advanced) tab to display the Port (or Advanced) sheet.
4. As the destination port, specify the print queue created by conguring the NetWare print service
settings.
Network Setting 507
Network Setting (Windows)
Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
Install imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer
as follows:
Important
• In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows Vista, you must log on with
administrative rights equivalent to the “Administrator” account.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Insert the User Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.
On the Setup Menu window, click Install Individual Software.
Click Install in imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Follow the instructions on the screen to proceed with the installation.
508 Network Setting
Network Setting (Windows)
Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility
From a computer running Windows, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility provided with the
printer to congure the printer’s IP address. This topic describes how to congure the IP address using
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Important
• To congure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as “Administrator”
account. We recommend that your network administrator congure the network settings.
• For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, see “Installing imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility”. (→P.445)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.
In the list of printers, select the printer to congure.
Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.
In the Setting IP Address list, choose Manual.
Enter the IP address assigned to the printer and click the Set button.
Click OK after the Conrmation message dialog box is displayed.
Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Note
• To congure the IP address automatically, choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select
DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP.
• You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway.
Network Setting 509
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh)
Specify the printer driver destination as follows if the printer’s IP address is changed, or if you will use the
printer over a network connection instead of via USB connection.
• If you switch to printing in an AppleTalk network, see “Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk Network
(Macintosh)”. (→P.512)
• If you switch to printing in a TCP/IP network, or if the printer’s IP address is changed, see “Conguring
the Destination for TCP/IP Network (Macintosh)”. (→P.515)
• If you switch to printing in a Bonjour network, see “Conguring the Destination for Bonjour Network
(Macintosh)”. (→P.517)
510 Network Setting
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
Conguring the Printer’s AppleTalk Network Settings
Follow the steps below to congure the AppleTalk network settings.
1.
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http://“printer IP address or name”/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the AppleTalk group to display the Edit AppleTalk
Protocol Settings page.
6.
Refer to the AppleTalk Settings Items table to complete the settings.
AppleTalk Settings Items
Item
Details
Default Setting
Phase Type
Specify whether to use AppleTalk. Disabled
If you will use AppleTalk, choose
Phase 2.
If you will not use AppleTalk,
choose Disabled.
Name (*1)
Specify the object name used by Canon NB-17FB (xxxxxx)
AppleTalk (in up to 31 single-byte
or 15 double-byte characters).
However, do not use the following
single-byte characters: @ * : =
Zone (*2)
Specify the printer zone name, up *
to 31 single-byte characters.
However, do not use the following
single-byte characters: @ : = Also
avoid using “*” (which represents
the default zone) in the middle of
a string.
*1:The object name you have specied in Name is displayed in Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center)
in Mac OS X. If you use multiple printers in the same zone, assign a unique name to each printer.
By default, the network interface name is “Canon NB-17FB (xxxxxx)”. (Here, xxxxxx is the last six
digits of the printer’s MAC address.)
*2: If zones have been created on the network, enter the name of the printer’s zone. If there are
no zones, leave the asterisk “*” entry (for the default zone) as it is. If you enter a network zone
name that does not match created zones, the printer will not be detected by Macintosh computers.
Consult your network administrator for information on zone names.
7.
Click OK to display the Network page.
Network Setting 511
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk Network
(Macintosh)
To print over an AppleTalk network, activate the AppleTalk protocol and congure the destination as follows.
Activating AppleTalk on the printer
Important
• By factory default, the AppleTalk protocol is disabled on the printer.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select AppleTalk, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select On, and then press the OK button.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
If any of the settings is changed, a message for conrmation is displayed. In this case, press
the OK button.
Important
• Be sure to complete step 5. This will activate the values you have entered.
Note
• By using RemoteUI, you can also specify the object name used by AppleTalk, as well as the printer
zone name.
For details on RemoteUI, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.486)
512 Network Setting
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
Conguring the Destination (Mac OS X)
Note
• The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of conguring the destination
varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.
1.
2.
In System Preferences, click Network to display the Network window.
In Show, choose Built-in Ethernet. Next, click AppleTalk, select Make AppleTalk Active,
and click Apply now.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Close the Network window and save the settings.
Choose Utilities (or Applications) in the Go menu of Finder.
Click Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center) in the Utilities folder.
If the printer name is not displayed in Printer List, click Add.
Network Setting 513
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
7.
Select the printer from the list in the Printer Browser window and click Add.
514 Network Setting
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
Conguring the Destination for TCP/IP Network
(Macintosh)
Follow the steps below to congure the destination if you will use the printer in a TCP/IP network.
Important
• If you will use the printer in a TCP/IP network, make sure the printer’s IP address is congured correctly.
• Conguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel (→P.483)
Conguring the Destination (Mac OS X)
Note
• The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of conguring the destination
varies depending on the version of Mac OS X. If you use other versions, refer to the help for the Printer
Setup Utility (or the Print Center).
1.
2.
3.
Choose Utilities (or Applications) in the Go menu of Finder.
4.
Click More Printers.
Click Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center) in the Utilities folder.
Click Add to display the Printer Browser window.
Network Setting 515
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
5.
In the list of connection methods, click Canon IP(iPF).
6.
Enter the printer’s IP address in Printer’s Address and click Add.
7.
Make sure the printer has been added, and then close the Printer List window.
Important
• If imagePROGRAF Generic is indicated in Kind, the printer information is not properly acquired. Make
sure the printer is on and connected to the network. (→P.676)
516 Network Setting
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
Conguring the Destination for Bonjour Network
(Macintosh)
In Mac OS X 10.2.8 and later, use Bonjour functions to easily connect the printer to the network. Follow the
steps below to congure the destination if you use the printer on TCP/IP network.
Important
• Bonjour and IP Print (Auto) do not support printing to a printer on other network groups that require a
router for connection. Make sure the computer and printer are on the same network. For information
about network settings, ask your network administrator.
• By default, Bonjour is activated on the printer. The printer name as displayed in Printer Setup Utility
(or Print Center) in Mac OS X is predened as the Multicast DNS Service Name. You can activate
or deactivate the Bonjour function or change the printer name by using RemoteUI. For instructions on
changing it, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.486)
1.
2.
3.
Choose Utilities (or Applications) in the Go menu of Finder.
4.
Select the printer from the list in the Printer Browser window and click Add.
Click Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center) in the Utilities folder.
If the printer name is not displayed in Printer List, click Add.
Network Setting 517
Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Printer Hard Disk Operations
Printer hard disk operations are available from the following programs and interfaces.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Printer driver
imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In
imagePROGRAF Free Layout (Windows)
imagePROGRAF Free Layout (Mac OS)
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
RemoteUI
Control Panel
The hard disk operations available through each interface are as follows.
Windows
Printer driver
imagePROGRAF
Free Layout
imagePROGRAF
Print Plug-In
Color imageRUNNER
Enlargement
Copy
imagePROGRAF
Status
Monitor
RemoteUI
Printer driver
Mac OS
imagePROGRAF
Print Plug-In
imagePROGRAF
Free Layout
Operation
Saving print
jobs
518 Hard Disk
Availability
Control
Panel
Color imageimageRUNNER
PROGRAF
Enlargement
Printmonitor
Copy
Availability
Availability
Availability Availability
Print
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Print (auto
delete)
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Save in mail box
Yes
No
No
No
No
Save data before Yes
printing(*1)
Yes
No
No
No
Do Not Save
Print Jobs in the
Common Box
No
No
No
No
Yes
Save print
jobs sent from
sources other
than the printer
driver
No
No
No
No
Yes
Hard Disk
Windows
Printer driver
imagePROGRAF
Free Layout
imagePROGRAF
Print Plug-In
Color imageRUNNER
Enlargement
Copy
imagePROGRAF
Status
Monitor
RemoteUI
Printer driver
Mac OS
imagePROGRAF
Print Plug-In
imagePROGRAF
Free Layout
Operation
Operations
with saved
jobs
Availability
Control
Panel
Color imageimageRUNNER
PROGRAF
Enlargement
Printmonitor
Copy
Availability
Availability
Availability Availability
Print saved jobs
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Delete saved
jobs
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Delete
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Priority
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Mail box
Move saved jobs No
management
Modify saved
No
jobs
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Job queue
Display job
management queue
Other
operations
Modify mail
boxes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Print a list of
saved jobs
No
No
No
No
Yes
Display a list of
saved jobs
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Display free hard No
disk space
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Initialize hard
disk
No
No
No
No
Yes
Display the time
of printing
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Display error messages
*1:This option is available in combination with Print, Print (auto delete), and Save in mail box. Print jobs
are saved and then printed.
Hard Disk 519
Hard Disk
Saved Print Jobs
Saving print jobs refers to the process of sending print jobs from a computer and storing them on the printer’s
hard disk. By saving print jobs, you can print them repeatedly as needed without sending them from a
computer again.
Saving print jobs offers the following benets.
• Save the time spent using a computer
When you send a print job to the printer, you can either print it and save it on the printer at the same time
or simply save it on the printer without printing it yet. Saved print jobs can be printed in the required
quantity later without the need to use a computer again.
• Simplify reprinting, if any errors occur
If errors occur in the middle of printing (as when paper runs out), you can resume printing after clearing
the error without resending the print job from a computer.
• Streamline printing work
Without using a computer, you can select print jobs and print in the desired quantity. You can also
select multiple print jobs to print during the same period. This enables unattended operation at night,
for example.
Note
• When you print jobs that have already been printed, the previous time of printing is indicated on the
Display Screen and in RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.
520 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Output Method ( Send job to )
To save print jobs on the printer’s hard disk, select Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS
X). Three options are available in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS X): Print, Print
(auto delete), and Save in mail box. Optionally, you can also select Save data before printing.
• Print
Save print jobs automatically at the same time they are printed. (This is the default format.)
• Print (auto delete)
Save print jobs temporarily at the same time they are printed and delete them after printing.
• Save in mail box
Save print jobs on the printer without printing them.
• Save data before printing
This option is available in combination with Print, Print (auto delete), and Save in mail box. Print
jobs are saved on the hard disk and then printed.
Hard Disk 521
Hard Disk
Storage destination
The storage area on the printer’s hard disk is divided into a temporary storage area and a permanent storage
area. Print jobs in the “job queue” or “common box” are saved in the temporary storage area. Jobs in
“personal boxes” are saved in the permanent storage area.
• Job queue
Print jobs in progress(*1) are temporarily saved in the job queue, a storage space where jobs are
saved in the order they will be printed.
The queue holds up to ten jobs. Subsequent jobs await the processing to add them to the queue.
*1: Jobs that are being saved, received, processed, printed, or deleted, or jobs that have been
interrupted or are waiting to print
• Common box
If you have selected Print in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS X) as the format
for print jobs sent from the computer, the jobs are saved in the common box.
There is one common box, numbered “00”. A password cannot be set for the common box.
Up to 100 print jobs can be saved here, but they will be deleted one after another starting with the
oldest job in the following situations.
• If there are more than 100 jobs in the common box and job queue combined
• If the temporary storage area becomes full during reception of print jobs for which you have
selected Print or Print (auto delete) in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS X)
• If there is not enough space in the temporary and permanent storage areas during reception of
print jobs for which you have selected Save in mail box in Output Method (in Windows) or
Send job to (in Mac OS X)
• Personal boxes
You can store jobs in personal boxes in either of the following ways.
• By moving a job stored in the common box into a personal box
• By selecting Save in mail box in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS X)
There are 29 personal boxes, numbered “01” to “29”. You can specify a name and password for each
personal box.
Up to 100 print jobs can be saved in all personal boxes combined.
522 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Saving Print Jobs Sent from Sources Other than the
Printer Driver
To save print jobs sent from software or systems other than the printer driver provided with the printer, complete
the Output Method and Save and Print settings in the printer menu.
Important
• Contact the software or system developer for information about support for this printer function.
Specifying Output Method
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Setup, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Output Method, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the output method, and then press the OK button.
• Print
Save print jobs automatically at the same time they are printed. (This is the default format.)
• Print (Auto Del)
Save print jobs temporarily at the same time they are printed and delete them after printing.
• Save: Box 01 (Here, the number represents a box number)
Save print jobs on the printer. If you select this option, go to step 5 and select the box for saving
print jobs.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the box, and then press the OK button.
Hard Disk 523
Hard Disk
Specifying Save and Print
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Setup, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Save and Print, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select On, or Off, and then press the OK button.
If you select On, print jobs are saved on the hard disk and then printed.
524 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Saving Print Jobs
You can save print jobs on the printer’s hard disk.
Save print jobs on the printer’s hard disk as follows.
• Using the printer driver (Windows) (→P.526)
• Using Print Plug-In (Windows)
See the section on the Set Conguration button on the Main sheet.
• Using Free Layout (Windows)
See the section on the Output Method dialog box.
• Using Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (Windows)
See the section on the Output Method button on the Output Settings sheet.
• Using imagePROGRAF Preview (Windows)
Printer driver settings will be used for the format of saved print jobs. (→P.526)
• Using the printer driver (Mac OS) (→P.527)
• Using Print Plug-In (Mac OS)
See the section on the Set Conguration button in the Main pane.
• Using Free Layout (Mac OS)
Printer driver settings will be used for the format of saved print jobs. (→P.527)
• Using Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (Mac OS)
See the section on the Output Method button in the Output Settings pane.
• Using imagePROGRAF Preview (Mac OS)
Printer driver settings will be used for the format of saved print jobs. (→P.527)
However, the document name will be imagePROGRAF.
Hard Disk 525
Hard Disk
Using the printer driver (Windows)
1.
Access the Page Setup sheet.
2.
Click Output Method to display the Output Method dialog box.
3.
Choose an Output Method.
• Print
Save print jobs automatically at the same time they are printed. (This is the default format.)
• Print (auto delete)
Save print jobs temporarily at the same time they are printed and delete them after printing.
• Save in mail box
Save print jobs on the printer without printing them.
If you choose Save in mail box, also specify the destination Personal Box in the Mail box list.
Note
• Click Acquire Mail Box Name to display Personal Box names in the Mail box list, as acquired
from the printer.
• Save data before printing
This option is available in combination with Print, Print (auto delete), and Save in mail box. Print
jobs are saved on the hard disk and then printed.
526 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
4.
In Name of data to be saved, specify how to name saved print jobs.
• To use the le name, choose Use le name.
• Otherwise choose Enter name and enter a name in Name.
5.
Click OK to close the Output Method dialog box.
Using the printer driver (Mac OS)
1.
Access the Additional Settings pane.
2.
Choose an Send job to.
• Print
Save print jobs automatically at the same time they are printed.
• Print (auto delete)
Save print jobs temporarily at the same time they are printed and delete them after printing.
• Save in mail box
Save print jobs on the printer without printing them.
The Destination dialog box is displayed if you select Save in mail box. Here, specify the name
and Personal Box number for saved print jobs.
1. In Document title, enter a name to identify saved print jobs.
2. Select the Personal Box number in the Mail box list.
3. Click OK to close the Destination dialog box.
Note
• Save data before printing
This option is available in combination with Print, Print (auto delete), and Save in mail box. Print
jobs are saved on the hard disk and then printed.
Hard Disk 527
Hard Disk
Do Not Save Print Jobs in the Common Box
If you have selected Print in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS X) in the printer driver as
the format for print jobs sent from the computer, the jobs are saved in the common box. (→P.520)
You can select Save: Shared Box > Off in the printer menu so that print jobs for which you have selected Output
Method > Print in the printer driver are deleted from the common box after printing.
Use this function when printing highly condential documents.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Setup, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Save: Shared Box, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Off, and then press the OK button.
528 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Managing Queued Jobs (Deleting or Preempting Other
Jobs)
You can delete queued jobs.
You can also select queued jobs and give them rst priority, to print them immediately after the printer has
printed jobs that are currently being processed or printed.
Note
• You cannot interrupt jobs that are currently being saved, processed, printed, or deleted by printing
other jobs before these processes are nished.
You can manage queued print jobs as follows.
•
•
•
•
Using the Control Panel
Using RemoteUI
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)
Hard Disk 529
Hard Disk
Using the Control Panel
1.
Press the Menu button to display Menu Durng Prtng.
2.
You can manage queued jobs as follows.
• Deleting queued jobs
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Mgmt Menu, and then press the OK button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Queue Ope., and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the print job to delete, and then press the ► button.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Delete, and then press the OK button.
• Changing the order of printing
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Mgmt Menu, and then press the OK button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Queue Ope., and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the job to print rst, and then press the ► button.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Priority, and then press the OK button.
Using RemoteUI
On the Print Job page, select the job to manage and how to manage it. For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
530 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
On the Job sheet, select the job and the desired function. The following functions are available.
•
•
•
•
Preempting other jobs
Pausing printing
Resuming printing
Canceling print jobs
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
On the Driver pane, select the job and the desired function. The following functions are available.
•
•
•
•
Preempting other jobs
Pausing printing
Resuming printing
Canceling print jobs
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help.
Hard Disk 531
Hard Disk
Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes
By default, no passwords are set for personal boxes. For greater security, you can set passwords for each
personal box. After you set a password, it will be required to modify the personal box settings, as well as to
display, print, delete, move, and modify jobs saved in the personal box.
Note
• A password cannot be set for the common box.
• Enter a four-digit number as the password, in the range 0001-9999.
• Even if you have set passwords, they are not required to access personal boxes in Administrator
Mode in RemoteUI.
You can set a password for a personal box as follows.
• Using RemoteUI
• Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
• Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
Using RemoteUI
1.
2.
On the Stored Job page, select the personal box for a password.
Click Edit.
532 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
3.
In the Set/Register User’s Inbox dialog box, specify the password and click OK.
• Set Password : Select the check box.
• Password : Enter the password. (This eld is limited to four digits in the range 0001-9999.)
• Conrmation Number : Re-enter the password to conrm it.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
1.
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a listed personal box for a password and click Open.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set for the personal box.
Hard Disk 533
Hard Disk
2.
In the Documents dialog box, click Settings.
3.
In the Settings dialog box, specify the password and click OK.
• Set password : Select the check box.
• Password : Enter the password. (This eld is limited to four digits in the range 0001-9999.)
• Re-enter to conrm : Re-enter the password to conrm it.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help le.
534 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
1.
In the Hard Disk pane, click “►” next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs. Select a saved
job and click Set.
2.
In the Settings dialog box, specify the password and click OK.
• Set password : Select the check box.
• Password : Enter the password. (This eld is limited to four digits in the range 0001-9999.)
• Verify : Re-enter the password to conrm it.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help le.
Hard Disk 535
Hard Disk
Naming Personal Boxes
By default, personal boxes are unnamed. You can name them for easier management.
You can assign a name to a personal box as follows.
• Using RemoteUI
• Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
• Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
Using RemoteUI
1.
On the Stored Job page, select the personal box to identify.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set for the personal box.
2.
Click Edit.
536 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
3.
In the Set/Register User’s Inbox dialog box, enter the personal box name in Inbox Name and
click OK.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
1.
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a listed personal box to identify and click Open.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set for the personal box.
Hard Disk 537
Hard Disk
2.
In the Documents dialog box, click Settings.
3.
In the Settings dialog box, enter the personal box name and click OK.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help le.
538 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
1.
On the Hard Disk pane, click “►” next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs. Select a saved
job and click Set.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
The password is a four-digit number.
2.
In the Settings dialog box, enter the personal box name and click OK.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help le.
Hard Disk 539
Hard Disk
Displaying a List of Saved Jobs
You can display saved print jobs in the box shared among all users and in each personal box.
View the list of stored print jobs as follows.
•
•
•
•
Using the Control Panel
Using RemoteUI
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)
Using the Control Panel
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
Display a list of saved print jobs.
• To display jobs saved in the Common Box
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management, and then press the ► button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Com. BOX Ope., and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ button to select Job List.
• To display jobs saved in Personal Boxes
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management, and then press the ► button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Psnl. BOX Ope., and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the folder, and then press the ► button.
4. Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ button to select Job List.
Note
• You can check a list of print jobs in the queue by choosing Job Management → Job Queue Ope..
540 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Using RemoteUI
Choose a mail box on the Stored Job page to display a list of jobs saved in that mail box.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
Jobs saved in the mail box are listed.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
Hard Disk 541
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a mail box in the list and click Open.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
Jobs saved in that mail box are displayed in the Documents dialog box.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help le.
542 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)
On the Hard Disk pane, click “►” next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
The password is a four-digit number.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help le.
Hard Disk 543
Hard Disk
Printing a List of Saved Jobs
You can print a list of saved print jobs in the common box and each personal box.
You can also print a list of print jobs by using the Control Panel.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
Print a list of saved print jobs.
• To print a list of jobs saved in the Common Box
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management, and then press the ► button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Com. BOX Ope., and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Job List, and then press the ► button.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
• To print a list of jobs saved in Personal Boxes
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management, and then press the ► button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Psnl. BOX Ope., and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the folder, and then press the ► button.
4. Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Job List, and then press the ► button.
6. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
544 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Printing Saved Jobs
You can print jobs stored on the printer’s hard disk as follows.
•
•
•
•
Using the Control Panel
Using RemoteUI
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
Using the Control Panel
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
Print the saved job.
• Printing jobs in the common box
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management, and then press the ► button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Com. BOX Ope., and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job List, and then press the ► button.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the saved job to print, and then press the ► button.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print, and then press the ► button.
6. Conrm the paper to use for printing and press the OK button.
7. Specify the number of copies and press the OK button.
• Printing jobs in personal boxes
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management, and then press the ► button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Psnl. BOX Ope., and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the folder, and then press the ► button.
4. Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job List, and then press the ► button.
6. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the saved job to print, and then press the ► button.
7. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print, and then press the ► button.
8. Conrm the paper to use for printing and press the OK button.
9. Specify the number of copies and press the OK button.
Hard Disk 545
Hard Disk
Note
• Print Time initially indicates how long it took to nish printing one copy during the previous print job.
If you change the value in Number of Copies, Print Time indicates the time it took to print one copy
during the previous print job multiplied by the number of copies.
Using RemoteUI
1.
On the Stored Job page, choose the mail box.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
2.
Select the print job in the list and click Print.
546 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
3.
On the Print Saved Document page, enter the quantity to print in Copies and click OK.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help le.
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
1.
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a mail box in the list and click Open.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
Hard Disk 547
Hard Disk
2.
In the Documents dialog box, select the print job in the list and click Print.
3.
In the Print dialog box, enter the quantity to print in Copies and click OK.
Note
• Print Time initially indicates how long it took to nish printing one copy during the previous print job.
If you change the value in Copies, Print Time indicates the time it took to print one copy during the
previous print job multiplied by the number of copies.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help le.
548 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
1.
In the Hard Disk pane, click “►” next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
The password is a four-digit number.
2.
Select the saved job in the list and click Resume Printing to display the Resume Printing
dialog box.
Hard Disk 549
Hard Disk
3.
Specify the number of copies and click the OK button.
Note
• Print Time is only displayed in Mac OS X 10.5.
Print Time initially indicates how long it took to nish printing one copy during the previous print job.
If you change the value in Copies, Print Time indicates the time it took to print one copy during the
previous print job multiplied by the number of copies.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help le.
550 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Moving Saved Jobs
Print jobs for which Print is selected as the format in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS
X) are saved in the common box, number “00”. However, jobs in this mail box will be deleted one after another
starting with the oldest job in the following situations.
• If there are more than 100 saved jobs in the common box and job queue combined
• If the temporary storage area becomes full during reception of print jobs for which you have selected
Print or Print (auto delete) in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job to (in Mac OS X)
• If the temporary and permanent storage areas no longer have enough space during reception of print
jobs for which you have selected Save in mail box in Output Method (in Windows) or Send job
to (in Mac OS X)
You can move jobs to personal boxes “01” to “29” to prevent them from being deleted. (Up to 100 jobs can
be stored here.)
You can also move saved jobs from one personal box to another.
Move stored print jobs as follows.
• Using RemoteUI
• Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
• Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
Note
• Jobs saved in personal boxes cannot be moved to the common box.
Using RemoteUI
1.
On the Stored Job page, choose the mail box.
Hard Disk 551
Hard Disk
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
2.
Select the print job in the list and click Move.
3.
On the Move Document page, select the name or number of the destination personal box in
the Destination mail box list and click OK.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help le.
552 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
1.
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a mail box in the list and click Open.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
2.
In the Documents dialog box, select the print job in the list and click Move.
Hard Disk 553
Hard Disk
3.
In the Move dialog box, select the destination personal box and click OK.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help le.
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
1.
In the Hard Disk pane, click “►” next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
The password is a four-digit number.
554 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
2.
Select the print job in the list and click Move.
3.
In the Move Document dialog box, select the destination personal box and click OK.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help le.
Hard Disk 555
Hard Disk
Displaying Details of Saved Jobs
You can view details of stored print jobs as follows.
• Using RemoteUI
• Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
• Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
Using RemoteUI
1.
On the Stored Job page, choose the mail box.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
2.
Select the saved job in the list and click Details.
556 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
The Details of the saved document page is displayed.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
1.
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a mail box in the list and click Open.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
Hard Disk 557
Hard Disk
2.
In the Documents dialog box, select the saved job in the list and click Properties.
The Properties dialog box is displayed.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help le.
558 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
1.
On the Hard Disk pane, click ► next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
The password is a four-digit number.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help le.
Hard Disk 559
Hard Disk
Renaming Saved Jobs
You can rename stored print jobs as follows.
• Using RemoteUI
• Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
• Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
Using RemoteUI
1.
On the Stored Job page, choose the mail box.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
2.
Select the saved job in the list and click Details.
560 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
3.
On the Details of the saved document page, click Change Document.
4.
On the Rename Saved Document page, enter the new job name in Document Name and
click OK.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
Hard Disk 561
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
1.
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a mail box in the list and click Open.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
2.
In the Documents dialog box, select the saved job in the list and click Properties.
562 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
3.
In the Properties dialog box, enter the new job name and click OK.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help le.
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
1.
On the Hard Disk pane, click ► next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
The password is a four-digit number.
2.
Select the saved job in the list and click Set.
Hard Disk 563
Hard Disk
3.
In the Settings dialog box, enter the new job name and click OK.
Documents cannot be renamed unless a password has been set. In this case, specify a
password. After renaming, you can cancel the password as needed.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help le.
564 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Deleting Saved Jobs
You can delete saved jobs in the box shared among all users and in each personal box.
Delete stored print jobs as follows.
•
•
•
•
Using the Control Panel
Using RemoteUI
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
Using the Control Panel
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
Delete the saved job.
• To delete saved jobs in the Common Box
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management, and then press the ► button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Com. BOX Ope., and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job List, and then press the ► button.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the saved job to delete, and then press the ► button.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Delete, and then press the ► button.
6. Conrm the print job for deletion and press the OK button.
• To delete saved jobs in Personal Boxes
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management, and then press the ► button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Psnl. BOX Ope., and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the folder, and then press the ► button.
4. Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job List, and then press the ► button.
6. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the saved job to delete, and then press the ► button.
7. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Delete, and then press the ► button.
8. Conrm the print job for deletion and press the OK button.
Hard Disk 565
Hard Disk
Using RemoteUI
1.
On the Stored Job page, choose the mail box.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
2.
Select the saved job in the list and click Delete.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
566 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
1.
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a mail box in the list and click Open.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
2.
In the Documents dialog box, select the print job in the list and click Delete.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help le.
Hard Disk 567
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
1.
On the Hard Disk pane, click ► next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
The password is a four-digit number.
2.
Select the saved job in the list and click Delete.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help le.
568 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Checking the Free Hard Disk Space
You can check the space available on the printer’s hard disk as follows.
•
•
•
•
Using the Control Panel
Using RemoteUI
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)
Using the Control Panel
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Information, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select HDD Information, and then press the ► button.
Note
• You can also check the free hard disk space by pressing the Information button three times.
Using RemoteUI
To view the box list, select Stored Job in Job Management. On the Stored Job page, the free hard disk
space is shown in the upper-right corner when boxes are listed.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
Hard Disk 569
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
The Hard Disk sheet shows the free hard disk space.
■Hard Disk Sheet in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
The Hard Disk pane shows the free hard disk space.
■Hard Disk Pane in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help.
570 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Erasing Data on the Printer’s Hard Disk
You can erase data on the printer’s hard disk from the Control Panel.
There are three ways to erase the data, as follows.
Erasure Method
Time Required
Details
High Speed
A few seconds
Erases le management data for print job data stored on the
printer’s hard disk. Choose this method for relatively fast
erasure. Because only the le management data is erased, the
print job data itself is not erased. Note that it may be possible to
read this data using commercial data recovery software.
Secure High Spd.
About 40 minutes
Overwrites the entire hard disk with random data. No verication
is performed to check if the data was correctly written. Choose
this method to erase highly condential data. Note that it may
be possible to read the overwritten data using specialized data
recovery tools.
Secure
About 30 hours
Overwrites the entire hard disk with 00, FF, and random data
(one time each). Verication is performed to check if the data
was correctly written. Choose this method to erase especially
condential data. It is virtually impossible to recover the
overwritten data. Conforms to the DoD5220.22-M standard of
the U.S. Department of Defense.
Note
• For a more secure method of preventing data recovery, we recommend physically or magnetically
destroying the hard disk. In this case, the hard disk can no longer be used.
• Erase HDD Data is not available if there is a job queue.
Also note that during execution of Erase HDD Data, print jobs cannot be processed.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Setup, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Erase HDD Data, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the method of erasure, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button to display the conrmation screen.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button to start erasure.
Hard Disk 571
Adjusting the Printhead
Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the Printhead
Correcting Print Misalignment
If printed vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment, adjust the Printhead alignment. Adjust the
Printhead alignment automatically or manually by using a printed test pattern.
For instructions on automatic adjustment, see “Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Automatically”. (→P.572)
For instructions on manual adjustment, see “Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Manually”. (→P.574)
Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Automatically
If printed vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment, adjust the Printhead alignment. Adjust the
Printhead alignment automatically or manually by printing and reading a test pattern.
There are two modes for automatic adjustment: Standard Adj. and Advanced Adj.. Standard Adj. will x
most slight image distortion or color misalignment, but if not, try Advanced Adj..
If using special media or printing does not improve even after performing automatic adjustment using
advanced adjustment, try manual adjustment. For instructions on manual adjustment, see “Adjusting the
Printhead Alignment Manually”. (→P.574)
Follow these steps for standard automatic adjustment of the Printhead.
1.
When using sheets, have two unused sheets A4/Letter-sized or larger ready when Standard
Adj. is selected or 8 when Advanced Adj. is selected.
When using a roll, load a roll 10 inches (254 mm) or wider.
• Loading Sheets Manually (→P.151)
• Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder (→P.119)
• Loading Rolls in the Roll Feed Unit (→P.121)
• Loading the Roll in the Printer (→P.122)
Note
• Use Standard Adj. if you have switched to another type of paper or if you want the boundaries
between colors to appear as attractive as possible.
• Use Advanced Adj. to ne-tune the space between nozzles or colors if you have switched the
printhead or if you want printed documents to appear as vivid as possible. We recommend using
Advanced Adj. for printing at a higher level of image quality.
• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting on the printer. Adjustment
cannot be completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.
• We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for adjustment.
• This function is not available for CAD Tracing Paper, CAD Translucent Matte Film, or CAD Clear
Film. If adjustment is not possible as expected using highly transparent lm or similar media, try
another type of media or adjust the Printhead alignment manually. (→P.574)
572 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the Printhead
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto Head Adj., and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Advanced Adj., and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
A test pattern is printed for printhead adjustment.
After reading the pattern, the printer automatically adjusts the Printhead alignment.
Note
• If paper is fed automatically and no roll is loaded, select the media source and click the OK button.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 573
Adjusting the Printhead
Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Manually
If printed vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment, adjust the Printhead alignment. Adjust the
Printhead alignment automatically or manually by using a printed test pattern.
You can adjust the Printhead alignment automatically or manually. Normally, choose automatic adjustment. If
using special media or printing does not improve even after performing automatic adjustment using advanced
adjustment, try manual adjustment. For instructions on automatic adjustment, see “Adjusting the Printhead
Alignment Automatically”. (→P.572)
Follow these steps for standard manual adjustment of the Printhead.
Note
• If Manual Head Adj is unusable although displayed in the menu, choose Advanced Adj. in Auto Head
Adj.. Manual Head Adj is available in the menu after you try Auto Head Adj. once.
1.
When using sheets, have two unused sheets A4-sized or larger ready.
When using a roll, load a roll 10 inches (254 mm) or wider.
• Loading Sheets Manually (→P.151)
• Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder (→P.119)
• Loading Rolls in the Roll Feed Unit (→P.121)
• Loading the Roll in the Printer (→P.122)
Note
• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting on the printer. Adjustment
cannot be completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.
• We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for feed amount adjustment.
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual Head Adj, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
A test pattern is printed for printhead adjustment.
6.
7.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select D, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select D-1, and then press the ► button.
574 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the Printhead
8.
Examine test pattern D-1 for printhead adjustment. After you determine the pattern with straight
lines, press ▲ or ▼ to choose the pattern number, and then press the OK button.
Note
• If lines seem straightest in two patterns but you cannot decide which one is better, choose an
intermediate value. For example, choose 11 if you cannot decide whether pattern 10 or 12 is better.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Repeat steps 7 and 8 to specify the adjustment value for D-2 to D-5 and D-13 to D-18.
Press the ◄ button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Register Setting, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
The printer now goes online.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 575
Adjusting the Printhead
Adjusting the Printhead Height
If printed documents rub against the printer during printing or if the edge of paper is wrinkled from rubbing, it
may help to raise the Printhead.
If image edges are blurred, it may help to lower the Printhead.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Height, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the Printhead height, and then press the OK button.
576 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting the Feed Amount Automatically
If printed images are affected by banding in different colors, adjust the amount that paper is fed. There are
two modes for adjusting the amount paper is fed, Standard Adj. and Advanced Adj.. Advanced Adj. offers
a wider range of adjustment than Standard Adj.. If using Standard Adj. does not eliminate streaks, or if
streaks are quite noticeable, try Advanced Adj..
Follow the steps below for standard automatic adjustment of the feed amount.
When using highly transparent media for which automatic adjustment is not supported, you must adjust the
feed amount manually. For instructions on manual adjustment, see “Adjusting the Feed Amount Manually”.
(→P.580)
Note
• To adjust the measurement scale and ensure accuracy (so that lines in CAD drawings are printed
at exactly the right length, for example), specify the amount of paper stretching or shrinkage when
adjusting the feed amount. (→P.583)
• This may take some time, depending on the type of paper.
Important
• Use paper of the same type and size for adjustment as you will use for printing.
• To apply the results of adjusting the feed amount in printing, you must rst set Feed Priority to Band
Joint. Note that if you select Automatic, the results of adjustment will only be applied in printing if you
set Print Priority in the printer driver to Image or Ofce Document. (→P.216)
Follow these steps to change the Feed Priority setting.
1. Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Feed Priority, and then press the ► button.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Band Joint, and then press the OK button.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 577
Adjusting the feed amount
Follow the steps below to adjust the feed amount automatically.
1.
Load one unused sheet A4/Letter-sized or larger when Standard Adj. is selected or two when
Advanced Adj. is selected.
When using a roll, load a roll 10 inches (254 mm) or wider.
• Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder (→P.119)
• Loading Rolls in the Roll Feed Unit (→P.121)
• Loading the Roll in the Printer (→P.122)
• Loading Sheets Manually (→P.151)
Note
• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting. Adjustment cannot be
completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto Band Adj., and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Standard Adj. or Advanced Adj., and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
A test pattern is printed for band adjustment.
After reading the pattern, the printer automatically adjusts the feed amount and returns to online
mode.
Note
• If paper is fed automatically and no roll is loaded, select the media source and click the OK button.
• In some cases, the feed amount cannot be adjusted automatically. If so, choose Advanced Adj.
in Auto Band Adj. (→P.59)
• If printed documents are still affected by uneven contrast or banding in different colors at regular
intervals after this adjustment, you can adjust the feed amount during printing. (→P.579)
578 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting the feed amount during printing
If, during printing, the contrast is uneven sideways across the paper or banding in different colors appears
every 40 mm (1.6 in) or so, try adjusting the feed amount as follows. However, note that because printing is
paused, colors may be slightly different.
1.
Press the Online button to pause printing.
2.
Press the Menu button to display Menu Durng Prtng.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Fine Band Adj., and then press the OK button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to change the value, and then press the OK button.
Note
• The supported range is -5 to +5.
5.
Press the Online button to resume printing.
Note
• The Fine Band Adj. value set during printing is also applied to the next print job. However, the value is
reset to 0 if you execute Auto Band Adj., Manual Band Adj, or Adjust Length.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 579
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting the Feed Amount Manually
If printed images are affected by banding in different colors, adjust the amount that paper is fed.
This topic describes how to adjust the feed amount manually.
When using highly transparent media for which automatic adjustment is not supported, adjust the feed amount
manually. We recommend automatic adjustment for other types of media. For instructions on automatic
adjustment, see “Adjusting the Feed Amount Automatically”. (→P.577)
Note
• To adjust the measurement scale and ensure accuracy (so that lines in CAD drawings are printed
at exactly the right length, for example), specify the amount of paper stretching or shrinkage when
adjusting the feed amount. (→P.583)
Important
• Use paper of the same type and size for adjustment as you will use for printing.
• To apply the results of adjusting the feed amount in printing, you must rst set Feed Priority to Band
Joint. Note that if you select Automatic, the results of adjustment will only be applied in printing if you
set Print Priority in the printer driver to Image or Ofce Document. (→P.216)
Follow these steps to change the Feed Priority setting.
1. Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Feed Priority, and then press the ► button.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Band Joint, and then press the OK button.
580 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the feed amount
Follow the steps below to adjust the feed amount manually.
1.
When using sheets, load two unused sheets A4/Letter-sized or larger.
When using a roll, load a roll 10 inches (254 mm) or wider.
• Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder (→P.119)
• Loading Rolls in the Roll Feed Unit (→P.121)
• Loading the Roll in the Printer (→P.122)
• Loading Sheets Manually (→P.151)
Note
• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting. Adjustment cannot be
completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual Band Adj, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
Test pattern A is printed for band adjustment.
6.
Examine test pattern A for band adjustment. After you determine the pattern in which streaks are
least noticeable, press ▲ or ▼ to choose the pattern number, and then press the OK button.
Test pattern B is printed for band adjustment.
Note
• If streaks seem least noticeable in two patterns but you cannot decide which one is better, choose an
intermediate value. For example, choose 11 if you cannot decide whether pattern 10 or 12 is better.
7.
Examine test pattern B for band adjustment. After you determine the pattern in which streaks are
least noticeable, press ▲ or ▼ to choose the pattern number, and then press the OK button.
The feed amount is adjusted, and the printer goes online.
If printed documents are still affected by uneven contrast or banding in different colors at regular
intervals after this adjustment, you can adjust the feed amount during printing. (→P.582)
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 581
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting the feed amount during printing
If, during printing, the contrast is uneven sideways across the paper or banding in different colors appears
every 40 mm (1.6 in) or so, try adjusting the feed amount as follows. The results of adjustment are applied to
printing in progress, enabling you to check the results immediately. However, note that because printing is
paused, colors may be slightly different.
1.
Press the Online button to pause printing.
2.
Press the Menu button to display Menu Durng Prtng.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Fine Band Adj., and then press the OK button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to change the value, and then press the OK button.
Note
• The supported range is -5 to +5.
5.
Press the Online button to resume printing.
Note
• The Fine Band Adj. adjustment value set during printing is also applied to the next print job. However,
the value is reset to 0 if you execute Auto Band Adj., Manual Band Adj, or Adjust Length.
582 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting the Measurement Scale for Better Accuracy
To adjust the measurement scale and ensure accuracy (so that lines in CAD drawings are printed at exactly
the right length, for example), specify the amount of paper stretching or shrinkage when adjusting the feed
amount.
Note
• If printed images are affected by banding in different colors, adjust the amount that paper is fed.
(→P.580)
Important
• Use paper of the same type and size for adjustment as you will use for printing.
• To apply the results of adjusting the measurement scale for better accuracy in printing, you must rst set
Feed Priority to Print Length. Note that if you select Automatic, the results of adjustment will only be
applied in printing if you set Print Priority in the printer driver to Line Drawing/Text. (→P.216)
Follow these steps to change the Feed Priority setting.
1. Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Feed Priority, and then press the ► button.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Length or Automatic, and then press the OK button.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 583
Adjusting the feed amount
Follow these steps to adjust the scale for better accuracy.
1.
When using sheets, load one unused sheet A4/Letter-sized or larger.
When using a roll, load a roll 10 inches (254 mm) or wider.
• Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder (→P.119)
• Loading Rolls in the Roll Feed Unit (→P.121)
• Loading the Roll in the Printer (→P.122)
• Loading Sheets Manually (→P.151)
Note
• When loading paper, specify the correct paper type. When the paper type is not specied, the
printing quality may be affected without the correct adjustment of the feeding.
• We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for feed amount adjustment.
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Length, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
A test pattern is printed for adjustment based on the amount of paper stretching or shrinkage.
The scale bar shows “Millimeter” in 50 mm units and “Inch” in 1 inch units.
6.
Measure the length of the adjustment pattern. Calculate the difference between the measured
length and actual length. Enter it as a percentage and press the OK button.
You can adjust the value in 0.02% increments. Press ▲ to increase the value and ▼ to decrease
it.
If the scale is printed shorter than actual size, set the value toward the positive side; if it is printed
longer, set the value toward the negative side.
Note
• You can also specify the adjustment value by selecting Paper Details → Adjust Length.
584 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting Color on the Trailing Edge of Sheets
If printed sheets are affected by banding in different colors toward the end of the sheet (about 20-30 mm from
the edge), try adjusting the feed amount of the trailing edge of sheets.
Note
• If printed documents (including documents printed on rolls) are affected by banding in different colors
not only toward the end of the sheet but throughout the printed area, try adjusting the overall feed
amount. (→P.577)
• This adjustment is only possible when feeding paper from the Top Paper Feed Slot that can be set up
with a margin on the trailing edge of 3 mm (0.12 in). If you use paper for which you cannot specify a
trailing margin of 3 mm, it will be automatically ejected, and adjustment is not possible.
1.
Load a sheet of unused paper A4/Letter-sized or larger.
Note
• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting on the printer. Adjustment
cannot be completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.
• We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for adjustment.
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adj Far Ed Feed, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
A test pattern is printed for adjustment.
C1 is displayed on the Control Panel.
6.
Examine test pattern C1 for adjustment. After you determine the pattern in which streaks are
least noticeable, press the ▲ or ▼ to choose the pattern number, and then press the OK button.
C2 is displayed on the Control Panel.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 585
Adjusting the feed amount
7.
Examine test pattern C2 for adjustment. After you determine the pattern in which streaks are
least noticeable, press the ▲ or ▼ to choose the pattern number, and then press the OK button.
The printer now goes back online.
Note
• If streaks seem least noticeable in two patterns but you cannot decide which one is better, choose an
intermediate value. For example, choose 17 if you cannot decide whether pattern 16 or 18 is better.
586 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting the Vacuum Strength
When printing on heavyweight paper or paper that curls or wrinkles easily, if paper rubs against the printer or
the edge is wrinkled from rubbing, adjusting the level of suction against paper on the Platen may improve
results.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select VacuumStrngth, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the level of suction against paper on the Platen, and then press the
OK button.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 587
Color adjustment
Color adjustment
Using Color Calibration to Adjust Colors
Color calibration is a feature that compensates for changes in color from individual variation among Printhead
or from the printing environment, ensuring better color consistency.
We recommend using color calibration in the following situations.
• After initial installation
• After Printhead replacement
• If colors seem different from before (however, make sure you are printing under the same conditions
and in the same printing environment)
• When consistent color is desired from multiple printers (in this case, also use the same version of
rmware and printer driver and the same settings.)
When you execute color calibration, a test pattern is printed and an adjustment value is automatically set
based on the results of printing.
Important
• Before executing color calibration, you must prepare one of the following types of paper. Note that
various environmental conditions are recommended for various types of paper. Use the printer under
the recommended environmental conditions for the paper to be used. For details on recommended
environmental conditions for various paper, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)
Paper Compatible With
Color Calibration
Japan
Europe
Americas
HW Coated
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
Premium MatteP
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
GlossyPhoto 190
-
Compatible
Compatible
SatinPhoto 190
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
GlossyPhoto 240
-
Compatible
Compatible
SatinPhoto 240
-
Compatible
Compatible
Premium Gl 200
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
Prem.SemiGl 200
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
Premium Gl 280
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
Prem.SemiGl 280
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
Glossy Photo
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
HW GlossyPhoto2
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
HW SemiGlPhoto2
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
Poster Semi-Gl
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
PhotoPlusGl 2
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
588 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Color adjustment
Photo PaperPlus
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
Photo Pro Plat.
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
FineArt Photo
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
FneArt HW Photo
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
Comm Proong
-
Compatible
Compatible
RC Proong 210
-
Compatible
Compatible
Proong Paper
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
Opaque Paper
-
Compatible
-
Art Extr Smooth
-
Compatible
-
• Optimal adjustment values from color calibration are also applied for paper other than the type you use
to execute color calibration when printing on that other type of paper.
• In the printer driver or in the MAIN MENU of the Control Panel, you can specify whether to apply the
adjustment value from color calibration when printing. The printer driver settings are given priority.
For menu details, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.59)
For information on printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.
• Printer Driver Settings (Windows) (→P.394)
• Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X) (→P.447)
• Before color calibration, ensure the printer is not exposed to direct sunlight or other strong sources of
light.
• If you reinstall the printer driver and change the region selection of the Media Conguration Tool,
region-specic paper information originally registered on the printer before installation will be deleted. If
the information of paper you used for color calibration is deleted, such color calibration can no longer be
applied to any type of paper. To apply the results of color calibration, perform color calibration again
using paper supported in the newly selected region and compatible with color calibration. See the Media
Conguration Tool Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh)
• Default settings will be restored if you select MAIN MENU > System Setup > Reset PaprSetngs > Yes.
Because information added or updated using the Media Conguration Tool is also deleted, if paper of
which information was added using the Media Conguration Tool was used for color calibration and is
now deleted, such color calibration can no longer be applied to any type of paper. To apply the results
of color calibration, perform color calibration again using a paper included originally in the default
settings that is compatible with color calibration. See the Media Conguration Tool Guide (Windows)
or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).
Note
• For further adjustment of the color of documents as printed applying color calibration, adjust the color in
the printer driver. (→P.206)
• You can check when color calibration was executed and what paper was used from Status Print,
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (in Windows) or imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (on a Macintosh
computer) in the MAIN MENU on the Control Panel.
For menu details, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.59)
For details on imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.
For details on imagePROGRAF Printmonitor, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 589
Color adjustment
Follow these steps to execute color calibration.
1.
Load paper compatible with color calibration.
When using sheets, load paper A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.5×11 in) vertical, or larger. One
sheet is required.
When using a roll, load a roll 10 inches (254 mm) or wider.
• Loading Sheets Manually (→P.151)
• Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder (→P.119)
• Loading Rolls in the Roll Feed Unit (→P.121)
• Loading Rolls in the Printer (→P.122)
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Calibration, and then press ►.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto Adjust, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
After the printer measures environmental conditions and checks the paper, a test pattern for color
calibration is printed. An adjustment value based on the results of printing is set automatically.
After adjustment is complete, the printer goes online or ofine automatically.
590 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Color adjustment
Printing in Ideal Colors for Light in the Viewing
Environment
You can print in the colors that look best when viewed under the light where the printed image will be displayed.
There are two ways to adjust the color tone for the ambient light, as follows.
By selecting color tones on Charts before printing
On the printed Chart, note the number of the set of colors with the desired color tone and enter this number in
the printer driver before printing.
Important
•
•
•
•
This function requires that the Light Source Check Tool be installed.
You can install the Light Source Check Tool from the User Software CD-ROM.
This function is only supported in Windows and Mac OS X 10.4 or later.
The colors in this function may differ slightly depending on the system software used (Windows 32/64
bit or Macintosh).
For instructions on selecting color tones on Charts before printing, refer to the following topic:
• Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing (Windows) (→P.592)
• Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing (Mac OS X) (→P.596)
Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light
Measure the light level in the viewing environment and enter the results in the printer driver before printing.
Important
•
•
•
•
•
This function requires the i1 spectrophotometer. The Light Source Measure Tool must also be installed.
You can install the Light Source Measure Tool from the User Software CD-ROM.
For a list of supported i1 devices, refer to the manual provided with the Light Source Measure Tool.
This function is only supported in Windows and Mac OS X 10.4 or later.
The colors in this function may differ slightly depending on the system software used (Windows 32/64
bit or Macintosh).
For instructions on measuring light levels before printing, refer to the following topic:
• Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light (Windows) (→P.600)
• Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light (Mac OS X) (→P.603)
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 591
Color adjustment
Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing
(Windows)
Print Charts, note the number of the chart with your desired color tone, and enter this number in the printer
driver before printing.
Important
• This function requires that the Light Source Check Tool be installed.
• You can install the Light Source Check Tool from the User Software CD-ROM.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded (for example, Glossy Photo
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Paper).
Important
• Ambient light matching may not be available, depending on the type of paper used. For more
information, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)
592 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Color adjustment
5.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
6.
In F Print Quality, click Highest or High.
Important
• Ambient Light Adjust is only available when the F Print Quality is set to Highest or High.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Click Color in the G Color Mode list.
Click H Color Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Click the Matching tab to display the Matching sheet.
Make sure Driver Matching Mode (Kyuanos) is selected in A Matching Mode.
Note
• To specify monitor matching, select Monitor Matching in B Matching Method. In this case,
select the same color space as when the le was opened in C Color Space and the monitor color
temperature in D Monitor White Point.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 593
Color adjustment
11.
12.
Select E Use ambient light adjustment.
13.
Conrm that By selecting a chart number is selected in A Setting Method.
Click F Ambient Light Adjust to display the Ambient Light Adjust dialog box.
If it is not selected already, select it.
14.
Click B Print Chart.
Light Source Check Tool now starts up.
594 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Color adjustment
15.
Check the settings and click Print.
The Chart is printed.
16.
In the viewing environment, determine the number of the set of images on the Chart in which all
four vertical images have the best overall color tone.
Note
• Choose the number of the set of images in which the people, the blue of the sky, and the red of
the strawberries look the most natural overall.
17.
In the Ambient Light Adjust dialog box, select the number of your preferred chart in C Chart
Number.
18.
If Matching Method is set to Monitor Matching on the Matching sheet, enter the D Color
Temperature and E Illuminance as measured during monitor calibration.
19.
20.
Click OK.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 595
Color adjustment
Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing (Mac
OS X)
Print Charts, note the number of the chart with your desired color tone, and enter this number in the printer
driver before printing.
Important
• This function requires that the Light Source Check Tool be installed.
• You can install the Light Source Check Tool from the User Software CD-ROM.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded (for example, Glossy Photo
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.454)
Make sure the Main panel is displayed.
Paper).
Important
• Ambient light matching may not be available, depending on the type of paper used. For more
information, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)
596 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Color adjustment
5.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
6.
In F Print Quality, click Highest or High.
Important
• Ambient Light Adjust is only available when the F Print Quality is set to Highest or High.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Click Color in the H Color Mode list.
Click I Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Click the Matching tab to display the Matching panel.
Make sure Driver Matching Mode (Kyuanos) is selected in A Matching Mode.
Note
• To specify monitor matching, select Monitor Matching in B Matching Method . In this case,
select the same color space as when the le was opened in C Color Space and the monitor color
temperature in D Monitor White Point.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 597
Color adjustment
11.
12.
Select E Use ambient light adjustment.
13.
Conrm that By selecting a chart number is selected in A Setting Method.
Click F Ambient Light Adjust to display the Ambient Light Adjust dialog box.
If it is not selected already, select it.
14.
Click B Print Chart.
Light Source Check Tool now starts up.
598 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Color adjustment
15.
Check the settings and click Print.
The Chart is printed.
16.
In the viewing environment, determine the number of the set of images on the Chart in which all
four vertical images have the best overall color tone.
Note
• Choose the number of the set of images in which the people, the blue of the sky, and the red of
the strawberries look the most natural overall.
17.
In the Ambient Light Adjust dialog box, select the number of your preferred chart in C Chart
Number.
18.
If Matching Method is set to Monitor Matching on the Matching panel, enter the D Color
Temperature and E Illuminance as measured during monitor calibration.
19.
20.
Click OK.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 599
Color adjustment
Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light
(Windows)
Measure the light level in the viewing environment and enter the results in the printer driver before printing.
Important
• This function requires the i1 spectrophotometer. The Light Source Measure Tool must also be installed.
• You can install the Light Source Measure Tool from the User Software CD-ROM.
• For a list of supported i1 devices, refer to the manual provided with the Light Source Measure Tool.
1.
Using the i1 spectrophotometer and the Light Source Measure Tool, determine the Lighting
Source Type, Color Temperature, and Illuminance in the viewing environment.
Note
• For detailed instructions on the i1 and Light Source Measure Tool, refer to the provided instructions.
2.
3.
4.
Choose Print in the application menu.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded (for example, Glossy Photo
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Paper).
Important
• Ambient light matching may not be available, depending on the type of paper used. For more
information, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)
600 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Color adjustment
6.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
7.
In F Print Quality, click Highest or High.
Important
• Ambient Light Adjust is only available when the F Print Quality is set to Highest or High.
8.
9.
10.
Click Color in the G Color Mode list.
11.
Make sure Driver Matching Mode (Kyuanos) is selected in A Matching Mode.
Click H Color Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Click the Matching tab to display the Matching sheet.
Note
• To specify monitor matching, select Monitor Matching in B Matching Method. In this case,
select the same color space as when the le was opened in C Color Space and the monitor color
temperature in D Monitor White Point.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 601
Color adjustment
12.
13.
Select E Use ambient light adjustment.
14.
15.
Select By entering values directly in A Setting Method.
Click F Ambient Light Adjust to display the Ambient Light Adjust dialog box.
Select the B Lighting Source Type and D Color Temperature determined in step 1.
If you have selected Monitor Matching in Matching Method on the Matching sheet, also
select E Illuminance.
Note
• If you will print repeatedly using the settings values you set this one time, we recommend completing
the settings by accessing the printer driver dialog box from the operating system menu. (→P.406)
16.
17.
Click OK.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
602 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Color adjustment
Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light
(Mac OS X)
Measure the light level in the viewing environment and enter the results in the printer driver before printing.
Important
• This function requires the i1 spectrophotometer. The Light Source Measure Tool must also be installed.
• You can install the Light Source Measure Tool from the User Software CD-ROM.
• For a list of supported i1 devices, refer to the manual provided with the Light Source Measure Tool.
1.
Using the i1 spectrophotometer and the Light Source Measure Tool, determine the Lighting
Source Type, Color Temperature, and Illuminance in the viewing environment.
Note
• For detailed instructions on the i1 and Light Source Measure Tool, refer to the provided instructions.
2.
3.
4.
Choose Print in the application menu.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded (for example, Glossy Photo
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.454)
Make sure the Main panel is displayed.
Paper).
Important
• Ambient light matching may not be available, depending on the type of paper used. For more
information, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 603
Color adjustment
6.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
7.
In F Print Quality, click Highest or High.
Important
• Ambient Light Adjust is only available when the F Print Quality is set to Highest or High.
8.
9.
10.
Click Color in the H Color Mode list.
11.
Make sure Driver Matching Mode (Kyuanos) is selected in A Matching Mode.
Click I Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Click the Matching tab to display the Matching panel.
Note
• To specify monitor matching, select Monitor Matching in B Matching Method . In this case,
select the same color space as when the le was opened in C Color Space and the monitor color
temperature in D Monitor White Point.
604 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Color adjustment
12.
13.
Select E Use ambient light adjustment.
14.
15.
Select By entering values directly in A Setting Method.
Click F Ambient Light Adjust to display the Ambient Light Adjust dialog box.
Select the B Lighting Source Type and D Color Temperature determined in step 1.
If you have selected Monitor Matching in Matching Method on the Matching panel, also
select E Illuminance.
16.
17.
Click OK.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 605
Color adjustment
Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors
Adjusting the colors printed so that they more closely match the colors displayed on the monitor is called "monitor
matching." Using this mode requires adjustment or conguration of the settings of your monitor, the source
application, the le for printing, and the printer driver.
Important
• Monitor matching may not be applied, or these settings may not be congurable or adjustable,
depending on your monitor and the source application.
Note
• Printing in exactly the same colors as displayed on the monitor may not be possible due to differences in
the monitor and printer color gamuts.
• Calibrating your monitor requires a measuring device.
• Because colors appear different under sunlight at different times of day, we recommend following
this procedure in a room not exposed to sunlight.
606 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Color adjustment
Monitor Matching
The sequence in monitor matching is as follows.
1.
Calibrate the printer.
Calibration improves color consistency by compensating for slight differences in how color
appears due to individual variation among printheads or conditions in various printing
environments.
(→P.588)
2.
Calibrate the monitor.
Normally, you can use a colorimeter such as the i1-Display.
Set the white point to 6500 K or 5000 K, the gamma to 2.2, and the brightness to 120 cd, and
activate light source measurement.
The exact procedure varies depending on your monitor and measurement device.
3.
Open the le to print and congure settings in the source application.
Display the le in the sRGB or Adobe RGB color space.
Congure settings to prevent color conversion by the application.
In Photoshop CS3, for example, select Color Management in the Print dialog box, and then
select No Color Management in Color Handling.
4.
Congure and adjust printer driver settings.
Select Monitor Matching in Matching Method. Specify the Monitor White Point set during
monitor calibration and the Color Temperature and Illuminance measured in the ambient light.
In Color Space, select the color space used when displaying the le in the source application.
If you own an i1-Pro, using Light Source Measure Tool enables more precision measurement
of the ambient light.
Note
• If you will print repeatedly using the settings values you set this one time, we recommend completing
the settings by accessing the printer driver dialog box from the operating system menu. (→P.406)
For instructions on conguring printer driver settings for monitor matching, refer to the following topic, as
appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors (Windows) (→P.608)
• Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors (Mac OS X) (→P.611)
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 607
Color adjustment
Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors (Windows)
By calibrating your monitor and conguring settings in the source application in advance, you can complete
settings to print in colors that are as close as possible to the colors displayed on the monitor.
Important
• Before using this feature, you must calibrate the monitor and congure settings in the source application.
(→P.386)
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded (for example, Glossy Photo
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.404)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Paper).
Important
• Ambient light matching may not be available, depending on the type of paper used. For more
information, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)
608 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Color adjustment
5.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
6.
In F Print Quality, click Highest or High.
Important
• Ambient Light Adjust is only available when the F Print Quality is set to Highest or High.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Click Color in the G Color Mode list.
Click H Color Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Click the Matching tab to display the Matching sheet.
Make sure Driver Matching Mode (Kyuanos) is selected in A Matching Mode.
In B Matching Method, select Monitor Matching.
In C Color Space, select the color space used when displaying the le in the source application.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 609
Color adjustment
13.
In D Monitor White Point, select the white point set on the monitor.
Note
• For greater precision in monitor matching, we recommend conguring the settings for ambient light
matching. (→P.371)
14.
15.
Click OK.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
610 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Color adjustment
Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors (Mac OS X)
By calibrating your monitor and conguring settings in the source application in advance, you can complete
settings to print in colors that are as close as possible to the colors displayed on the monitor.
Important
• Before using this feature, you must calibrate the monitor and congure settings in the source application.
(→P.386)
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded (for example, Glossy Photo
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.454)
Make sure the Main panel is displayed.
Paper).
Important
• Ambient light matching may not be available, depending on the type of paper used. For more
information, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 611
Color adjustment
5.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
6.
In F Print Quality, click Highest or High.
Important
• Ambient Light Adjust is only available when the F Print Quality is set to Highest or High.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Click Color in the H Color Mode list.
Click I Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Click the Matching tab to display the Matching panel.
Make sure Driver Matching Mode (Kyuanos) is selected in A Matching Mode.
In B Matching Method , select Monitor Matching.
In C Color Space, select the color space used when displaying the le in the source application.
612 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Color adjustment
13.
In D Monitor White Point, select the white point set on the monitor.
Note
• For greater precision in monitor matching, we recommend conguring the settings for ambient light
matching. (→P.371)
14.
15.
Click OK.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 613
Ink Tanks
Maintenance
Ink Tanks
Ink Tanks
An Ink Tank that can be used in the printer is labeled with a white letter “H” in a black circle on the side.
When purchasing an Ink Tank, make sure an “H” is printed on the label, along with the following Ink Tank
part numbers.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Y Ink Tank PFI-101Y
PC Ink Tank PFI-101PC
C Ink Tank PFI-101C
PGY Ink Tank PFI-103PGY
GY Ink Tank PFI-103GY
BK Ink Tank PFI-103BK
PM Ink Tank PFI-101PM
M Ink Tank PFI-101M
MBK Ink Tank PFI-103MBK
R Ink Tank PFI-101R
G Ink Tank PFI-101G
B Ink Tank PFI-101B
130 ml per color
Note
• For instructions on replacing Ink Tank, see “Replacing Ink Tanks”. (→P.615)
614 Maintenance
Ink Tanks
Replacing Ink Tanks
Compatible Ink Tank
An Ink Tank that can be used in the printer is labeled with a white letter “H” in a black circle on the side.
Request an Ink Tank with the same label when you purchase a new Ink Tank. For more information, see
“Ink Tanks”. (→P.614)
Precautions when handling an Ink Tank
Take the following precautions when handling an Ink Tank.
Caution
• For safety, keep an Ink Tank out of the reach of children.
• If ink is accidentally ingested, contact a physician immediately.
Important
• Before removing an Ink Tank from the pouch for installation, shake it gently seven or eight times. If you
do not shake the Ink Tank, the ink may sediment, which may affect printing quality.
• Do not remove and shake an Ink Tank that has already been installed in the printer. Ink may leak out.
• Avoid dropping the Ink Tank after removing it from the pouch. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.
• There may be ink around the ink holes of Ink Tank you remove. Handle an Ink Tank carefully during
replacement. The ink may stain clothing.
• We recommend using up an Ink Tank in the course of printing within six months after breaking the seal.
Using an old Ink Tank may affect the printing quality.
• Do not remove the Ink Tank if the printer is not used for a long period (a month or more). Ink remaining
in the printer may become clogged and cause of printing problems.
• Coverage may be uneven if you replace the ink during a print job.
Maintenance 615
Ink Tanks
Replacing an Ink Tank
1.
Make sure no print jobs are in progress.
You can replace Ink Tank if the Display Screen indicates the printer is Online or Ofine, or if
messages advise you to check the amount of ink left or replace the Ink Tank.
If a message prompts you to replace the Ink Tank, press the OK button. Steps 2 and 3 are
unnecessary in this case. Go to step 4 and remove the Ink Tank.
Do not remove an Ink Tank during initialization immediately after turning on the printer, or during
printing or printhead cleaning.
Note
• Ink Tank replacement is possible even when print jobs are being canceled or if paper is being fed.
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Rep. Ink Tank, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
A message on the Display Screen advises you to open the Ink Tank Cover. Next, remove the
Ink Tank.
616 Maintenance
Ink Tanks
5.
Open the Ink Tank Cover and check the Ink Lamp.
The Ink Lamp ashes quickly if there is no ink left.
6.
Press the tip of the Ink Tank Lock Lever of the color for replacement and lift the Ink Tank Lock
Lever to open it.
Maintenance 617
Ink Tanks
7.
Hold the empty Ink Tank by the grip to remove it, and press the OK button.
Note
• If there is still some ink left in the Ink Tank you removed, store the ink tank with the ink holes (a)
facing up. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains. Put the Ink Tank in a plastic bag and seal it.
• Dispose of used Ink Tank according to local regulations.
8.
Before opening the pouch, shake the Ink Tank gently seven or eight times. Agitate the ink in the
Ink Tank by slowly turning the Ink Tank upside-down and right side up several times.
Note
• If you do not shake the Ink Tank, the ink may sediment, which may affect printing quality.
618 Maintenance
Ink Tanks
9.
Open the pouch and remove the Ink Tank.
Note
• Never touch the ink holes or metal contacts. This may cause stains, damage the Ink Tank, and
affect printing quality.
• Avoid dropping the Ink Tank after removing it from the pouch. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause
stains.
• Do not remove and shake an Ink Tank that has already been installed in the printer. Ink may leak out.
10.
Press the OK button and insert the Ink Tank into the holder facing as shown in the gure, with
the ink holes down.
Important
• Ink Tank cannot be loaded in the holder if the color or orientation is wrong.
If the Ink Tank does not t in the holder, do not force it into the holder. Make sure the color of the
Ink Tank Lock Lever matches the color of the Ink Tank, and check the orientation of the Ink Tank
before reloading it.
Maintenance 619
Ink Tanks
11.
Close the Ink Tank Lock Lever until it clicks.
12.
Make sure the Ink Lamp is lit in red.
Note
• Ink Lamp ashes when there is little ink left.
13.
Close the Ink Tank Cover.
The printer returns to the mode before replacement of Ink Tank.
620 Maintenance
Ink Tanks
Checking Ink Tank Levels
On the Display Screen, you can check how much ink is left in the Ink Tank.
The Display Screen indicates the remaining ink levels, unless a message is displayed.
During messages, press the Information button to view the ink levels on the Display Screen.
These levels shown on the Display Screen correspond to the inks identied by the Color Label on the bottom
of the Display Screen.
These symbols may be displayed above the ink level: “!” if ink is low, “×” if no ink is left, and “?” if you have
deactivated ink level detection.
The remaining ink level is indicated as shown below.
If the Display Screen indicates to replace the Ink Tank, replace the Ink Tank. If a message is displayed
indicating to check the remaining ink levels, or after tasks that consume a lot of ink such as large-format
printing or head cleaning, check the remaining levels and replace Ink Tank as needed. (→P.615)
Maintenance 621
Ink Tanks
When to Replace Ink Tanks
Replace or prepare to replace Ink Tank in the following situations.
If a message for checking the ink is shown on the Display Screen
When there is little ink left, the Message lamp is lit and Ink Level: Check is shown on the Display Screen.
You can continue to print, but prepare to replace the Ink Tank. (→P.621)
Before print jobs and maintenance that consume a lot of ink
If little ink is left, there may not be enough for large-format printing, head cleaning, and maintenance, which
require a lot of ink. In this case, replace or prepare to replace the Ink Tank before maintenance.
If a message for ink replacement is shown on the Display Screen
When ink runs out, the Message lamp ashes, a message regarding Ink Tank replacement is shown on the
Display Screen, and printing is disabled. Replace the Ink Tank at this point.
622 Maintenance
Printheads
Printheads
Printhead
This is a replacement Printhead for the printer.
• Printhead PF-03
Note
• For instructions on replacing the Printhead, see “Replacing the Printhead”. (→P.626)
Checking the Print Quality
If printing is faint or streaked in different colors, make sure the Printhead nozzles are clear by printing a test
pattern to check the nozzles.
For instructions, see “Checking for Nozzle Clogging”. (→P.624)
Improving the Print Quality
If printing is faint or streaked in different colors, make sure the Printhead nozzles are clear by printing a test
pattern to check the nozzles. Clean the Printhead if the printed test pattern was faint.
For instructions on cleaning the Printhead, see “Cleaning the Printhead”. (→P.625)
Maintenance 623
Printheads
Checking for Nozzle Clogging
If printing is faint or streaked in different colors, make sure the Printhead nozzles are clear by printing a test
pattern to check the nozzles.
Note
• You can specify a number of pages in the printer’s Noz. Check Freq. menu for automatic nozzle
checking every time you nish printing that quantity. (→P.59)
1.
Load unused paper.
• Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder (→P.119)
• Loading Rolls in the Roll Feed Unit (→P.121)
• Loading the Roll in the Printer (→P.122)
• Loading Sheets Manually (→P.151)
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Test Print, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Nozzle Check, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
The printer goes online and prints a test pattern.
6.
Check the printing results.
If the horizontal lines are not faint or incomplete, the nozzles are clear.
If some sections of the horizontal lines are faint or incomplete, the nozzles for those colors
are clogged.
If horizontal lines are faint or incomplete, follow the steps below and check again for nozzle
clogging.
1. Clean the Printhead. (→P.625)
2. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
Note
• If you repeat these steps several times but the horizontal lines are still faint or incomplete, contact
your Canon dealer.
624 Maintenance
Printheads
Cleaning the Printhead
Cleaning the Printhead may help clear nozzles that are clogged.
Note
• You can specify a number of pages in the printer’s Noz. Check Freq. menu for automatic nozzle
checking and cleaning every time you nish printing that quantity. (→P.59)
• You can start Head Cleaning A by holding down the Information button for three seconds or more.
• Printhead cleaning is not possible if POP Board (1.5 mm [0.06 in] thick) is loaded in the Front Paper
Feed Slot. Remove the paper before cleaning.
Cleaning the Printhead
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Cleaning, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of cleaning, and then press the OK button.
• Head Cleaning A
Use Head Cleaning A if printing is faint or contains foreign substances. This method of cleaning
consumes the least amount of ink. It takes about four minutes to complete.
• Head Cleaning B
Use Head Cleaning B if no ink comes out of the printhead, or if Head Cleaning A does not solve the
problem. It takes about ve minutes to complete.
The printhead is cleaned, and the printer goes online.
4.
Print a test pattern to check the nozzles, and determine whether cleaning has cleared the
nozzles. (→P.624)
Note
• If printing does not improve after Head Cleaning A, try Head Cleaning B. If this does not solve
the problem, repeat Head Cleaning B two or three times. If this still does not improve printing, the
Printhead may have reached the end of its useful life. Contact your Canon dealer.
Caution
• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge or Ink Tanks during cleaning.
Maintenance 625
Printheads
Replacing the Printhead
When to replace the Printhead
This printer uses two Printheads.
Replace one or both Printheads in the following situations.
• If the printing quality does not improve even after two cycles of Head Cleaning B from the printer menu
Replace both Printheads, one at a time.
• If the Display Screen indicates Open top cover and replace the left printhead.
Replace the left Printhead.
• If the Display Screen indicates Open top cover and replace the right printhead.
Replace the right Printhead.
• If your Canon dealer has advised you to replace the Printhead
Replace the Printhead that your dealer advised you to replace.
Compatible Printhead
For information on the compatible Printhead, see “Printhead”. (→P.623)
Precautions when handling the Printhead
Take the following precautions when handling the Printhead.
Caution
• For safety, keep the Printhead in a place inaccessible for children.
• If ink is accidentally ingested, contact a physician immediately.
• Do not touch the Printhead immediately after printing. The Printhead becomes extremely hot, and
there is a risk of burns.
Important
• Avoid dropping or shaking the Printhead. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.
• There may be ink around the nozzles of the Printhead you remove. Handle the Printhead carefully
during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.
• Do not open the Printhead pouch until immediately before installation. After removing the Printhead
from the pouch, install it right away. If the Printhead is left after the pouch is opened, the nozzles
may dry out, which may affect printing quality.
• If you need to store a Printhead temporarily before installation, do not keep the nozzles and metal
contacts (→P.630) facing down. If the nozzles or metal contacts are damaged, it may affect the
printing quality.
• Never attempt to take apart or modify a Printhead. This may damage the printer.
• Never touch the Printhead nozzles or the metal contacts. This may cause printing problems.
626 Maintenance
Printheads
Replacing the Printhead
Follow the steps below to replace the Printhead. Failure to follow this procedure may cause ink leak from
the Printhead, which may cause stains.
Note
• Prepare a new Ink Tank when ink levels are low.
• Your hands may become dirty during Printhead replacement. Use the gloves provided with the new
Printhead for replacement.
• Choose On in Auto Print to have the printer automatically adjust the Printhead alignment after
replacement of the Printhead. (→P.59)
1.
If the roll is not ejected because of the cutting method selected, cut it manually and remove it.
(→P.367)
2.
3.
Clean inside the Top Cover. (→P.641)
4.
5.
6.
7.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Maintenance, and then press the ► button.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Replace P.head, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the Printhead for replacement, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
Select Printhead L to replace the Printhead L or select Printhead R to replace the Printhead
R. Be sure to specify the correct printhead.
Ink is now lled.
After about three minutes, a message is shown on the Display Screen instructing you to open
the Top Cover.
8.
Open the Top Cover.
Instructions are now shown on the Display Screen regarding Printhead replacement.
Maintenance 627
Printheads
9.
If the Printhead Fixer Cover or Printhead Fixer Lever is dirty, use a damp cloth that you have
wrung out completely to wipe it clean.
Important
• Never touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b).
• Never touch the metal contacts of the Carriage. This may damage the printer.
10.
Pull the Printhead Fixer Lever forward all the way to open it completely.
628 Maintenance
Printheads
11.
Pull up the Printhead Fixer Cover to open it completely.
12.
Remove the used Printhead.
Caution
• When replacing the Printhead immediately after printing, wait a few minutes before replacing
it. The metal parts of the Printhead become hot during printing, and there is a risk of burns from
touching these parts.
Note
• Dispose of the used Printhead in accordance with local regulations.
Maintenance 629
Printheads
13.
Holding the new Printhead by the grips (a), remove it from the case.
Important
• When handling the Printhead, always hold it by the grips (a). Never touch the nozzles (b) or the
metal contacts (c). This may damage the Printhead and affect printing quality.
14.
While rmly holding the Printhead you have removed, use your other hand to remove the orange
Safety Cap 1 (a). Squeeze the grips (c) of Safety Cap 2 (b) and pull it down to remove it.
Important
• Safety Cap 1 (a) may be coated with ink to protect the Printhead. Be careful not to touch areas
other than the grips.
• Never touch the ink supply section (d). This may cause printing problems.
• The inside surface of Safety Cap 2 (b) is coated with ink to protect the nozzles. Handle it carefully to
avoid touching the nozzles or spilling ink. Spilled ink may cause stains. The Printhead contains ink
to protect the nozzles. If this ink is accidentally spilled, it may stain the printer or surrounding area.
We recommend removing the Safety Cap 2 (b) on top of the Printhead package or safely out of the
way. Wipe off any spilled ink with a dry cloth. This ink is non-toxic.
• Do not reattach the Safety Cap or protective material. Dispose of these materials in accordance
with local regulations.
630 Maintenance
Printheads
15.
With the nozzles facing down and the metal contacts toward the back, insert the Printhead into
the Carriage. Making sure that the metal contacts do not touch the Carriage, carefully push the
printhead rmly into the carriage.
16.
Pull the Printhead Fixer Cover down toward the front to lock the Printhead in place.
17.
Push the Printhead Fixer Lever toward the back of the printer until it clicks.
Maintenance 631
Printheads
18.
Close the Top Cover.
Ink now lls the system.
After about ten minutes, the Printhead alignment will be automatically adjusted, and the printer
will go online.
If no paper has been loaded, a message is displayed requesting you to load paper.
Important
• Never remove an Ink Tank while the system is lling with ink.
• If Auto Print is Off in the printer menu, the Printhead alignment will not be adjusted. In this case,
adjust the alignment after Printhead replacement by accessing Auto Head Adj. in Advanced
Adj.. (→P.572)
632 Maintenance
Maintenance Cartridge
Maintenance Cartridge
Maintenance Cartridge
This is a replacement Maintenance Cartridge for the printer.
• Maintenance Cartridge MC-16
Note
• For instructions on replacing the Maintenance Cartridge , see “Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge”.
(→P.633)
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
Compatible Maintenance Cartridge
For information on the compatible Maintenance Cartridge, see “Maintenance Cartridge”. (→P.633)
Precautions when handling the Maintenance Cartridge
Take the following precautions when handling the Maintenance Cartridge.
Caution
• For safety, keep the Maintenance Cartridge out of the reach of children.
• If ink is accidentally ingested, contact a physician immediately.
Important
• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge except to replace it.
• To prevent ink from leaking from a used Maintenance Cartridge, avoid dropping the cartridge or storing it
at an angle. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.
• Ink adheres to the top of the Maintenance Cartridge after it has been used. Handle the Maintenance
Cartridge carefully during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.
• Do not install a used Maintenance Cartridge in another printer.
Maintenance 633
Maintenance Cartridge
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
1.
Make sure no print jobs are in progress.
You can replace the Maintenance Cartridge if the Display Screen indicates the printer is Ofine
or if messages advise you to replace the Maintenance Cartridge.
If a message prompts you to replace the Maintenance Cartridge, press the OK button. Steps 2
and 3 are unnecessary in this case. Go to step 4 and remove the Maintenance Cartridge.
Do not replace the Maintenance Cartridge during initialization immediately after turning on the
printer, during Printhead cleaning, or while ink is being lled.
If you pause printing to replace the Maintenance Cartridge, it may cause the printed images to
be blurry.
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Maintenance, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Repl. maint cart, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
Remove the Ejection Guide.
634 Maintenance
Maintenance Cartridge
7.
Hold the handle (a) of the used Maintenance Cartridge and pull out the cartridge. Grasp the
handles on both sides (b) and keep the cartridge level as you remove it.
Important
• Used Maintenance Cartridge is heavy. Always grasp the cartridge handles on both sides rmly and
keep the cartridge level during removal and storage. If you drop a used Maintenance Cartridge or
store it at an angle, ink may leak and cause stains.
• The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is recorded on each printer. Do not install a used
Maintenance Cartridge in another printer.
8.
Open the plastic bag of the new Maintenance Cartridge and remove the packaging material.
Holding the handles on both sides (a), remove the cartridge.
Important
• Never touch the metal contacts (a). This may damage the Maintenance Cartridge.
Maintenance 635
Maintenance Cartridge
9.
Keeping the used Maintenance Cartridge level, put it in the plastic bag that was in the box,
as shown.
10.
Expel air in the plastic bag and seal the zipper. Fold the plastic bag in half.
11.
Put the used Maintenance Cartridge and packaging material in the box for storage, just like the
new Maintenance Cartridge was, keeping it level.
Important
• Always put the used Maintenance Cartridge back in the box and store the box on a at surface.
Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.
• In accordance with its active and ongoing policy to protect the environment, Canon collects used
Maintenance Cartridge. Follow the instructions provided with the new Maintenance Cartridge that
describe how to process the used Maintenance Cartridge.
636 Maintenance
Maintenance Cartridge
12.
Holding the handles on both sides of the new Maintenance Cartridge (a), insert it completely,
keeping it level.
13.
Hold the Ejection Guide on both sides by the near end. Aligning the Ejection Guide with the
guides (a), insert it into the printer until it locks in place.
14.
Press the OK button.
The printer returns to the mode before replacement of the Maintenance Cartridge. If a message
is displayed advising you to replace the Maintenance Cartridge, printing is not possible. Make
sure that the Maintenance Cartridge is installed correctly.
If a print job was in progress when the Maintenance Cartridge was replaced, printing is resumed.
Important
• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge during about the rst ve seconds after the printer goes
back online. This may damage the Maintenance Cartridge.
• If you replace the Maintenance Cartridge when the printer is off, do not remove the Maintenance
Cartridge during about the rst ve seconds after you turn the printer on again after replacement.
This may damage the Maintenance Cartridge.
Maintenance 637
Maintenance Cartridge
Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge Capacity
The Maintenance Cartridge absorbs excess ink from borderless printing, printhead cleaning, and other
processes. You can conrm the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge by checking the
Maintenance Cartridge capacity shown on the Display Screen.
Press the Information button to display the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge on the Display
Screen.
If the Display Screen indicates to replace the Maintenance Cartridge, replace the Maintenance Cartridge. If a
message is displayed indicating to check the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge, or before
tasks that deplete much of the capacity such as head cleaning or preparations to move the printer, check the
remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and replace the Maintenance Cartridge as needed. (→P.633)
638 Maintenance
Maintenance Cartridge
When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge
Replace or prepare to replace the Maintenance Cartridge in the following situations.
If a message for checking the Maintenance Cartridge is shown on
the Display Screen
When the Maintenance Cartridge capacity is low, the Message lamp is lit and Prepare for maint cart
replacement. is displayed. You can continue to print, but check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge
capacity and prepare to replace the Maintenance Cartridge with a new one. (→P.638)
When much of the Maintenance Cartridge capacity is depleted
Printhead cleaning, Printhead replacement, and preparations to transfer the printer deplete much of the
Maintenance Cartridge capacity. (In particular, preparing to move the printer depletes a lot of the capacity.) To
check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity, press the Information button. Replace the Maintenance
Cartridge and perform related maintenance as needed.
If a message for the Maintenance Cartridge replacement is shown on
the Display Screen
When the Maintenance Cartridge is full, the Message lamp ashes and a message to replace the Maintenance
Cartridge is shown on the Display Screen. Printing is disabled, and you cannot replace the Printhead or
transfer the printer. Replace the Maintenance Cartridge with a new one.
Maintenance 639
Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning the Printer Exterior
Clean the printer regularly to maintain better printing quality and help prevent problems.
About once a month, clean the printer exterior.
1.
2.
Turn the printer off. (→P.27)
Unplug the power cord from the outlet.
Caution
• Always turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before cleaning or maintenance. Accidentally
leaving the printer on poses a risk of injury if you touch moving parts inside the printer.
3.
Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely, wipe the exterior surfaces of the printer.
Dry the surfaces with a dry cloth.
Caution
• Never use ammable solvents such as alcohol, benzene, or thinner. If these substances come into
contact with electrical components inside the printer, there is a risk of re or electrical shock.
Important
• If the Ejection Guide is dirty, it may soil the edge of the paper when the paper is cut. We recommend
cleaning the Ejection Guide even if it does not appear dirty, because it may actually be covered
with paper dust.
4.
Plug the power cord into the outlet.
640 Maintenance
Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning Inside the Top Cover
Clean inside the Top Cover about once a month to maintain better printing quality and help prevent problems.
Also clean inside the Top Cover in the following situations to ensure optimal operation.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
If the printed surface or the underside of paper is dirty after printing
After you have used up a roll
After borderless printing
After printing on small paper
After printing on paper that generates a lot of cutting debris
If you have replaced the roll
After printing on paper that generates a lot of paper dust
Important
• If the Platen inside the Top Cover becomes dirty, it may soil the underside of paper. We recommend
always cleaning the Platen after borderless printing or printing on small paper.
• If the Ejection Guide is dirty, it may soil the edge of the paper when the paper is cut. We recommend
cleaning the Ejection Guide even if it does not appear dirty, because it may actually be covered with
paper dust.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Maintenance, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Clean Platen, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
Open the Top Cover.
Maintenance 641
Cleaning the Printer
6.
If paper dust has accumulated in the Vacuum holes (a) on the Platen or in the Borderless Printing
Ink Grooves (b), use the Cleaning Brush, provided with the printer, to wipe it away.
Note
• If the Cleaning Brush is dirty, rinse it in water.
7.
Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely, wipe inside the Top Cover to clean it.
Wipe away any ink residue on the Platen as a whole, the Paper Retainer, and the Borderless
Printing Ink Grooves.
642 Maintenance
Cleaning the Printer
Important
• Do not use a dry cloth to wipe inside the Top Cover. This may create a static charge, which may
attract dust and affect the printing quality.
• Never use ammable solvents such as alcohol, benzene, or thinner. If these substances come into
contact with electrical components inside the printer, there is a risk of re or electrical shock.
• Never touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b).
8.
Close the Top Cover.
Maintenance 643
Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning the Paper Retainer
Clean the Paper Retainer about once a month to maintain better printing quality and help prevent problems.
Also clean the Paper Retainer in the following situations to ensure the printer offers a comfortable working
environment.
• If the printed surface or the underside of paper is dirty after printing
• After printing on small paper
Caution
• During cleaning, use a type of paper that does not generate much dust from cutting, such as Plain
Paper. It may affect printing quality if you use lm or other media that are more likely to generate debris
when cut, or that have a surface nish that may come off.
1.
2.
Turn the printer off. (→P.27)
Unplug the power cord from the outlet.
Caution
• Always turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before cleaning and maintenance. Accidentally
leaving the printer on poses a risk of injury if you touch moving parts inside the printer.
3.
4.
Remove the Roll Feed Unit. (→P.146)
Fold a sheet of Plain Paper two or three times (a) and insert it under the Paper Retainer (b)
behind the printer to wipe the entire surface of the Paper Retainer clean.
5.
6.
Reinstall the Roll Feed Unit. (→P.147)
Plug the power cord into the outlet.
644 Maintenance
Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning Spurs Used in Paper Feeding
If white dots about 1 mm (0.039 in) apart appear on printed documents in the direction paper is fed, clean
the spurs.
During spur cleaning, a Cleaning sheet fed from the Top Paper Feed Slot is repeatedly advanced and
retracted to clean the spurs (a).
Note
• Use the provided Cleaning sheet for spur cleaning.
• If the spurs are quite soiled, executing cleaning once may not be enough to clean them completely.
Execute cleaning again if one time is not effective.
• If a roll is loaded, rewind the roll before this procedure. (→P.145)
Important
•
•
•
•
Do not fold the Cleaning sheet.
Do not use a frayed Cleaning sheet or Cleaning sheet that has become very dirty.
If the Cleaning sheet is warped, straighten it before use.
To cancel cleaning, press the Stop button.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Maintenance, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Spur Cleaning, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
Maintenance 645
Cleaning the Printer
5.
Open the Paper Tray Cover (a).
6.
Squeeze the Width Guide (a) and slide it all the way to the left.
7.
Remove the Cleaning sheet from the pouch.
The pouch is used to store the Cleaning Sheet, so keep it in a safe place.
8.
Insert the long side of the Cleaning sheet in the Top Paper Feed Slot in the position to be cleaned.
Insert the Cleaning sheet gently until it stops.
646 Maintenance
Cleaning the Printer
Note
• If the width of the paper used when soiling occurred is wider than the Cleaning sheet, insert the sheet
in different positions as you perform cleaning.
9.
Press the OK button to start cleaning.
Cleaning takes about a minute and a half.
10.
Pull out the cleaning sheet and press OK. is shown on the Control Panel. At this point, pull
out the Cleaning sheet and press the OK button.
11.
12.
Put the Cleaning Sheet back in the pouch.
Close the Paper Tray Cover (a).
Maintenance 647
Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning the Printhead
Cleaning the Printhead may help clear nozzles that are clogged.
Note
• You can specify a number of pages in the printer’s Noz. Check Freq. menu for automatic nozzle
checking and cleaning every time you nish printing that quantity. (→P.59)
• You can start Head Cleaning A by holding down the Information button for three seconds or more.
• Printhead cleaning is not possible if POP Board (1.5 mm [0.06 in] thick) is loaded in the Front Paper
Feed Slot. Remove the paper before cleaning.
Cleaning the Printhead
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Cleaning, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of cleaning, and then press the OK button.
• Head Cleaning A
Use Head Cleaning A if printing is faint or contains foreign substances. This method of cleaning
consumes the least amount of ink. It takes about four minutes to complete.
• Head Cleaning B
Use Head Cleaning B if no ink comes out of the printhead, or if Head Cleaning A does not solve the
problem. It takes about ve minutes to complete.
The printhead is cleaned, and the printer goes online.
4.
Print a test pattern to check the nozzles, and determine whether cleaning has cleared the
nozzles. (→P.624)
Note
• If printing does not improve after Head Cleaning A, try Head Cleaning B. If this does not solve
the problem, repeat Head Cleaning B two or three times. If this still does not improve printing, the
Printhead may have reached the end of its useful life. Contact your Canon dealer.
Caution
• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge or Ink Tanks during cleaning.
648 Maintenance
Other Maintenance
Other Maintenance
Preparing to Transfer the Printer
To protect the internal parts in transit, always follow the steps below before transferring the printer to a new
location. Refer to the Quick Start Guide for details on packing the printer and installing it after transfer.
Note
• It is not possible to prepare the printer for transfer if the Display Screen prompts you to replace the
Maintenance Cartridge or check the remaining capacity. Replace the Maintenance Cartridge before
transfer preparations. (→P.633)
• Do not tilt the printer in transit. Ink inside the printer may leak and cause stains. If it is necessary to
stand the printer up or tilt it, contact your Canon dealer.
1.
Remove the paper.
• Rolls (→P.124) (→P.125) (→P.126)
• Sheet (→P.157) (→P.158)
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Maintenance, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Move Printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
The printer now starts preparing for transfer.
If a message is shown on the Display Screen requesting you to open the Ink Tank Cover, follow
the procedure starting with step 6.
Maintenance 649
Other Maintenance
6.
Open the Ink Tank Cover.
7.
Open the Ink Tank Lock Lever and remove every Ink Tank.
Put the Ink Tank in a plastic bag and seal it.
Note
• Store the Ink Tank you removed with the ink holes (a) facing up. Otherwise, ink may leak and
cause stains.
650 Maintenance
Other Maintenance
8.
Close every Ink Tank Lock Lever, and close the Ink Tank Cover.
At this point, ink is drawn out from inside the tubes.
Important
• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge during this process.
When the suction is nished, Turn Power Off!! is displayed.
9.
Press the Power button and turn off the printer.
Important
• Turn off the printer before you unplug it. It may damage the printer if you unplug it before it is off and
transfer it in that state. If you accidentally unplug the printer, plug it in again, reinstall the Ink Tanks,
wait until the printer comes online, and follow this procedure again.
10.
11.
Disconnect the power cord and interface cable.
Open the Top Cover.
Maintenance 651
Other Maintenance
12.
Grasp the Belt, insert it between the Belt Stopper, and afx the Belt Stopper to the Carriage Shaft.
Important
• Never touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b).
Note
• Here, the Belt Stopper is the one that was removed and stored after initial installation.
13.
Close the Top Cover.
14.
15.
Tape down printer covers to secure them, in the reverse order of tape removal during installation.
Repack the Roll Holder, Holder Stopper, and printer in shipping materials, and then package
them in a shipping box.
652 Maintenance
Other Maintenance
Updating the Firmware
Update the printer rmware to take advantage of new and improved printer functions.
Conrming the rmware version
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Information, and then press ►.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Info, and then press the ► button.
The rmware version is displayed.
Updating the rmware
To obtain the latest rmware, visit the Canon website. If the rmware available online is newer than the
installed rmware, update the printer rmware. For details on downloading and updating the rmware,
visit the Canon website.
Maintenance 653
Frequently Asked Questions
Troubleshooting
Frequently Asked Questions
Frequently Asked Questions
This section presents frequently asked questions and answers. To view more detailed explanations, click the
hyperlinks in the answer column.
Question
Answer
How do I print on a roll?
When printing on rolls, after loading the roll, specify the paper type and
length, both on the Control Panel and in the printer driver.
ÞLoading and Printing on Rolls (→P.93)
How do I print manually?
When printing manually, specify the paper type and size in the printer
driver, and then load the paper.
ÞLoading and Printing on Sheets in the Paper Feed Slot (→P.98)
How do I switch between
printing on a roll and printing
manually?
Press the Feeder Selection button to switch the paper source between
the roll and a sheet.
ÞSelecting the Paper Source (→P.116)
How do I change the paper
type or size?
Specify the type and size of paper, both on the Control Panel and in the
printer driver.
• Specifying it in the Printer Driver
ÞSpecifying Paper in the Printer Driver (→P.228)
• Specifying it on the Control Panel
Selecting the paper type
ÞSelecting the Paper Type (Roll) (→P.117)
ÞSelecting the Paper Type (Sheet) (→P.149)
Selecting the Paper Size
ÞSpecifying the Paper Length (Roll) (→P.118)
ÞSelecting the Paper Size (Sheet) (→P.150)
How do I cut the roll paper after You can wait until ink dries before cutting the roll, and you can cut rolls
printing?
at a desired position.
ÞSpecifying the Cutting Method for Rolls (→P.135)
How do I print without borders? Borderless printing is possible on rolls. You can also specify borderless
printing in the printer driver by adjusting the original size to match the
paper size.
Borderless printing is not supported on sheets.
ÞBorderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size (→P.270)
ÞBorderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.277)
ÞBorderless Printing at Actual Size (→P.263)
How do I print an A4 original
enlarged on A2 paper?
654 Troubleshooting
In the printer driver, you can adjust the original image to match the paper
size or width, or you can specify enlargement or reduction before printing
as desired.
ÞResizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (→P.233)
ÞResizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.239)
ÞResizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (→P.245)
Frequently Asked Questions
Question
How do I print without wasting
paper?
Answer
To conserve paper, you can specify in the printer driver to rotate originals
90 degrees or to print without top and bottom margins.
ÞConserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (→P.337)
ÞConserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom
Margins (→P.343)
How do I print without wasting By specifying to rotate originals 90 degrees in the printer driver, you can
all the blank space on the right print at A4 size to ll the width of A3 paper.
side when printing an A4-sized ÞConserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (→P.337)
original at A3 size?
How do I print in landscape (or You can print originals that are in landscape (or portrait) orientation
portrait) orientation?
automatically enlarged to t the roll width. This is an easy way to create
vertical or horizontal banners.
ÞPrinting Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing) (→P.291)
How do I print on a custom
paper size?
You can specify custom sizes temporarily in the printer driver.
ÞPrinting on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (→P.300)
How do I register custom paper You can add desired sizes (Custom Media Sizes) in the Paper Size
sizes?
Options dialog box of the printer driver.
ÞPrinting on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (→P.300)
How do I print lines thicker?
By specifying Thicken Fine Lines in the printer driver, you can print ne
lines thicker to make them easier to see.
ÞGiving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
(→P.216)
How do I modify how colors are To compensate for changes in color from individual variation among
printed?
Printheads or from the printing environment and to ensure better color
consistency, execute color calibration.
ÞUsing Color Calibration to Adjust Colors (→P.588)
You can adjust colors even further in the printer driver before printing.
ÞAdjusting the Color in the Printer Driver (→P.206)
How do I use printer driver
settings again in subsequent
jobs?
By saving settings information in a favorite, you can apply the settings
again before printing anytime as needed.
ÞUsing Favorites (→P.363)
How do I use the printer in
combination with a Color
imageRUNNER ?
The printer can be used for automatic enlargement and printing of scanned
originals from a Color imageRUNNER.
ÞPrinting Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER
(→P.201)
How do I print enlargements of By using Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy),
scanned originals from a Color you can automatically print enlargements of scanned originals from a
imageRUNNER ?
Color imageRUNNER.
ÞPrinting Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER
(→P.201)
Troubleshooting 655
Problems Regarding Paper
Problems Regarding Paper
Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot)
Follow these steps to remove any scraps left in the Paper Feed Slot after you clear jammed sheets or
roll paper.
1.
2.
Press the Feeder Selection button to activate the Cut Sheet lamp.
Press the Load/Eject button.
A screen is displayed for paper type selection.
3.
Select POP Board and press the OK button.
A screen is displayed for paper size selection.
4.
Select the desired size and press the OK button.
Instructions for feeding POP Board are shown on the Control Panel, but instead of following
them, follow this procedure to remove the jammed paper.
5.
6.
Open the Top Cover.
Fold an A4 sheet lengthwise four times and insert it through the gap of the Back Cover. Push the
scrap out toward the Platen.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Remove the scrap when it is pushed out onto the Platen.
If any scraps remain inside the Paper Feed Slot, repeat steps 6 and 7.
Close the Top Cover.
Turn the printer off. (→P.27)
656 Troubleshooting
Problems Regarding Paper
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper
If paper from a roll becomes jammed, Paper jam. is shown on the Display Screen of the Control Panel.
Remove the jammed paper as follows.
Note
• For instructions on removing a paper jam from a roll if the scrap of paper remains in the Paper Feed
Slot, see “Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot)”. (→P.130)
1.
Open the Roll Feed Unit Cover. Use a store-bought cutter or the like to cut the paper of the
loaded roll.
Caution
• When cutting paper, be careful to avoid scratching the printer.
2.
Press Load/Eject button.
Troubleshooting 657
Problems Regarding Paper
3.
Remove the jammed paper.
• If paper is jammed inside the Top Cover
1. Open the Top Cover and move the Carriage to the side.
2. Clear any jammed paper from inside the Top Cover.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.
3. Close the Top Cover.
Important
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b).
658 Troubleshooting
Problems Regarding Paper
• If paper from a roll is jammed by the Paper Feed Slot
1. Open the Roll Feed Unit Cover.
2. Remove the jammed paper from the Paper Feed Slot.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer. If paper
is jammed deep in the Paper Feed Slot (→P.660), remove the Roll Feed Unit and clear the
paper jam.
• If the paper is jammed by the Ejection Guide
Remove the jammed paper from the Output Tray.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.
4.
Press OK.
Troubleshooting 659
Problems Regarding Paper
If paper is jammed deep in the Paper Feed Slot, remove the Roll Feed Unit and clear the paper jam as follows.
1.
2.
Turn off the printer and remove the Roll Feed Unit from the printer. (→P.146)
Remove the jammed paper from the Paper Feed Slot.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.
3.
Install the Roll Feed Unit on the printer again. (→P.147)
660 Troubleshooting
Problems Regarding Paper
Clearing Jammed Paper from the Tray
If a sheet loaded manually becomes jammed, Paper jam. is shown on the Display Screen of the Control
Panel. Remove the jammed paper as follows.
1.
Press Load/Eject.
2.
Remove the jammed paper.
• If paper is jammed inside the Top Cover
1. Open the Top Cover and move the Carriage to the side manually.
2. Clear any jammed paper from inside the Top Cover.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.
3. Close the Top Cover.
Troubleshooting 661
Problems Regarding Paper
Important
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b).
• If paper is jammed by the Paper Feed Slot of the Top Paper Feed Slot
Remove the jammed paper from the Paper Feed Slot.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer. If paper is
jammed deep in the Paper Feed Slot (→P.663), remove the Roll Feed Unit and clear the paper jam.
• If the paper is jammed by the Ejection Guide
Remove the jammed paper from the Output Tray.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.
662 Troubleshooting
Problems Regarding Paper
• If paper is jammed in the back of the printer
Remove the jammed paper from the back.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.
3.
Press OK button.
If paper is jammed deep in the Paper Feed Slot, remove the Roll Feed Unit and clear the paper jam as follows.
1.
Turn off the printer and remove the Roll Feed Unit from the printer.
(→P.146)
2.
Remove the jammed paper from the Paper Feed Slot.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.
3.
Install the Roll Feed Unit on the printer again.
(→P.147)
Troubleshooting 663
Problems Regarding Paper
Roll paper cannot be inserted into the Paper Feed Slot
Cause
Corrective Action
The roll paper is warped.
Straighten out curls and reload the roll.
The roll was pulled out by force when it had been
advanced before printing, and this action closed the
Paper Feed Slot.
Hold down the Load/Eject button for a while and
reload the roll.
Cannot Load Sheets
Cause
The paper source selection is incorrect.
Corrective Action
Press the Feeder Selection button to activate the
Cut Sheet lamp.
Paper is not cut straight
Cause
Corrective Action
The paper is bent or curled at the cut position.
Straighten out any curling by the edges of the paper.
Paper rises by the ends of the cut position before
it is cut.
Reload the paper correctly.
Paper cannot be cut
Cause
Corrective Action
The printed document became caught on a foreign
Remove the foreign object by the Output Tray to
object by the Output Tray, which lifted the document. enable the printer to eject the printed document,
The Cutter passed under the paper.
keeping it level.
In the printer driver, No or Print Cut Guideline is
specied in Auto Cut.
Specify Yes in Auto Cut in the printer driver.
In MAIN MENU, Eject or Manual is specied in
Cutting Mode.
Specify Automatic in Cutting Mode in MAIN MENU.
Depression on the leading edge is left
Cause
Keeping a roll in the printer for a long time without
printing on it may leave a depression on the leading
edge.
Corrective Action
When printing quality is most important, we
recommend setting TrimEdge Reload to On or
Automatic so that the paper edge is automatically
cut before printing.
Roller marks are left across the trailing edge of paper
Cause
A document was removed after printing from
the Front Paper Feed Slot without pressing the
Load/Eject button.
Corrective Action
Following the instructions, press the Load/Eject
button, remove the paper, and then press the OK
button.
Wipe away any soiling on the rollers. (→P.641)
(→P.644)
664 Troubleshooting
Printing does not start
Printing does not start
The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not light up
Cause
Corrective Action
The printer is not on.
Make sure the power cord is securely plugged in, all the way. Press the
Power button to turn the printer on.
The printer is not selected in the
printer driver. (The printer is in
Sleep mode.)
In Windows, select the printer by clicking Select Printer or Printer in
the printing dialog box and try printing again.
The print job is paused. (The
printer is in Sleep mode.)
In Windows, restart the print job as follows.
1. Select the printer icon in the Printers and Faxes (or Printers)
window.
2. Clear Pause Printing in the File menu to restart the print job.
In Mac OS X, select the printer by clicking Printer Setup Utility (or
Print Center) and try printing again.
In Mac OS X, restart the print job as follows.
1. Open the Printer Setup Utility (or the Print Center).
2. Select the printer, and then Start Jobs in the Printers menu to
restart the print job.
The Printer Does Not Respond Even if Print Jobs are Sent
Cause
Corrective Action
The printer is ofine.
Press the Online button on the Control Panel to bring the printer online.
The Display Screen indicates the system is lling with ink
Cause
When the printer was turned off previously, some
cleaning operation was terminated.
Corrective Action
Wait until the system has been lled with ink. This
process may take about ten minutes.
Troubleshooting 665
The printer stops during a print job
The printer stops during a print job
An error message is shown on the Display Screen
Status
Corrective Action
An error message is displayed during printing.
Check the error message and take action as
necessary.
(→P.686)
The last portion of roll paper was used during a print
job, and paper could not be advanced because the
trailing edge is taped to the roll.
Remove the used roll and insert a new roll.
(→P.124)
(→P.125)
(→P.126)
(→P.93)
The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper
Status
Corrective Action
The leading edge of the roll paper was cut to
straighten it.
This operation is normal.
The printer cuts the leading edge of the roll to
straighten it and ejects the scraps when Trim
Edge First in the printer menu is On or when Trim
Edge First is Automatic and the leading edge is
slanted. The printer is ready to print after this initial
preparation.
When Off is selected under Trim Edge First, the
edge is not cut and scraps are not removed.
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and make
sure the Printhead is in good condition for printing.
(→P.624)
Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged.
(→P.625)
A print job was received from an incompatible printer Use the correct imagePROGRAF printer driver for
driver.
the printer and try printing again.
The printer is damaged.
666 Troubleshooting
Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Problems with the printing quality
Problems with the printing quality
Printing is faint
Cause
Corrective Action
You may be printing on the wrong side of the paper.
Print on the printing surface.
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and see if
they are clogged.
(→P.624)
Because the printer was left without Ink Tanks
installed for some time, ink has become clogged in
the ink supply system.
After the Ink Tank has been installed for 24 hours,
run Head Cleaning B.
(→P.625)
Paper is jammed inside the Top Cover.
Follow the steps below to remove the jammed piece
of paper inside the Top Cover.
1. Press the Online button to bring the printer ofine.
2. Open the Top Cover and make sure the Carriage
is not over the Platen.
3. Remove any scraps of paper inside the Top Cover.
4. Close the Top Cover.
For tips on clearing paper jams, refer to the following
topics.
• Clearing Jammed Roll Paper (→P.127)
• Clearing Jammed Paper from the Tray (→P.159)
During borderless printing, the ink was not dry
enough before cutting.
Specify a longer drying period in the printer menu, in
Roll DryingTime in Paper Details.
(→P.59)
Printing may be faint if Print Quality in Advanced
Settings in the printer driver is set to Standard or
Draft.
In Advanced Settings in the printer driver, choose
Highest or High in Print Quality.
(→P.216)
Troubleshooting 667
Problems with the printing quality
Paper rubs against the Printhead
Cause
Corrective Action
The paper type as specied in the printer driver does Make sure the same type of paper is specied on the
not match the type loaded in the printer. (*1)
printer as in the printer driver.
(→P.117)
(→P.149)
Make sure the same type of paper is specied in the
printer driver as you have loaded in the printer.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Change the paper type in the printer driver and
try printing again.
Paper has been loaded incorrectly, causing it to
wrinkle.
Reload the paper.
(→P.122)
(→P.151)
The Printhead is set too low.
In Head Height, choose Automatic. (→P.576)
You are printing on heavyweight paper or paper that
curls or wrinkles easily after absorbing ink.
When printing on Heavyweight Coated Paper or
other paper-based media, choose a VacuumStrngth
setting of Strong, or Strongest. If the paper is still
scratched, try setting the Printhead level in Head
Height to Highest. (→P.587) (→P.576)
When printing on CAD Tracing Paper or other
lm-based media, choose a VacuumStrngth setting
of Standard, Strong, or Strongest. If the paper is
still scratched, try setting the Printhead level in Head
Height to Highest. (→P.587) (→P.576)
When printing on paper 0.1 mm (0.004 in) thin
or thinner, choose a VacuumStrngth setting of
Weakest. If the paper is still scratched, try setting the
Printhead level in Head Height to Highest. (→P.587)
(→P.576)
If edges of the paper curl and become soiled when
printing on rolls of glossy photo paper, in Paper
Detailed Settings in the printer driver, set Near End
Margin to 20mm.
*1: Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting on the printer.
668 Troubleshooting
Problems with the printing quality
The edges of the paper are dirty
Cause
Corrective Action
The Platen has become dirty after borderless printing Open the Top Cover and clean the Platen.
or printing on small paper.
(→P.641)
The paper type as specied on the printer does not
match the type specied in the printer driver.
Make sure the same paper type is specied on the
printer as in the printer driver.
(→P.117)
(→P.149)
Make sure the same paper type is specied in the
printer driver as on the printer.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Change the paper type in the printer driver and
try printing again.
The paper is wrinkled or warped.
Straighten out the wrinkles or curls and reload the
paper. Do not use paper that has been printed on
previously.
(→P.122)
(→P.151)
A cut line is printed because the function to reduce
cutting dust has been activated.
If this function is not needed, deactivate
CutDustReduct. through the printer menu.
(→P.59)
The Printhead is set too low.
In Head Height, choose Automatic. (→P.576)
You are printing on heavyweight paper or paper that
curls or wrinkles easily after absorbing ink.
When printing on Heavyweight Coated Paper or
other paper-based media, choose a VacuumStrngth
setting of Strong, or Strongest. If the paper is still
scratched, try setting the Printhead level in Head
Height to Highest. (→P.587) (→P.576)
When printing on CAD Tracing Paper or other
lm-based media, choose a VacuumStrngth setting
of Standard, Strong, or Strongest. If the paper is
still scratched, try setting the Printhead level in Head
Height to Highest. (→P.587) (→P.576)
If edges of the paper curl and become soiled when
printing on rolls of glossy photo paper, in Paper
Detailed Settings in the printer driver, set Near End
Margin to 20mm.
The Ejection Guide is soiled.
Clean the Ejection Guide. (→P.640)
Troubleshooting 669
Problems with the printing quality
The surface of the paper is dirty
Cause
Corrective Action
The Paper Retainer is soiled.
Clean the Paper Retainer. (→P.644)
You are using a paper that does not dry easily.
Specify a time of about a minute in Roll DryingTime.
The back side of the paper is dirty
Cause
Corrective Action
The Platen has become dirty after borderless printing Open the Top Cover and clean the Platen.
or printing on small paper.
(→P.641)
The Paper Retainer is soiled.
Clean the Paper Retainer. (→P.644)
Roller marks are left across the trailing edge of paper
Cause
A document was removed after printing from
the Front Paper Feed Slot without pressing the
Load/Eject button.
Corrective Action
Following the instructions, press the Load/Eject
button, remove the paper, and then press the OK
button.
Wipe away any soiling on the rollers. (→P.641)
(→P.644)
Immediately After Borderless Printing, the Trailing Edge
Margin is Soiled During Regular Printing
Cause
Corrective Action
Depending on your printing environment, after
Follow these steps to set the Between Pages setting
borderless printing in which the leading and trailing
of Drying Time in a range of 30 seconds to 3 minutes
edge of the roll is cut automatically, any ink adhering before borderless printing.
to the cutter unit may rub off on the next printed
1. On the Main sheet of the printer driver, click
document.
Settings in Media Type.
2. Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages
list of Drying Time.
670 Troubleshooting
Problems with the printing quality
Printed colors are inaccurate
Cause
Corrective Action
Color adjustment has not been activated in the
Advanced Settings of the printer driver.
In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver,
access Color Settings in Color Mode to adjust
colors.
Colors have not been adjusted on the computer or
monitor.
Refer to the computer and monitor documentation
to adjust the colors.
Adjust the settings of the color management software,
referring to the software documentation as needed.
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and see if
they are clogged.
(→P.624)
In the printer driver, Application Color Matching
Priority is not selected.
Click Special Settings on the Layout sheet of the
printer driver and select Application Color Matching
Priority in the dialog box.
There may be a slight difference in how colors are
printed after you replace the Printhead because of
individual variation among Printheads.
Execute color calibration.
Printhead characteristics gradually change through
repeated use, and colors may change.
Execute color calibration.
Color may change slightly even on the same model Follow these steps to prepare the printing
of printer if you use a different version of the rmware environment.
or printer driver, or when you print under different
1. Use the same version of rmware or printer driver.
settings or in a different printing environment.
2. Specify the same value for all settings items.
3. Execute color calibration.
The region selection of the Media Conguration Tool
was changed when you reinstalled the printer driver.
If you change the region selection of the Media
Conguration Tool, region-specic paper information
originally registered on the printer before installation
will be deleted. If the information of paper you used
for color calibration is deleted, such color calibration
can no longer be applied to any type of paper.
Perform color calibration again using paper supported
in the newly selected region and compatible with
color calibration.
Troubleshooting 671
Problems with the printing quality
Banding in different colors occurs
Cause
Corrective Action
The roll is not loaded correctly in the Roll Feed Unit.
Remove the roll and reload it.
(→P.121)
The paper feed amount is not adjusted correctly.
Adjust the feed amount.
(→P.577)
Printing does not proceed smoothly because print
jobs are interrupted during transmission.
Exit other applications and cancel other print jobs.
In the printer menu, Print Length is specied in
Feed Priority.
To adjust the feed amount, specify Band Joint in
Feed Priority in the printer menu.
(→P.577)
The Printhead is out of alignment.
Adjust the Printhead alignment.
(→P.572)
Streaks may occur if you set the Print Quality too
low.
Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the
Advanced Settings of the printer driver and try
printing again.
(→P.216)
672 Troubleshooting
Problems with the printing quality
Colors in printed images are uneven
Cause
Corrective Action
Line Drawing/Text is selected when printing images Specify Image in the printer driver.
in many solid colors.
You are printing on paper that curls easily.
Printed colors may appear uneven on the leading
edge of paper that is susceptible to curling. Increase
the level of vacuum holding the paper against the
Platen or specify a margin of 20 mm (0.79 in) or more
for the leading edge. (→P.587)
If you use Glossy Paper, art paper or Coated Paper, In Advanced Settings of the printer driver, choose
color shading may appear at the rear edges of the
Highest or High in Print Quality.
paper.
(→P.216)
Printed colors may be uneven if you set the Print
Quality too low.
Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the
Advanced Settings of the printer driver.
(→P.216)
Color may be uneven between dark and light image
areas.
Select Unidirectional Printing in the Advanced
Settings of the printer driver.
When borderless printing is used, the edge of the
paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may
be uneven at the edges.
Specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver before
printing. In this case, the paper can be printed without
borders on the left and right sides only. Cut the
printed document ejected from the printer, then use
scissors to cut away the edges on the top and bottom.
Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the
Advanced Settings of the printer driver.
(→P.216)
The Printhead is out of alignment.
Adjust the Printhead alignment.
(→P.572)
Drying documents stacked on each other may cause To avoid uneven colors, we recommend drying each
uneven colors.
sheet separately.
If you are using heavyweight sheets or similar paper, For heavyweight sheets or similar paper, execute Adj
colors may be uneven on the trailing edge in some
Far Ed Feed with the Front Tray Guides raised. Also
cases even after you execute Adj Far Ed Feed.
keep the Front Tray Guides raised during printing.
Before printing on paper other than heavyweight
sheets, lower the Front Tray Guides.
Troubleshooting 673
Problems with the printing quality
Image Edges are Blurred or White Banding Occurs
Cause
Corrective Action
The Platen suction is too strong.
Set VacuumStrngth to Weakest. (→P.587)
The Printhead is set too high.
Lower the Printhead. (→P.576)
The contrast becomes uneven during printing
Cause
The paper feed amount is out of adjustment.
Corrective Action
Adjust the feed amount.
(→P.577)
Execute Fine Band Adj. during printing.
(→P.577)
The length of printed images is inaccurate
Cause
Corrective Action
In the printer menu, Band Joint is specied in Feed
Priority.
To ensure the feed amount matches the paper size,
select Print Length in Feed Priority in the printer
menu and enter the amount for adjustment in Adjust
Length. You can adjust the feed amount in 0.02%
increments. (→P.59)
White dots about 1 mm (0.039 in) apart appear on printed
documents, in the direction paper is fed.
Cause
Corrective Action
The media type setting is incorrect.
After you select the correct media type, clean the
parts used in paper feeding (spurs).
(→P.149)
(→P.117)
(→P.645)
Parts used in paper feeding (spurs) are soiled.
Clean the Spurs.
(→P.645)
674 Troubleshooting
Problems with the printing quality
Documents are printed crooked
Cause
Corrective Action
Skew Skew Check Lv. has been set to Loose or Off. Choose Standard in Skew Check Lv..
Width Detection has been set to Off.
Choose On in Width Detection.
Documents are printed in monochrome
Cause
Corrective Action
In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver,
In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver,
Monochrome or Monochrome (Photo), is specied specify Color in Color Mode and try printing again.
in Color Mode.
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Print a test pattern to check the color ink nozzles and
see if they are clogged.
(→P.624)
Line thickness is not uniform (Windows)
Cause
In the Special Settings dialog box of the Windows
printer driver, Fast Graphic Process is selected.
Corrective Action
Open the printer driver’s Properties dialog box from
Print in the application software’s File menu, and try
printing following the steps below.
1. Remove the check from Open Preview When
Print Job Starts in the Main sheet.
2. Remove the check from Page Layout in the
Layout sheet.
3. Click the Special Settings button in the Layout
sheet to open the Special Settings dialog
box, and remove the check from Fast Graphic
Process.
Lines are misaligned
Cause
The Printhead alignment is not adjusted.
Corrective Action
Adjust the Printhead alignment.
(→P.572)
(→P.574)
Problems with the printing quality caused by the type
of paper
For paper-specic troubleshooting tips to improve the printing quality, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.108)
Troubleshooting 675
Cannot print over a network
Cannot print over a network
Cannot connect the printer to the network
Cause
Corrective Action
The Ethernet cable is not connected
correctly to the printer’s Ethernet port.
1. Make sure the printer is connected to the network with the correct
Ethernet cable, and then turn the printer on. For instructions on
connecting the cable, refer to the Quick Start Guide.
2. Make sure the Link indicator is lit.
The Link indicator is green if the printer is connected via 100
Base-TX and orange if connected via 10Base-T.
If the Link indicator is not lit, check the following points.
• Make sure the hub is on.
• Make sure the end of the Ethernet cable is connected
correctly.
Insert the Ethernet cable until it clicks and locks in place.
• Make sure there is no problem with the Ethernet cable.
If there is any problem, replace the Ethernet cable.
• Check the communication mode with the hub.
Although the printer normally detects the hub
communication mode and transmission rate automatically
(in auto negotiation mode), sometimes the hub settings
cannot be detected. In this case, congure the connection
method manually, specifying the communication mode in
use. (→P.677)
676 Troubleshooting
Cannot print over a network
Conguring the Communication Mode Manually
This topic gives instructions for conguring the communication mode manually.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press ►.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Ethernet Driver, and then press ►.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto Detect, and then press ►.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Off, and then press OK.
Return to the Ethernet Driver menu.
6.
7.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Comm.Mode, and then press ►.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the communication mode, and then press the OK button.
Return to the Ethernet Driver menu.
8.
9.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Ethernet Type, and then press ►.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the Ethernet type, and then press OK.
Return to the Ethernet Driver menu.
10.
11.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Spanning Tree, and then press ►.
Press ▲ or ▼ to enable or disable spanning tree support, and then press OK.
Return to the Ethernet Driver menu.
12.
Press the Online button.
After the conrmation message is displayed, press OK.
The printer will now restart.
Troubleshooting 677
Cannot print over a network
Cannot print over a TCP/IP network
Cause
Corrective Action
The printer’s IP address is not congured correctly.
Make sure the printer’s IP address is congured
correctly. For details, see “Conguring the IP
Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup
Utility”. (→P.446) or see “Conguring the IP Address
Using the Printer Control Panel”. (→P.483)
The printer’s TCP/IP network settings are not
congured correctly.
Make sure the printer’s TCP/IP network settings are
congured correctly. For details, see “Conguring the
Printer’s TCP/IP Network Settings”. (→P.487)
The computer you are trying to print from is not
congured correctly.
Make sure the computer’s TCP/IP network settings
are congured correctly. For details, see “Conguring
the Printer Driver Destination (Windows)”. (→P.495)
Otherwise, see “Conguring the Destination for
TCP/IP Network (Macintosh)”. (→P.515)
Cannot print over a NetWare network
Cause
Corrective Action
The printer’s NetWare settings are not congured
correctly.
Make sure the printer’s NetWare settings are
congured correctly. In particular, make sure a valid
frame type is selected. For details, see “Conguring
the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings”. (→P.490)
The computer you are trying to print from is not
congured correctly.
Make sure the computer’s NetWare settings are
congured correctly. For details, see “Conguring
NetWare Network Settings”. (→P.507)
The NetWare server and services are not congured Check the following points.
correctly.
1. Make sure the NetWare le server is running.
2. Make sure there is enough free disk space on the
NetWare le server. Insufcient disk space may
prevent you from processing large print jobs.
3. Start NWADMIN or PCONSOLE and conrm that
the print service is congured correctly and the
print queue is available.
4. If data transmission to a printer on another subnet
fails, deactivate NCP burst mode in that printer’s
network protocol settings.
5. If the printer is used in queue server mode, specify
“Other/Unknown” as the printer type.
678 Troubleshooting
Cannot print over a network
Cannot print over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks
Cause
Corrective Action
The AppleTalk protocol is not enabled on the printer.
Activate AppleTalk on the printer. For details,
see “Conguring the Printer’s AppleTalk Network
Settings”. (→P.489)
The computer you are trying to print from is not
congured correctly.
Make sure the computer’s AppleTalk settings are
congured correctly. For details, see “Conguring
the Destination for AppleTalk Network (Macintosh)”.
(→P.512) or see “Conguring the Destination for
Bonjour Network (Macintosh)”. (→P.517)
The computer and printer are not on the same
network.
Due to the nature of Bonjour, you cannot print if
the printer is on another network behind a router.
Make sure the computer and printer are on the same
network. For information about network settings, ask
your network administrator.
Troubleshooting 679
Installation problems
Installation problems
Removing Installed Printer Drivers
Follow the steps below to remove installed printer drivers and utilities.
Removing printer drivers (Windows)
Remove the printer driver as follows.
Note
• In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows Vista, you must log on with
administrative rights such as “Administrator” account.
1.
From the Windows start menu, select Programs > Canon Printer Uninstaller >
imagePROGRAF Printer Driver Uninstaller to display the Delete Printer window.
2.
3.
4.
Select the printer in the list and click Delete.
Click Yes in the Warning message dialog box.
Make sure that the printer has been removed from the list, and click Exit.
Removing Printer Drivers and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
(Macintosh)
Remove the printer driver or imagePROGRAF Printmonitor as follows.
1.
2.
Insert the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer in the CD-ROM drive.
Start the printer driver installer included in the User Software CD-ROM.
Open OS X and double-click iPF Driver Installer X.
3.
4.
In the upper-left menu, choose Uninstall, and click Uninstall.
Follow the instructions on the screen to remove the printer driver or imagePROGRAF
Printmonitor.
Removing imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
Remove imagePROGRAF Status Monitor as follows.
1.
From the Windows start menu, select Programs > imagePROGRAF Status Monitor >
Uninstaller (imagePROGRAF Status Monitor) to start the wizard.
2.
3.
In the wizard window, click Delete, and then click Next.
Follow the instructions on the screen to remove imagePROGRAF Status Monitor.
Removing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility (Windows)
Remove imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility as follows.
1.
From the Windows start menu, select Programs > imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility >
Uninstaller (imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility) to start the wizard.
2.
3.
In the wizard window, click Delete, and then click Next.
Follow the instructions on the screen to remove imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
680 Troubleshooting
Other problems
Other problems
The printer does not go on
Cause
Corrective Action
The printer is unplugged.
Plug the power cord into the outlet, and then turn on
the printer.
The specied voltage is not supplied.
Check the voltage of the outlet and breaker.
For information on the specied voltage, see
“Specications”. (→P.83)
If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound
The following sounds do not indicate a problem with the printer.
• There is a sound of vacuum from the Platen
To prevent paper from rising, paper is held against the Platen by suction from Vacuum holes under it.
• Roll paper makes a uttering sound during printing
There may be a uttering sound when large paper is advanced.
• If you suddenly hear the tone for cleaning operations
At regular intervals, for printer maintenance, cleaning operations will begin automatically, even if the
printer is in Sleep mode.
In other cases, contact your Canon dealer.
Messages advising to check the maintenance cartridge
are not cleared
Cause
The printer has not detected the new Maintenance
Cartridge that was used to replace the old one.
Corrective Action
Remove the new Maintenance Cartridge you have
just installed and insert it again rmly.
Restart the printer.
The printer consumes a lot of ink
Cause
Corrective Action
Many full-page color images are printed.
In print jobs such as photos, images are lled with
color. This consumes a lot of ink. This does not
indicate a problem with the printer.
Head Cleaning B is used often.
Head Cleaning B consumes a lot of ink. This does
not indicate a problem with the printer. Unless the
printer has been moved or stored for a long period
or you are troubleshooting Printhead problems, we
recommend not performing Head Cleaning B, to the
extent possible.
You have just nished initial installation, when more
ink is consumed to ll the system.
After initial installation or at the rst-time use after
transfer, ink ows into the system between the Ink
Tank and Printhead, which may cause the ink level
indicators to drop to 80%. This does not indicate a
problem with the printer.
Troubleshooting 681
Other problems
Ink Level Detection
Ink level detection will be deactivated if you load ink tanks once emptied.
Ink level detection
Ink tanks specied for this printer feature an ink level detection function to prevent the ink from running out
during printing, which prevents printer damage. (→P.614)
This function will not work correctly if you use rell ink tanks. As a result, printing stops. Thus, before using
rell ink tanks, you must cancel the ink level detection.
Printing with the ink level detection canceled may lead to printer damage and printing problems. Canon Inc.
is not liable for any damage that may occur as a result of relling ink.
Caution
• After ink level detection has been disabled, this function cannot be reactivated for the currently loaded
Ink Tank. To use ink level detection again, replace the Ink Tank with a new ink tank specied for use
with the printer.
• Repeatedly removing and inserting an Ink Tank may damage the connection between the Ink Tank and
the printer, which may cause ink leakage from the Ink Tank and damage the printer.
Disabling ink level detection
1.
On the Display Screen, a message indicates that the ink level cannot be detected. After checking
the message, press the ► button.
2.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Information, and then press the OK button.
3.
A conrmation message is shown on the Display Screen about disabling ink level detection. After
checking the message, press the ► button.
4.
After checking the message, press the ► button.
682 Troubleshooting
Other problems
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
6.
Check the message and press the ► button.
7.
Check the message and press the ► button.
8.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
9.
A conrmation message about updating ink information is shown on the Display Screen. After
checking the message, press the ► button.
10.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
Ink level detection is now disabled, and the printer goes online.
Troubleshooting 683
Responding to Messages
Error Message
Responding to Messages
Responding to Messages
Warning messages
Warning messages are shown on lines 2-4 of the Display Screen.
Although warning messages do not prevent printer operation, you should check the message and take the
appropriate action. (→P.686)
Error messages (if action can be taken)
Error messages are indicated on the Display Screen if you must respond before the printer can resume
operation.
Check the message and take the appropriate action. (→P.686)
Error messages (if no action can be taken)
In the following situations, turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds before restoring power.
If the message is still displayed, write down the error code and message, turn off the printer, and contact your
Canon dealer for assistance.
• The error message is displayed with the following instructions: Turn off printer, wait, then turn on
again..
• “ERROR” is displayed, followed by the error code and Call for service..
684 Error Message
Responding to Messages
Other Messages
These messages do not prevent printer operation. Check the information on the Display Screen and take
action as necessary. Messages requiring special attention are as follows:
Note
• Messages are also displayed in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows) or imagePROGRAF
Printmonitor (Macintosh).
Error Message 685
Responding to Messages
Error Messages
Error messages
Check the message and take the appropriate action.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Borderless printng not possible. (→P.696)
Cannot adjust band. (→P.699)
Cannot adjust printhead. (→P.700)
Cannot calibrate. (→P.700)
Cannot cut paper. (→P.695)
Cannot detect papr (→P.694)
Cannot feed paper. (→P.694)
Cannot print as specied. (→P.699)
End of paper feed. (→P.695)
ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) (→P.706)
File read error. (→P.704)
GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number) (→P.706)
Hard disk error. (→P.704)
Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) (→P.706)
Ink insufcient. (→P.697)
Ink Level: Check (→P.698)
Ink tank error. (→P.698)
Ink tank is empty. (→P.697)
Insufcient paper for job (→P.690)
Mail box full. Delete unwanted data (→P.705)
Mail box full. Cannot save. (→P.705)
Mail box full. (→P.704)
Mail box full. Now printing without saving data. (→P.704)
Mail box nearly full. (→P.704)
Maintenance cartridge full. (→P.703)
Maintenance cartridge problem. (→P.703)
Manual printing is selected, but a roll is loaded. (→P.693)
Multi-sensor error (→P.707)
No ink tank loaded. (→P.698)
No Maintenance Cartridge capacity. (→P.703)
No maintenance cartridge. (→P.703)
No Roll Feed Unit. (→P.692)
Paper jam. (→P.693)
Paper loaded askew. (→P.694)
Paper Mismatch (→P.688)
Paper size not detected. (→P.690)
Papr Type Mismatch (→P.688)
Parts replacement time has passed. (→P.707)
PHeads: wrong pos. (→P.701)
Prepare for maint cart replacement. (→P.703)
Prepare for parts replacement. (→P.706)
Problem with Printhead x (x is L, R, or LR) (→P.702)
Roll feed unit err (→P.692)
Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded. (→P.691)
686 Error Message
Responding to Messages
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Roll printing is selected. (→P.691)
RollWdthMismatch (→P.689)
Sheet printing is selected. (→P.692)
The roll is empty. (→P.692)
This paper cannot be used. (→P.691)
Unknown le. (→P.707)
Use another paper. (→P.699)
Wrong paper feed slot for this paper type. (→P.693)
x printhead error (x is Left or Right) (→P.702)
x printhead needs cleaning. (x is Left or Right) (→P.701)
Other Messages
These messages do not prevent printer operation. Check the information on the Display Screen and take
action as necessary. Messages requiring special attention are as follows:
• Cannot execute this command. Use other paper. (→P.699)
• Excessive temperature or humidity. (→P.700)
• Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected. (→P.698)
Error Message 687
Messages regarding paper
Messages regarding paper
Paper Mismatch
Cause
Corrective Action
You printed a test pattern for printer adjustment on
several sheets, but sheets of different types or sizes
of paper were used.
When printing a test pattern, use sheets of the same
type and size of paper.
Papr Type Mismatch
Cause
The paper type as specied on the printer does not
match the type specied in the printer driver.
Corrective Action
Make sure the same type of paper is specied on the
printer as in the printer driver.
(→P.93)
(→P.98)
Follow these steps to ensure the paper type matches
on the printer and in the printer driver.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Either change the type of paper specied in the
printer driver settings or replace the loaded paper
and change the paper type setting on the printer.
Press the Online button to resume printing.
However, this may cause a paper jam or printing
problem.
*Printing will continue if you have set Detect Mismatch to Warning or None.
688 Error Message
Messages regarding paper
RollWdthMismatch
Cause
Corrective Action
The paper size as specied on the If you have selected Fit Roll Paper
printer does not match the size
Width in the printer driver settings
specied in the printer driver.
and Warning in Detect Mismatch
in the printer menu:
Printing resumes after the warning
message is displayed. However,
note that this error may cause
paper jams and affect the printing
quality. Try printing again after
adjusting the paper size as
specied in the printer driver and
the size specied on the printer so
that they match.
If you have selected Fit Roll Paper Follow the steps below to ensure
Width in the printer driver settings the paper size matches on the
and Pause in Detect Mismatch in printer and in the printer driver.
the printer menu:
1. Hold down the Stop button for
a second or more to cancel
printing.
2. Make sure the roll width
selected in the dialog box
displayed when you select Fit
Roll Paper Width in the printer
driver matches the width of the
roll loaded in the printer, and
then try printing again.
Press the Online button to resume
printing.
However, note that this error may
cause paper jams and affect the
printing quality.
Error Message 689
Messages regarding paper
Paper size not detected.
Cause
Paper has been loaded askew, or warped paper has
been loaded.
Corrective Action
Reload paper straight, in the correct position.
(→P.122)
(→P.151)
*If this message is displayed, you can resume the print job.
Insufcient paper for job
Cause
The printer has received a print job longer than the
amount of roll paper left.
Corrective Action
Follow the steps below to replace the roll.
1. Remove the roll.
(→P.124)
(→P.125)
(→P.126)
2. Load a roll with enough paper left.
(→P.119)
(→P.121)
(→P.122)
3. If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the
paper type.
(→P.117)
4. Select the paper length, unless a barcode was
printed on the roll and you have deactivated
automatic detection of the remaining roll paper.
(→P.118)
Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to
cancel printing.
Press the Online button to resume printing.
However, the roll paper may run out during the
print job and you may not be able to print all of the
document.
690 Error Message
Messages regarding paper
This paper cannot be used.
Check supported paper sizes.
Cause
Corrective Action
The loaded paper is too large for the printer.
Load paper of the correct size.
(→P.113)
The loaded paper is too small for the printer.
Load paper of the correct size.
(→P.113)
Paper has been loaded that is too small to print
the test pattern for printhead adjustment or nozzle
checking.
Load unused paper A4/Letter-sized or larger. More
than one sheet may be required depending on the
adjustment.
Roll printing is selected.
Cause
You have attempted to print a test print sheet or
other printer status information on a roll, but no roll
is loaded.
Corrective Action
Load a roll and try printing again.
To print on a sheet instead, hold the Stop button for
more than a second to cancel printing, load a sheet,
and then print. (→P.98)
Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded.
Cause
A print job for rolls was received when a sheet is
loaded.
Corrective Action
Press the OK button and remove the sheet.
(→P.157)
Load a roll and try printing again.
(→P.122)
Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to
cancel printing.
Error Message 691
Messages regarding paper
The roll is empty.
Cause
There is no more paper left on the roll.
Corrective Action
Follow the steps below to replace the used roll with a
new roll of the same type and size.
1. Remove the roll.
(→P.124)
(→P.125)
(→P.126)
2. Load the new roll.
(→P.119)
(→P.121)
(→P.122)
3. If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the
paper type.
(→P.117)
4. If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the
paper length.
(→P.118)
*If this message is displayed, you can resume the print job.
Roll feed unit err
Cause
The Roll Feed Unit is not working.
Corrective Action
Turn off the printer, remove the Roll Feed Unit
momentarily, and then reinstall it.
(→P.146)
(→P.147)
If the message is still displayed after you do this,
contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
No Roll Feed Unit.
Cause
The printer has received a print job that species
rolls, but the Roll Feed Unit is not installed.
Corrective Action
Install the Roll Feed Unit and resend the print job.
(→P.147)
Sheet printing is selected.
Cause
Corrective Action
You have attempted to print a test print sheet or other Load a sheet and try printing again.
printer status information on a sheet, but no sheet
To print on a roll instead, hold the Stop button for
is loaded.
more than a second to cancel printing, load a roll,
and then print. (→P.93)
692 Error Message
Messages regarding paper
Manual printing is selected, but a roll is loaded.
Cause
A print job for manually printing on sheets was sent
when a roll is loaded.
Corrective Action
Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to
cancel printing.
If there is a printed document in the output tray, select
Paper Cutting in the printer menu and cut the roll at
the desired position.
(→P.135)
Load paper of the type and size you have specied in
the printer driver and try printing again.
(→P.98)
Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to
cancel printing. Change the printer driver settings to
match the roll already loaded, and then try printing
again.
Wrong paper feed slot for this paper type.
Cause
Corrective Action
The Paper Feed Slot where paper is loaded does not Try printing again after changing the settings in the
match the Paper Feed Slot specied as the paper
printer driver so that the Paper Feed Slot where paper
source.
is loaded matches the Paper Feed Slot specied as
the paper source. (→P.98)
Paper jam.
Cause
Corrective Action
A paper jam occurred in the printer during printing.
Press the Load/Eject button and remove the jammed
paper.
(→P.127)
(→P.159)
You have loaded and printed on a roll when sheets
are selected as the paper source on the Control
Panel.
Press the Load/Eject button, remove the roll, and
load a sheet. Otherwise, select the roll as the media
source on the Control Panel and reload the roll.
*If this message is displayed, you can resume the print job.
Error Message 693
Messages regarding paper
Paper loaded askew.
Cause
Paper has been loaded askew.
Corrective Action
Follow these steps to reload a roll.
1. Press the Load/Eject button and remove the
crooked paper.
2. Press the Load/Eject button and reload the roll.
(→P.122)
Follow these step to reload a sheet.
1. Press the Load/Eject button and remove the
crooked paper.
2. Press the Load/Eject button and reload the sheet.
(→P.151)
Note
• To disable this message (if it is displayed repeatedly despite reloading paper, for example), choose Off
or Loose in the Skew Check Lv. setting of the printer menu. However, this may cause jams if paper
is crooked when printed. Also, the Platen may become soiled, which may soil the back of the next
document when it is printed.
Cannot detect papr
Cause
Corrective Action
The paper has come out of the printer.
Remove the paper that has come out of the printer,
press the Load/Eject button, and reload the paper.
(→P.93)
(→P.98)
A paper jam occurred in the printer.
Remove the jammed paper, press the Load/Eject
button, and reload paper.
(→P.127)
(→P.159)
The roll cannot be correctly detected.
Rewind the roll manually until the paper caught in
the rollers is completely out of the rollers. Press the
Load/Eject button and reload the roll.
*If this message is displayed, you can resume the print job.
Cannot feed paper.
Cause
The sheet cannot be fed correctly.
694 Error Message
Corrective Action
Reload the sheet straight, in the correct position.
(→P.151)
Messages regarding paper
Cannot cut paper.
Cause
Corrective Action
There are sheets left on the Ejection Guide.
Remove the paper.
There is a foreign object by the Output Tray,
obstructing the Cutter Unit.
Remove the foreign object.
You are not using the printer under the recommended Use the printer only where the recommended
environmental conditions for the paper.
environmental conditions for the paper are met.
Note that various environmental conditions are
recommended for various types of paper. For details
on the recommended environmental conditions for
paper, see Paper Reference Guide".
(→P.108)
You are using paper that is not compatible with
automatic cutting.
Specify Manual as the method for cutting rolls and
cut the roll manually.
(→P.135)
For details on automatic cutting compatibility, see the
Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.108)
The Cutter Unit stops in the middle of cutting.
Move the Cutter Unit to the left, and then remove the
roll paper. If cutting is not possible using the Cutter
Unit, specify Manual as the method for cutting rolls
and cut the roll manually.
(→P.127)
(→P.135)
In other cases, the Cutter Unit may be damaged.
Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
*If this message is displayed, you can resume the print job.
End of paper feed.
Cause
You are pressing the ▲ button on the Control Panel
and trying to rewind the roll to the edge.
Corrective Action
Release the ▲ button.
Error Message 695
Messages regarding paper
Borderless printng not possible.
Check roll width and spacers.
Cause
The paper is loaded askew.
Corrective Action
Insert the paper and Spacer for Borderless Printing
rmly all the way into the printer.
When using A1 or A2 rolls, attach the Spacer for
Borderless Printing before loading the roll.
(→P.143)
When using sizes other than A1 or A2, remove the
Spacer for Borderless Printing before loading the roll.
(→P.143)
The paper loaded is not compatible with borderless
printing.
Load paper compatible with borderless printing and
try printing again. Paper you can use for borderless
printing is restricted to particular types of paper and
rolls of particular widths. For information on types of
paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the
Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)
Because paper expands or contracts depending on Use each type of paper only where the recommended
the environment of use, it may become narrower or environmental conditions are met. For details on
wider than the supported width for borderless printing. environmental conditions for various paper, see the
Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)
Check supported paper.
Cause
Corrective Action
The print job received species a type or width of
paper that is not compatible with borderless printing.
Follow these steps to change the settings of the print
job to enable borderless printing.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Make sure the correct printer driver for the printer
is selected and try printing again.
For information on types of paper compatible with
borderless printing, refer to the Paper Reference
Guide. (→P.108)
If you press the Online button and continue printing,
the document will be printed with a border.
696 Error Message
Messages regarding ink
Messages regarding ink
Ink insufcient.
Cause
Corrective Action
The ink level is low, so you cannot clean the
Printhead.
Press the OK button and replace the Ink Tank that is
low with a new Ink Tank.
(→P.615)
The ink level is low, so there may not be enough ink
to nish printing.
Press the OK button and replace the Ink Tank that is
low with a new Ink Tank.
(→P.615)
You can print until the ink runs out by pressing the
Online button. However, if the ink runs out during
printing, the following situation will occur depending
on the position of the leading edge when it passes
through the printer.
1. No ink left. is displayed and printing stops. Press
the Stop button to cancel printing, or press the
OK button, replace the ink tank that is low with a
new one, and continue printing. However, note
that because printing is paused, colors may be
slightly different.
(→P.615)
2. Ink tank empty. Canceling printing of this
page. is displayed and printing stops. After the
paper is ejected, press the OK button and replace
the ink tank that is low with a new one.
(→P.615)
No ink left.
Cause
There is no ink left.
Corrective Action
Open the Ink Tank Cover and replace the Ink Tank
for which the Ink Lamp is ashing.
(→P.615)
Error Message 697
Messages regarding ink
Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected.
Cause
Ink level detection cannot work correctly if you use
rell ink tanks.
Corrective Action
The rell ink tank can no longer be used. See the
section “Ink level detection” and take the appropriate
action.
(→P.682)
Ink Level: Check
Cause
Not much ink is left.
Corrective Action
Prepare a new Ink Tank.
We recommend replacing the Ink Tank with a new Ink
Tank at this point if you plan to print large-format or
high-quantity jobs.
No ink tank loaded.
Cause
Corrective Action
There is no Ink Tank of the indicated color in the
printer.
Load or reload the Ink Tank.
(→P.615)
There is a problem with the Ink Tank.
Replace it with a new Ink Tank.
(→P.615)
Ink tank error.
Cause
The Ink Tank in the printer is incompatible.
Corrective Action
Load an Ink Tank specied for use with the printer.
(→P.615)
The Display Screen indicates the system is lling with ink
Cause
When the printer was turned off previously, some
cleaning operation was terminated.
698 Error Message
Corrective Action
Wait until the system has been lled with ink. This
process may take about ten minutes.
Messages regarding printing or adjusment
Messages regarding printing or adjusment
Use another paper.
Cause
Corrective Action
The Printhead and feed amount cannot be adjusted
when highly transparent lm is loaded.
For automatic Printhead adjustment, we recommend
using a type of paper that you often use, other than
lm.
(→P.572)
Adjust the feed amount manually.
(→P.580)
Cannot execute this command. Use other paper.
Cause
Corrective Action
The loaded paper cannot be used for color calibration. Load paper compatible with color calibration. (*1)
See "Paper Reference Guide."
(→P.108)
*1: Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting on the printer. Adjustment cannot
be completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.
Cannot print as specied.
Press Load/Eject and replace paper with A4/LTR (vertical) or larger
Cause
Corrective Action
Paper has been loaded that is too small to
print the test pattern for printhead adjustment
or nozzle checking.
Press the Load/Eject button and switch to paper A4/Letter,
vertical, or larger.
Press Load/Eject and replace roll with 10 in. wide or larger roll.
Cause
Paper has been loaded that is too small to
print the test pattern for printhead adjustment
or nozzle checking.
Corrective Action
Press the Load/Eject button and load a roll at least 10
inches (254 mm) wide.
Cannot adjust band.
Cause
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Corrective Action
Follow the steps below to check the nozzles.
1. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
(→P.624)
2. Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged.
(→P.625)
Highly transparent lm is loaded that cannot be used Adjust the feed amount manually.
for feed amount adjustment.
(→P.580)
Error Message 699
Messages regarding printing or adjusment
Cannot adjust printhead.
Cause
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Corrective Action
Follow the steps below to check the nozzles.
1. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
(→P.624)
2. Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged.
(→P.625)
Highly transparent lm is loaded that cannot be used We recommend using a type of paper that you often
for Printhead adjustment.
use, other than lm, for Printhead adjustment.
(→P.572)
Cannot calibrate.
Cause
Corrective Action
The paper for printing a test pattern for adjustment is Load unused paper compatible with color calibration.
soiled. Otherwise, colored paper is loaded.
(→P.108)
The printed test pattern is faint.
Take steps to remedy the faint printing.
(→P.667)
Direct sunlight or strong lighting may be shining on
the printer and causing the sensor to malfunction.
Take steps to ensure the printer is not used when
exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting.
Excessive temperature or humidity.
Cause
The temperature or humidity where the printer is
installed is out of the acceptable range for printer
operation.
Corrective Action
Press the Stop button and stop printing.
Use the printer in an environment that meets the
requirements for the operating environment. Note
that various environmental conditions are also
recommended for various types of paper. For details
on the recommended environmental conditions for
paper, see "Paper Reference Guide."
(→P.108)
Press the OK button and complete color calibration.
However, calibration may not be completed
successfully.
700 Error Message
Messages regarding printheads
Messages regarding printheads
Cannot adjust printhead.
Cause
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Corrective Action
Follow the steps below to check the nozzles.
1. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
(→P.624)
2. Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged.
(→P.625)
Highly transparent lm is loaded that cannot be used We recommend using a type of paper that you often
for Printhead adjustment.
use, other than lm, for Printhead adjustment.
(→P.572)
Cannot adjust band.
Cause
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Corrective Action
Follow the steps below to check the nozzles.
1. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
(→P.624)
2. Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged.
(→P.625)
Highly transparent lm is loaded that cannot be used Adjust the feed amount manually.
for feed amount adjustment.
(→P.580)
x printhead needs cleaning. (x is Left or Right)
Cause
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Corrective Action
Specify Printhead cleaning options. (→P.625)
If the message is still displayed after you execute
Head Cleaning B two or three times, contact your
Canon dealer for assistance.
PHeads: wrong pos.
Cause
Corrective Action
The left Printhead is installed in the right position and Turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds
vice versa.
before restoring the power. If the message is
displayed again, contact your Canon dealer for
assistance.
Error Message 701
Messages regarding printheads
Problem with Printhead x (x is L, R, or LR)
Cause
The Printhead nozzles are becoming clogged.
Corrective Action
If printing is faint, clean the Printhead. (→P.625)
x printhead error (x is Left or Right)
Cause
Corrective Action
An incompatible Printhead has been installed.
Install a Printhead specied for use with the printer. If
“Printhead L” is displayed, install the Printhead L ; if
“Printhead R” is displayed, install the Printhead R.
(→P.626)
There is a problem with the Printhead.
Open the Top Cover. If the Carriage is over the
Platen, replace the Printhead with a new one. If
“Printhead L” is displayed, replace the Printhead L ; if
“Printhead R” is displayed, replace the Printhead R.
(→P.626)
If, after opening the Top Cover, you see that the
Carriage is not over the Platen, follow the steps
below.
1. Turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds
before restoring the power.
2. Lift the Top Cover and make sure the Carriage
is over the Platen. If “Printhead L” is displayed,
install the Printhead L, and if “Printhead R” is
displayed, install the Printhead R.
(→P.626)
702 Error Message
Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge
Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge
No maintenance cartridge.
Cause
The Maintenance Cartridge is not installed.
Corrective Action
Install the Maintenance Cartridge.
(→P.633)
Prepare for maint cart replacement.
Cause
The Maintenance Cartridge is almost full.
Corrective Action
You can continue to print, but prepare a new
Maintenance Cartridge to use when the message for
replacement is displayed.
No Maintenance Cartridge capacity.
Cause
The Maintenance Cartridge cannot absorb enough
ink for Printhead cleaning or other operation.
Corrective Action
After conrming that the printer has stopped
operating, replace the Maintenance Cartridge.
(→P.633)
Maintenance cartridge full.
Cause
The Maintenance Cartridge is full.
Corrective Action
After conrming that the printer has stopped
operating, replace the Maintenance Cartridge.
(→P.633)
Maintenance cartridge problem.
Cause
Corrective Action
An incompatible or used Maintenance Cartridge has
been installed.
Install an unused Maintenance Cartridge specied for
use with the printer.
(→P.633)
Error Message 703
Messages regarding the hard disk
Messages regarding the hard disk
Hard disk error.
Cause
Corrective Action
There is a format problem with the printer’s hard disk. Press the OK button to start reformatting the
hard disk. When formatting is nished, the printer
automatically restarts. (Formatting will erase all data
on the hard disk.)
File read error.
Cause
Files on the printer’s hard disk have become
corrupted.
Corrective Action
Restart the printer. Only the corrupted les will be
deleted, and the printer will restart.
Mail box full.
Cause
There is no more space on the printer’s hard disk.
Corrective Action
Press the Stop button to cancel the print job.
Delete print jobs from the queue. (→P.529)
Delete unneeded jobs stored on the hard disk.
(→P.565)
Mail box full. Now printing without saving data.
Cause
Corrective Action
No more space is available on the printer’s hard disk, After printing, this message is cleared.
so jobs are now printed without saving them. (Print
Delete unneeded jobs stored on the hard disk.
jobs can no longer be saved on the hard disk.)
(→P.565)
Mail box nearly full.
Cause
There is now less than 1 GB available for personal
boxes on the printer hard disk.
704 Error Message
Corrective Action
Delete unneeded jobs stored in Personal Boxes.
(→P.565)
Messages regarding the hard disk
Mail box full. Delete unwanted data
Cause
100 jobs are stored in the Personal Box.
Corrective Action
Delete unneeded jobs stored in Personal Boxes.
(→P.565)
Mail box full. Cannot save.
Cause
Saved jobs exceed the Personal Box capacity.
Corrective Action
Press the Stop button to cancel the print job.
Delete print jobs from the queue. (→P.529)
Delete unneeded jobs stored on the hard disk.
(→P.565)
Error Message 705
Other Messages
Other Messages
GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number)
Cause
There is a problem with the print job.
Corrective Action
Try printing again, using the correct printer driver.
It is also possible to continue printing in this state.
However, you may not be able to obtain the desired
printing results.
ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number)
Cause
An error requiring service may have occurred.
Corrective Action
Write down the error code and message, turn off the
printer, and contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or
number)
Cause
Corrective Action
The last portion of roll paper was used during a
print job. The paper was not advanced because the
trailing edge is taped to the roll.
Turn off the printer and remove the roll from the
printer before restoring power.
Fastening tape or the Belt Stopper has not been
removed inside the Top Cover.
Turn off the printer, open the Top Cover and remove
the tape or the Belt Stopper before restoring power.
An error requiring service may have occurred.
Turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds
before restoring the power.
If the message is displayed again, write down the
error code and message, turn off the printer, and
contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Prepare for parts replacement.
Cause
It is almost time to replace consumables for which
service is required.
706 Error Message
Corrective Action
If Parts replacement time has passed. is displayed,
you can continue to use the printer for some time.
Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Other Messages
Parts replacement time has passed.
Cause
It is past the recommended time to replace
consumables for which service is required.
Corrective Action
Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Unknown le.
Cause
Invalid data format.
Corrective Action
Check the print job and resend it.
Calibration There is a problem with the multi-sensor.
Cause
The performance of a sensor inside the printer may
be impaired.
Corrective Action
Press the OK button and cancel calibration. Contact
your Canon dealer for assistance.
Multi-sensor error
Cause
Corrective Action
Direct sunlight or strong lighting may be shining on
the printer and causing the sensor to malfunction.
Take steps to ensure the printer is not used when
exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting.
The performance of a sensor inside the printer may
be impaired.
Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Roll feed unit err
Cause
The Roll Feed Unit is not working.
Corrective Action
Turn off the printer, remove the Roll Feed Unit
momentarily, and then reinstall it.
(→P.146)
(→P.147)
If the message is still displayed after you do this,
contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
No Roll Feed Unit.
Cause
The printer has received a print job that species
rolls, but the Roll Feed Unit is not installed.
Corrective Action
Install the Roll Feed Unit and resend the print job.
(→P.147)
Error Message 707
708
Index
Index
A
Basic Printing Workflow.............................................91
Borderless Printing..................................................270
About This User Manual..............................................1
Borderless Printing at Actual Size...................263, 284
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from
Applications (Mac OS X).........................................454
Borderless Printing....................................263, 284
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from
Applications (Windows)...........................................404
Print Image with Actual Size......................264, 285
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the
Operating System Menu (Windows)........................406
Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X).....................473
Adjusting Color on the Trailing Edge of Sheets.......585
Borderless Printing Method.......................263, 284
Borderless Printing at Actual Size
(Mac OS X)......................................................267, 288
Borderless Printing at Actual Size
(Windows).......................................................265, 286
Adjusting Images.....................................................206
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the
Roll Width................................................................277
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver..................206
Borderless Printing............................................277
Color Adjustment...............................................206
Borderless Printing Method...............................277
Color Mode........................................................206
Scale to fit Roll Paper Width..............................278
Gray Tone Adjustment.......................................209
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the
Roll Width (Mac OS X)............................................281
Matching............................................................207
Adjusting the feed amount.......................................577
Adjusting the Feed Amount Automatically...............577
Adjusting the feed amount during printing.........579
Adjusting the Feed Amount Manually......................580
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the
Roll Width (Windows)..............................................279
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match
the Paper Size (Mac OS X).....................................274
Adjusting the feed amount during printing.........582
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match
the Paper Size (Windows).......................................272
Adjusting the Measurement Scale for Better
Accuracy..................................................................583
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size.....270
Borderless Printing............................................270
Adjusting the Printhead...........................................572
Borderless Printing Method...............................270
Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Automatically....572
Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Manually...........574
Fit Paper Size....................................................271
Borderless printng not possible...............................696
Adjusting the Printhead Height................................576
Check roll width and spacers............................696
Adjusting the Vacuum Strength...............................587
Adjustments for Better Print Quality........................572
An error message is shown on the Display
Screen.....................................................................666
Check supported paper.....................................696
C
Attaching the Spacer for Borderless Printing....144
Calibration There is a problem with the
multi-sensor.............................................................707
Mounting the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment....143
Canceling print jobs.................................................103
Removing the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment...143
Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X......................106
Removing the Spacer for Borderless Printing...144
Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel..........103
Attaching Accessories to the Roll Holder................143
Canceling Print Jobs from Windows........................105
B
Cannot adjust band.........................................699, 701
Cannot adjust printhead..................................700, 701
Back..........................................................................14
Banding in different colors occurs...........................672
Basic Environmental Performance............................88
Packaging materials............................................88
Printer..................................................................88
Cannot calibrate......................................................700
Cannot connect the printer to the network..............676
Cannot cut paper.....................................................695
Cannot detect papr..................................................694
Cannot execute this command. Use other paper....699
Index 709
Index
Cannot feed paper...................................................694
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper..........................127, 657
Cannot Load Sheets................................................664
Color adjustment.....................................................588
Cannot print as specified.........................................699
Color Adjustment Sheet: Color (Windows)..............414
Press Load/Eject and replace paper with A4/LTR
(vertical) or larger..............................................699
Object Adjustment dialog box............................415
Press Load/Eject and replace roll with 10 in.
wide or larger roll...............................................699
Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome
(Windows)...............................................................420
Object Adjustment dialog box............................421
Cannot print over a NetWare network.....................678
Color Settings Pane: Color......................................461
Cannot print over a network....................................676
Object Adjustment dialog box............................462
Cannot print over a TCP/IP network........................678
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X)......468
Cannot print over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks...679
Color Adjustment pane: Monochrome...............468
Carriage.....................................................................18
Colors in printed images are uneven.......................673
Centering originals..................................................326
Configuring NetWare Network Settings...................507
Checking for Nozzle Clogging.................................624
Configuring the Communication Mode Manually.....677
Checking Images Before Printing............................349
Checking Ink Tank Levels........................................621
Configuring the Destination for AppleTalk Network
(Macintosh)..............................................................512
Checking the Free Hard Disk Space.......................569
Activating AppleTalk on the printer....................512
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor................570
Configuring the Destination (Mac OS X)...........513
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor............570
Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network
(Macintosh)..............................................................517
Using RemoteUI................................................569
Using the Control Panel....................................569
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before
Printing....................................................................349
Open Preview When Print Job Starts
(Windows).........................................................349
Preview (Macintosh)..........................................350
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
(Mac OS X)......................................................353, 452
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
(Windows).......................................................351, 400
Checking the Print Quality.......................................623
Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge
Capacity..................................................................638
Choosing a Paper for Printing.................................225
If the paper type is not listed for selection.........225
Media type.........................................................225
Configuring the Destination for TCP/IP Network
(Macintosh)..............................................................515
Configuring the Destination (Mac OS X)...........515
Configuring the IP Address on the Printer...............481
Configuring the IP Address Using ARP and PING
Commands..............................................................484
Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility.................................446, 482, 509
Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control
Panel.......................................................................483
Configuring the Printer Driver Destination
(Macintosh)..............................................................510
Configuring the Printer Driver Destination
(Windows)...............................................................495
Configuring the Printer's AppleTalk Network
Settings........................................................... 489, 511
Choosing Paper for Printing....................................225
Configuring the Printer's NetWare Network
Settings...........................................................490, 498
Choosing the Document Type and Printing
Conditions (Mac OS X)............................................222
Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network
Settings...................................................................487
Choosing the Document Type and Printing
Conditions (Windows).............................................220
Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X).....................450
Cleaning Inside the Top Cover................................641
Cleaning Spurs Used in Paper Feeding..................645
Cleaning the Paper Retainer...................................644
Cleaning the Printer.................................................640
Cleaning the Printer Exterior...................................640
Cleaning the Printhead....................................625, 648
Cleaning the Printhead..............................625, 648
Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot)....130, 656
Clearing Jammed Paper from the Tray...........159, 661
710 Index
Checking a preview of the settings....................450
Checking a print preview...................................451
Confirming Print Settings (Windows).......................398
Checking a preview of the settings....................398
Checking a print preview...................................399
Conserving roll paper..............................................337
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without
Top and Bottom Margins.........................................343
No Spaces at Top or Bottom
(Conserve Paper)..............................................343
Index
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without
Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X)......................346
E
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without
Top and Bottom Margins (Windows).......................344
Email Notification When Printing is Finished or
Errors Occur............................................................493
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90
Degrees...................................................................337
End of paper feed....................................................695
Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper)......337
Erasing Data on the Printer's Hard Disk..................571
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90
Degrees (Mac OS X)...............................................340
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90
Degrees (Windows).................................................338
Control Panel.......................................................21, 24
Enhanced Printing Options......................................206
ERROR Exxx-xxxx
(x represents a letter or number).............................706
Error Message.........................................................684
Error Messages.......................................................686
Error messages.................................................686
Correcting Print Misalignment.................................572
Other Messages................................................687
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing..............................367
Automatic Cutting..............................................367
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X)..........369
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows)............368
Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper
Automatically...........................................................140
D
Excessive temperature or humidity..........................700
F
Favorites Sheet (Windows).....................................430
Feeding Paper from the Roll Feed Unit...................145
Feeding Roll Paper Manually..................................131
File read error..........................................................704
Deleting Saved Jobs...............................................565
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
(Mac OS)...........................................................568
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
(Windows).........................................................567
Using RemoteUI................................................566
Using the Control Panel....................................565
Depression on the leading edge is left....................664
Detection of the Remaining Roll Paper...................132
Device Settings Sheet (Windows)...........................434
Device Setup Utility.................................................444
Digital Photo Front-Access......................................440
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images
(Mac OS X)..............................................................213
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images
(Windows)...............................................................210
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing
Photos (Mac OS X).................................................180
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing
Photos (Windows)...................................................178
Frequently Asked Questions...................................654
Front..........................................................................13
G
Displaying a List of Saved Jobs..............................540
GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number)...................706
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
(Macintosh)........................................................543
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and
Colors for Printing....................................................216
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
(Windows).........................................................542
Advanced Settings............................................216
Using RemoteUI................................................541
Enhancing Printing Quality................................219
Using the Control Panel....................................540
Print Priority.......................................................216
Displaying Details of Saved Jobs............................556
Print Quality.......................................................217
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
(Mac OS)...........................................................559
Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS X).........................469
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
(Windows).........................................................557
Gray Adjustment Sheet (Windows).........................422
Using RemoteUI................................................556
Do Not Save Print Jobs in the Common Box..........528
Documents are printed crooked..............................675
Documents are printed in monochrome..................675
Color Settings....................................................218
Gray Adjustment................................................469
Gray Adjustment................................................422
H
Handling Paper........................................................108
Handling rolls........................................................... 116
Index 711
Index
Handling sheets.......................................................148
Loading Sheets Manually........................................151
Hard Disk.................................................................518
Hard disk error.........................................................704
Loading heavyweight paper in the Front Paper
Feed Slot...........................................................153
Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx
(x represents a letter or number).............................706
Loading the Roll in the Printer.................................122
How to use this manual...............................................1
HTML Version of the Manual for Printing.....................5
Printing a group of individual topics in the
manual...................................................................8
Printing a group of topics in the manual................5
Printing selected topics.......................................10
I
Loading paper in the Top Paper Feed Slot........151
M
Mac OS X Software.................................................447
Mail box full.............................................................704
Mail box full. Cannot save.......................................705
Mail box full. Delete unwanted data........................705
Mail box full. Now printing without saving data........704
Mail box nearly full...................................................704
If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound.....................681
Main Menu Operations..............................................39
Image Edges are Blurred or White Banding
Occurs.....................................................................674
Accessing Menus................................................40
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.....................444
imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh).............478
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)...........439
Immediately After Borderless Printing, the Trailing
Edge Margin is Soiled During Regular Printing.......670
Improving the Print Quality......................................623
Initializing the Network Settings..............................494
Ink insufficient..........................................................697
Ink Level Detection..................................................682
Disabling ink level detection..............................682
Ink level detection..............................................682
Ink Level: Check......................................................698
Ink Tank Cover (Inside)..............................................19
Ink tank error...........................................................698
Ink Tanks.................................................................614
Installation problems...............................................680
Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup
Utility................................................................445, 508
Executing menu commands................................43
Specifying menu items........................................41
Specifying numerical values................................42
Main Menu Settings...................................................59
Adjust Printer.......................................................64
Information..........................................................69
Interface Setup....................................................65
Job Management.................................................63
Maintenance........................................................66
Media Menu.........................................................60
Paper Details.......................................................61
System Setup......................................................67
Main Menu Settings (During Printing).......................70
Information..........................................................71
Job Mgmt Menu...................................................72
Main Pane (Mac OS X)...........................................455
Configuration using Advanced Settings.............456
Configuration using Easy Settings....................455
Installing the Roll Feed Unit....................................147
Main Sheet (Windows)............................................408
Insufficient paper for job..........................................690
Configuration using Advanced Settings.............409
Introduction..................................................................1
Configuration using Easy Settings....................408
L
Layout Sheet (Windows).........................................426
Line thickness is not uniform (Windows).................675
Lines are misaligned...............................................675
Loading and Printing on Rolls...................................93
Loading and Printing on Sheets in the Paper Feed
Slot............................................................................98
Loading Rolls in the Roll Feed Unit.........................121
Loading Rolls on the Roll Holder............................. 119
712 Index
Maintenance............................................................614
Maintenance Cartridge............................................633
Maintenance cartridge full.......................................703
Maintenance cartridge problem...............................703
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation...............................................................357
Mirror.................................................................357
Orientation.........................................................357
Rotate 180 degrees...........................................357
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation (Mac OS X)...........................................360
Index
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation (Windows).............................................358
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
(Windows).........................................................537
Managing Queued Jobs (Deleting or Preempting
Other Jobs)..............................................................529
Using RemoteUI................................................536
Network Environment..............................................479
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor................531
Network environment........................................480
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor............531
System requirements........................................479
Using RemoteUI................................................530
Network Setting.......................................................479
Using the Control Panel....................................530
Network Setting (Mac OS X)...................................510
Manual printing is selected, but a roll is loaded.......693
Network Setting (Windows).....................................495
Matching Pane........................................................463
No ink left................................................................697
Ambient Light Adjust..........................................465
No ink tank loaded...................................................698
Driver Matching Mode (Kyuanos)
(Using Mac OS X 10.4 or later).........................464
No Maintenance Cartridge capacity.........................703
Driver Matching Mode
(Using Mac OS X 10.2.8 - 10.3.9).....................463
No Roll Feed Unit............................................692, 707
ICC Matching Mode...........................................467
Light Source Check Tool...................................466
No maintenance cartridge.......................................703
O
Matching Sheet (Windows).....................................416
Optional accessories.................................................81
Ambient Light Adjust..........................................417
Other Maintenance..................................................649
Driver Matching Mode (Kyuanos)......................416
Other Messages......................................................706
ICC Matching Mode, Driver ICM Mode and Host
ICM Mode..........................................................419
Other problems........................................................681
Light Source Check Tool...................................418
Output Stacker........................................................162
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X)....459
Output Stacker Precautions....................................162
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows)......412
Menu Structure..........................................................44
Main Menu...........................................................44
Main menu during printing...................................57
Submenus...........................................................56
Messages advising to check the maintenance
cartridge are not cleared.........................................681
Other useful settings...............................................354
P
Page Options Dialog Box (Windows)......................428
Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X)................................470
Page Setup Sheet (Windows).................................423
Paper.......................................................................108
Messages regarding ink..........................................697
Paper cannot be cut................................................664
Messages regarding paper......................................688
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box
(Mac OS X)..............................................................458
Messages regarding printheads..............................701
Messages regarding printing or adjusment.............699
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box
(Windows)............................................................... 411
Messages regarding the hard disk..........................704
Paper is not cut straight...........................................664
Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge.....703
Paper jam................................................................693
Moving Saved Jobs.................................................551
Paper loaded askew................................................694
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
(Mac OS)...........................................................554
Paper Mismatch......................................................688
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
(Windows).........................................................553
Paper size not detected...........................................690
Paper rubs against the Printhead............................668
Using RemoteUI................................................551
Paper Size Options Dialog Box (Windows).............425
Multi-sensor error....................................................707
Paper Sizes............................................................. 113
Rolls.................................................................. 115
N
Sheets............................................................... 113
Naming Personal Boxes..........................................536
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
(Mac OS)...........................................................539
Papr Type Mismatch................................................688
Parts replacement time has passed........................707
PHeads: wrong pos.................................................701
PosterArtist..............................................................441
Index 713
Index
Prepare for maint cart replacement.........................703
Prepare for parts replacement.................................706
Preparing to Transfer the Printer.............................649
Print Area...................................................................89
Rolls....................................................................90
Sheets.................................................................89
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a
Color imageRUNNER (Windows)....................201, 252
Completing the scanning settings on the Color
imageRUNNER. .......................................202, 253
Registering a hot folder on your
computer...................................................202, 252
Printed colors are inaccurate...................................671
Scanning the original and print an
enlargement..............................................203, 253
Printer Driver...................................................394, 447
Printing enlargements or reductions........................233
Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X).........................447
Printing from Mac OS X...........................................101
Printer Driver Settings (Windows)...........................394
Printing from the application software...............101
Printer Hard Disk Operations..................................518
Registering the printer.......................................101
Printer Menu Operations...........................................37
Printing from Photoshop..........................................183
Job Management Menu Operations....................38
Using the Plug-in to Print...................................183
Main menu operations during printing.................37
Using the Printer Driver to Print.........................183
Main menu operations when no print job is in
progress..............................................................37
Printing from Windows............................................100
Submenu operations...........................................38
Printer Modes............................................................29
Menu mode, and state of the Control Panel........33
Mode transition....................................................30
Modes..................................................................29
Offline, and state of the Control Panel................32
Online, and state of the Control Panel................31
Submenu mode, and state of the Control
Panel...................................................................33
Printer Parts..............................................................13
Printer Specifications.................................................83
Printhead.................................................................623
Printheads...............................................................623
Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors........386, 606
Monitor Matching.......................................387, 607
Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors
(Mac OS X)...................................................... 391, 611
Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors
(Windows).......................................................388, 608
Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient
Light (Mac OS X).............................................383, 603
Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient
Light (Windows)...............................................380, 600
Printing in Ideal Colors for Light in the Viewing
Environment....................................................371, 591
By selecting color tones on Charts before
printing.......................................................371, 591
Printing a List of Saved Jobs...................................544
Printing in Colors Matching the Measured
Ambient Light............................................371, 591
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X)........187, 475
Printing is faint.........................................................667
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Windows).........184, 436
Printing Large Posters (Windows)...........................324
Printing at full size...................................................256
Printing Line Drawings and Text..............................190
Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X)..............................260
Easy Settings....................................................190
Printing at Full Size (Windows)...............................258
Print Target........................................................190
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes.....291
Print targets for line drawings and text..............190
Printing CAD Drawings............................................190
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X)..........193
Printing does not start.............................................665
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows)............191
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a
Color imageRUNNER......................................201, 251
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other........307
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a
Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X)..................204, 254
imagePROGRAF Free Layout (Macintosh).......308
Completing the scanning settings on the Color
imageRUNNER.........................................205, 255
Registering a hot folder on your
computer...................................................204, 254
Scanning the original and print an
enlargement .............................................205, 255
Free Layout (Windows).....................................307
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other
(Mac OS X).............................................................. 311
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other
(Windows)...............................................................309
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously......................313
Roll paper (banner)...........................................313
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously
(Mac OS X)..............................................................315
714 Index
Index
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows)....314
Printing Saved Jobs................................................545
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet...........................317
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
(Mac OS)...........................................................549
Page Layout......................................................317
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
(Windows).........................................................547
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X).......320
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows).........318
Using RemoteUI................................................546
Printing Office Documents.......................................196
Easy Settings....................................................196
Print Target........................................................196
Print targets for office documents......................196
Printing Office Documents (Mac OS X)...................199
Using the Control Panel....................................545
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners
(Large-Format Printing)...........................................291
Fit Roll Paper Width..........................................291
Printing Office Documents (Windows).....................197
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners
(Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X).........................296
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes...................300
Print the banner.................................................298
Registering non-standard paper size in the
printer driver......................................................300
Register a Custom Page Size...........................297
Specifying custom media sizes for temporary
use.....................................................................300
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners
(Large-Format Printing; Windows)..........................292
Creating the banner in the application...............293
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes
(Mac OS X)..............................................................305
Printing the banner............................................294
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes
(Windows)...............................................................301
Printing With Watermarks........................................354
Registering a Custom Media Size.....................292
Printing by using Custom Media Size................303
Watermark.........................................................354
Printing by using Custom Size..........................301
Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and
so on (Windows)......................................................355
Printing on Oversized Paper...................................256
Oversize............................................................256
Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets..................91
Roll printing.........................................................91
Sheet printing......................................................92
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls.......................326
Centering originals relative to roll paper width..326
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X)...329
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows).....327
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets....................332
Centering originals on sheets............................332
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets
(Mac OS X)..............................................................335
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets
(Windows)...............................................................333
Printing Photos and Images....................................165
Easy Settings....................................................165
Printmonitor.............................................................478
Problem with Printhead x (x is L, R, or LR).............702
Problems Regarding Paper.....................................656
Problems with the printing quality............................667
Problems with the printing quality caused by the
type of paper...........................................................675
R
Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls...........................141
Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly
detected...................................................................698
Removing Heavyweight Paper from the Front Paper
Feed Slot.................................................................158
Removing Installed Printer Drivers..........................680
Removing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
(Windows).........................................................680
Print Target........................................................165
Removing imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
(Windows).........................................................680
Print targets for photos and images..................165
Removing printer drivers (Windows).................680
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X)................169
Printing Photos and Images (Windows)..................167
Removing Printer Drivers and imagePROGRAF
Printmonitor (Macintosh)...................................680
Printing Photos in Monochrome..............................172
Removing Rolls from the Roll Feed Unit.................125
Printing Photos in Monochrome (Mac OS X)..........175
Removing Rolls From the Roll Holder.....................126
Printing Photos in Monochrome (Windows)............173
Removing Sheets from the Top Paper Feed Slot....157
Printing Posters in Sections....................................323
Removing the Roll Feed Unit..................................146
Page Layout......................................................323
Removing the Roll from the Printer.........................124
Printing procedure.....................................................91
Index 715
Index
Renaming Saved Jobs............................................560
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
(Mac OS)...........................................................563
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
(Windows).........................................................562
Roll paper cannot be inserted into the Paper Feed
Slot..........................................................................664
Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded.......691
Roll printing is selected...........................................691
Using RemoteUI................................................560
Roller marks are left across the trailing edge of
paper...............................................................664, 670
Replacing Ink Tanks................................................615
RollWdthMismatch..................................................689
Compatible Ink Tank..........................................615
Precautions when handling an Ink Tank............615
S
Replacing an Ink Tank.......................................616
Saved Print Jobs.....................................................520
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge.....................633
Output Method ( Send job to )...........................521
Compatible Maintenance Cartridge...................633
Storage destination...........................................522
Precautions when handling the Maintenance
Cartridge............................................................633
Saving Print Jobs....................................................525
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge...............634
Replacing the Printhead..........................................626
Using the printer driver (Mac OS)......................527
Using the printer driver (Windows)....................526
Compatible Printhead........................................626
Saving Print Jobs Sent from Sources Other than the
Printer Driver...........................................................523
Precautions when handling the Printhead.........626
Specifying Output Method.................................523
Replacing the Printhead....................................627
Specifying Save and Print.................................524
When to replace the Printhead..........................626
Searching Topics.........................................................3
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value.......245
Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing
(Mac OS X)......................................................376, 596
Enlarged/Reduced Printing...............................245
Scaling...............................................................245
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value
(Mac OS X)..............................................................248
Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing
(Windows).......................................................372, 592
Selecting the Paper Size (Sheet)............................150
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value
(Windows)...............................................................246
Selecting the Paper Source............................. 116, 148
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width...................239
Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet)....................149, 227
Enlarged/Reduced Printing...............................239
Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes...................532
Fit Roll Paper Width..........................................239
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
(Mac OS)...........................................................535
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width
(Mac OS X)..............................................................242
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width
(Windows)...............................................................240
Selecting the Paper Type (Roll)....................... 117, 226
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
(Windows).........................................................533
Using RemoteUI................................................532
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size............233
Settings Summaries Dialog Box (Windows)............435
Enlarged/Reduced Printing...............................233
Sharing the Printer in Windows...............................496
Fit Paper Size....................................................233
Sheet printing is selected........................................692
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size
(Mac OS X)..............................................................236
Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows)..................429
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size
(Windows)...............................................................234
Hard Disk.............................................................87
Specifications............................................................83
Responding to Messages........................................684
Ink........................................................................85
Error messages (if action can be taken)............684
Interface..............................................................84
Error messages (if no action can be taken).......684
Paper...................................................................86
Other Messages................................................685
Printer..................................................................83
Warning messages............................................684
Printing performance...........................................84
Roll Feed Unit Cover (Inside)....................................17
Specifying NetWare Print Services..........................502
Roll feed unit err..............................................692, 707
Choosing the type of print services...................502
Roll Holder Set..................................................82, 142
Using NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to set up the
print server........................................................503
716 Index
Index
Specifying NetWare Protocols.................................505
The printer does not go on......................................681
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver.....................228
The Printer Does Not Respond Even if Print Jobs
are Sent...................................................................665
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
(Mac OS X)......................................................231, 448
The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper................666
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
(Windows).......................................................229, 396
The printer stops during a print job..........................666
Specifying Printer-Related Information....................492
The surface of the paper is dirty..............................670
Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls..................135
This paper cannot be used......................................691
Eject (waiting for ink to dry after printing)..........136
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet.........................307
Manual (when using media that cannot be cut
using the Cutter Unit ).......................................137
Top Cover (Inside).....................................................15
Paper Cutting (to have the roll cut at your
specified position)..............................................139
Troubleshooting.......................................................654
Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls..................133
The roll is empty......................................................692
Tray Feed Area..........................................................16
Turning the Printer On and Off..................................27
Turning the printer off..........................................28
Mac OS X..........................................................134
Turning the printer on..........................................27
Windows............................................................133
Specifying the Paper Length (Roll).......................... 118
Types of Paper........................................................108
Updating paper information............................... 111
Specifying the Printer's Frame Type........................500
Specifying the frame type using imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility...........................................500
Specifying the frame type using the printer
Control Panel.....................................................501
Stand.........................................................................81
Status Monitor.........................................................439
Viewing the Paper Reference Guide.................109
U
Unknown file............................................................707
Updating the Firmware............................................653
Confirming the firmware version........................653
Status Print................................................................74
Checking the information in the Status Print
report ..................................................................74
Printing Status Print Reports...............................74
Submenu Display......................................................73
Updating the firmware.......................................653
Use another paper...................................................699
Using Color Calibration to Adjust Colors.................588
Using Favorites.......................................................363
Favorites............................................................363
Information on the loaded paper.........................73
Printer information...............................................73
Remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and
ink levels..............................................................73
Using Favorites (Mac OS X)............................366, 453
Using Favorites (Windows).............................364, 402
Printing using the favorite..........................365, 403
Support Pane (Mac OS X).......................................474
Registering a favorite................................364, 402
Support Sheet (Windows).......................................433
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals................441
Switching Modes.......................................................34
Edit Using PosterArtist......................................441
Switching the Printer Online/Offline.....................34
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals
(Windows)...............................................................442
Switching to Menu Mode.....................................36
T
The back side of the paper is dirty..........................670
The contrast becomes uneven during printing........674
The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not
light up.....................................................................665
The Display Screen indicates the system is filling
with ink............................................................665, 698
The edges of the paper are dirty.............................669
The length of printed images is inaccurate..............674
The printer consumes a lot of ink............................681
Using RemoteUI......................................................486
Using the Output Stacker........................................163
Using the Printer With a Color imageRUNNER.......201
Utility Pane (Mac OS X)..........................................472
Utility Sheet (Windows)...........................................432
V
Vents.........................................................................20
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application
(Mac OS X)..............................................................460
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application
(Windows)...............................................................413
Index 717
Index
W
When to Replace Ink Tanks.....................................622
Before print jobs and maintenance that consume
a lot of ink..........................................................622
If a message for checking the ink is shown on
the Display Screen............................................622
If a message for ink replacement is shown on
the Display Screen............................................622
When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge.........639
If a message for checking the Maintenance
Cartridge is shown on the Display Screen........639
If a message for the Maintenance Cartridge
replacement is shown on the Display Screen...639
When much of the Maintenance Cartridge
capacity is depleted...........................................639
White dots about 1 mm (0.039 in) apart appear on
printed documents, in the direction paper is fed......674
Windows Software...................................................394
Working With Various Print Jobs.............................165
Wrong paper feed slot for this paper type...............693
X
x printhead error (x is Left or Right).........................702
x printhead needs cleaning. (x is Left or Right).......701
718 Index
©CANON INC. 2008